texlive[45450] Master/texmf-dist: novel (1oct17)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Mon Oct 2 23:57:58 CEST 2017
Revision: 45450
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=45450
Author: karl
Date: 2017-10-02 23:57:58 +0200 (Mon, 02 Oct 2017)
Log Message:
-----------
novel (1oct17)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-cover-template.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-example.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-example.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/badaboom.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/colormap-brown.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/copyrightcentered.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/font-tree.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/toc.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel-documentation.html
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-CGATSTR001.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-CalculateLayout.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-ChapterScene.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FOGRA39.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FileData.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FontDefaults.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-Footnotes.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-HeadFootStyles.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-Images.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-JC200103.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-LayoutSettings.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-TextMacros.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-glyphtounicode.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-microtype.cfg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-pdfx.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-xmppacket.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel.cls
Added Paths:
-----------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/authorsnote.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/bookofbeirh.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/chaptertitlesubtitle.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-default.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-montserrat-el.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-roboto.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/margins-trim-media.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mediasize.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/shakepi.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/starsmash-ht.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/thelowdown.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/workedforme.png
Removed Paths:
-------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/authorsnote-frontmatter.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mbcrecto.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mbcrectomar.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/plusminus.png
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/verified238.png
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-cover-template.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-cover-template.tex 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-cover-template.tex 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
-% !TeX program = LuaLaTeX
+% !TeX TS-program = LuaLaTeX
% !TeX encoding = UTF-8
-\documentclass[coverart]{novel} % v. 1.40.2 or later
+% IF YOU COMPILE THIS DOCUMENT: Be sure that this file, and its generated PDF,
+% have read/write permissions for any user. If they don't, then
+% compile will fail at the point where files are written.
+\documentclass[coverart]{novel} % v. 1.41 or later
\SetMediaSize{width}{height} % includes bleed
\SetTrimSize{width}{height} % without bleed
\SetTitle{example} % title required, might not be book title
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-example.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-example.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-example.tex 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/extras/novel-example.tex 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
-% !TeX program = LuaLaTeX
+% !TeX TS-program = LuaLaTeX
% !TeX encoding = UTF-8
%
% EXAMPLE OF NOVEL DOCUMENT CLASS
% Uses mostly default layout.
-\documentclass{novel} % v. 1.40.2 or later
+% IF YOU COMPILE THIS DOCUMENT: Be sure that this file, and its generated PDF,
+% have read/write permissions for any user. If they don't, then
+% compile will fail at the point where files are written.
+\documentclass{novel} % v. 1.41 or later
\SetTitle{Dark and Stormy}
\SetSubtitle{A Tale of Nights}
\SetAuthor{Dirk Hardcase}
@@ -54,6 +57,7 @@
\itshape{
\null
\vfill
+\textsc{Dark and Stormy}\par
Copyright ©2017 Dirk Hardcase.\par % Whichever year, copyright holder.
All Rights Reserved.\par % Usually no need to be elaborate.
\null
@@ -69,7 +73,7 @@
ISBN 0-12345678-9\par % Whatever it is. No barcode, just number.
\null
-Published by Dirk Hardcase,\par % Publisher is you, not the print/distribution service.
+Independently Published by Dirk Hardcase,\par % Publisher is you, not the print/distribution service.
Anytown, Anystate USA\par % Publisher's location.
www.example.com/dhardcase/publications/\par % Contact for publisher or author.
\null
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/authorsnote-frontmatter.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/authorsnote.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/authorsnote.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/authorsnote.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/authorsnote.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/authorsnote.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/badaboom.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/bookofbeirh.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/bookofbeirh.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/bookofbeirh.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/bookofbeirh.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/bookofbeirh.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/chaptertitlesubtitle.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/chaptertitlesubtitle.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/chaptertitlesubtitle.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/chaptertitlesubtitle.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/chaptertitlesubtitle.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/colormap-brown.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/copyrightcentered.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/font-tree.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-default.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-default.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-default.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-default.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-default.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-montserrat-el.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-montserrat-el.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-montserrat-el.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-montserrat-el.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-montserrat-el.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-roboto.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-roboto.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-roboto.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-roboto.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/headfont-roboto.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/margins-trim-media.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/margins-trim-media.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/margins-trim-media.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/margins-trim-media.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/margins-trim-media.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:executable
## -0,0 +1 ##
+*
\ No newline at end of property
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mbcrecto.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mbcrectomar.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mediasize.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mediasize.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mediasize.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mediasize.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/mediasize.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:executable
## -0,0 +1 ##
+*
\ No newline at end of property
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/plusminus.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/shakepi.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/shakepi.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/shakepi.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/shakepi.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/shakepi.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/starsmash-ht.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/starsmash-ht.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/starsmash-ht.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/starsmash-ht.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/starsmash-ht.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/thelowdown.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/thelowdown.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/thelowdown.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/thelowdown.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/thelowdown.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/toc.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/verified238.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/workedforme.png
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/workedforme.png
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/workedforme.png 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/workedforme.png 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/html-resources/workedforme.png
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel-documentation.html
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel-documentation.html 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel-documentation.html 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -20,6 +20,7 @@
em {font-weight:normal}
img {max-width:100%;}
img.nodisplaynav {display:none; height:1em;}
+img.openclose {display:none; height:1em;}
*.noimg {padding-left:1.5em;}
div.d1 {margin:0px 16px 16px 16px;}
div.d2 {margin:0px 0px 16px 16px; padding-bottom:0.5em; border-top:0; border-right: 0px; border-bottom:1px dotted #666666; border-left:1px dotted #666666;}
@@ -30,12 +31,14 @@
div.page {padding:16px 0px 16px 0px; border-top:4px solid #505050;}
div.codeblock {overflow:auto; margin:16px; padding: 8px; border: 1px solid #000000;}
div.codeblock p {text-indent:0px; white-space:nowrap;}
-code {font-family:monospace,monospace; font-size:0.92em; color:#200050; background:transparent none; padding:0px 3px 0px 3px;}
+code {font-family:monospace,monospace; font-size:92%; color:#200050; background:transparent none; padding:0px 3px 0px 3px;}
+*.smaller {font-weight:normal; font-size:88%;}
*.noindent {text-indent:0px;}
*.noindent1 {text-indent:0px; margin-top:8px;}
*.noindent2 {text-indent:0px; margin-bottom:8px;}
*.noindentcmd {text-indent:0px; margin-top:16px;}
*.isolate {padding-left:10px;margin-top:10px; margin-bottom:10px; text-indent:0px;}
+*.dbloc {padding-left:1.8em; visibility:hidden}
table.preconf {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; margin-top:20px; margin-bottom:20px; border:1px solid #000000}
table.preconf caption {font-weight:bold;}
table.preconf th {text-align:left; padding:6px; font-weight:normal; border-bottom:1px solid #000000;}
@@ -47,6 +50,7 @@
small {line-height:50%;}
span.ap {color: #996633;} /* percent comment in code */
*.floatright {float:right; margin-left:1em; margin-right:16px;}
+*.n {display:none; border:1px solid #990000; font-family:monospace,monospace; font-size:0.92em; font-weight:bold; padding: 0 0.3em 0 0.3em; color:#990000; background: #ffdddd none; margin-right:0.5em;}
p.centerimg {text-indent:0px; text-align:center; margin-top:0.5em; margin-bottom:0.5em;}
p.code {text-indent:0px; margin: 4px 16px 4px 16px; padding-left:32px;}
b em {font-weight:normal;}
@@ -53,7 +57,7 @@
hr.newpage {margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em; height:4px; color:#505050; background:#505050;}
p.overhang {margin-left:32px; text-indent:-16px;}
#master {position:relative;}
-#toc {font-size:14pt; width:30%; background:#ffffff none; position:fixed; overflow:scroll; height:98%;}
+#toc {display:block; font-size:14pt; width:30%; background:#ffffff none; position:fixed; overflow:scroll; height:98%;}
#main {float:right; background:#ffffff none; width:68%; padding-bottom:40px;}
#finish {clear:both;}
@media print {
@@ -63,34 +67,67 @@
}
</style>
+<script type="text/javascript">var doprint=false;</script>
+
+
+<!-- IF PROBLEM PRINTING: Remove comment lines from this small block of style and script: -->
+<!-- Remove this whole line for printing.
+ <style type="text/css">
+ #toc {display:none;}
+ #main {width:auto; float:none;}
+ div.codeblock p {text-indent:0px;}
+ </style>
+ <script type="text/javascript">doprint=true</script>
+Remove this whole line for printing. -->
+<!-- END IF PROBLEM PRINTING. -->
+
+
<script type="text/javascript">
-var imgsrc = new Image;
-imgsrc.src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAGAAAABACAYAAADlNHIOAAAArklEQVR42u3cYQ5AMAyA0Vbc/8p1Af6I6dj7DiCRl2IZMiIqFq6q9/S3EAAAamuf7Zo4usw0AQIAQAAACAAAAAJgJdyzIs2TVXiZAAEAIAAABACAAAAQAAACAEAAAAjA37q1IfPQ63014rhf29MxAQAACICb8Os3Om9FmAAAAgAAgAAAEAAAAgBAAAAIAAABWKW2z1RX3HwxAQAEAIAAANDlY+hs/9U0AQIAQMM6AO8BGoYCRA/4AAAAAElFTkSuQmCC";
+if(!doprint) {window.onload = loadnav;}
+function loadnav() {
+ nspans = document.getElementsByClassName("n");
+ placenav();
+}
function placenav(){
- navimgs = document.getElementsByClassName("nodisplaynav");
- for(var n=0; navimgs.length>n; n++){
- navimgs[n].src=imgsrc.src;
- navimgs[n].style.display="inline";
- navimgs[n].alt="1";
- plusminus(navimgs[n].id);
+ for(var n=0; nspans.length>n; n++){
+ nspans[n].style.display="inline";
+ nspans[n].style.cursor="pointer";
+ nspans[n].title="open";
+ nspans[n].setAttribute("data-state",0);
+ nspans[n].innerHTML="+";
+ nspans[n].onclick=openclose;
+ lstartclose(n);
}
}
-function plusminus(whichid){
- thisimg = document.getElementById(whichid);
- thisid = "u" + whichid.substring(1);
- thisul = document.getElementById(thisid);
- if(thisimg.alt=="1") {hideul(thisul);}
- if(thisimg.alt=="0") {showul(thisul);}
- thisimg.alt = 1 - thisimg.alt;
+function lstartclose(whichn) {
+ whichparid = nspans[whichn].parentElement.id;
+ whichdiv = document.getElementById("u" + whichparid.substring(1));
+ whichdiv.style.display="none";
}
-function hideul(thisul){
- thisul.style.display="none";
- thisimg.style.backgroundColor="#000000";
+function openclose(){
+ thisparid = this.parentElement.id;
+ thisdiv = document.getElementById("u" + thisparid.substring(1));
+ if(this.title=="close") {thisdiv.style.display="none";}
+ if(this.title=="open") {thisdiv.style.display="block";}
+ thisstate = this.getAttribute("data-state");
+ thisval = 1 - thisstate;
+ this.setAttribute("data-state",thisval);
+ if(this.getAttribute("data-state")=="1") {this.title="close"; this.innerHTML="–";}
+ if(this.getAttribute("data-state")=="0") {this.title="open"; this.innerHTML="+";}
}
-function showul(thisul){
- thisul.style.display="block";
- thisimg.style.backgroundColor="#ffffff";
+function openall() {
+ for(var n=0; nspans.length>n; n++){
+ nspans[n].setAttribute("data-state",1);
+ nspans[n].title="close";
+ nspans[n].innerHTML="–";
+ thisparid = nspans[n].parentElement.id;
+ thisdiv = document.getElementById("u" + thisparid.substring(1));
+ thisdiv.style.display="block";
+ }
}
+function closeall() {
+ placenav();
+}
</script>
</head>
@@ -101,403 +138,383 @@
<div id="toc" class="toc">
-<h3><a href="#main">Table of Contents</a></h3>
+<h3><a href="#main">Contents</a> <span class="smaller"><a href="javascript:openall();">(open all)</a> <a href="javascript:closeall();">(close all)</a></span></h3>
<ul><!-- master toc ul -->
- <li><p><img id="i1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h1"><b>1. Overview</b></a></p>
+ <li id="l1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h1"><b>1. Overview</b></a>
<ul id="u1">
- <li><p><img id="i1.1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h1.1">1.1 Description</a></p>
+ <li id="l1.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h1.1">1.1 Description</a>
<ul id="u1.1">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.1.1">1.1.1 Installation</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.1.2">1.1.2 Licensing</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.1.3">1.1.3 Credits</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.1.4">1.1.4 Success Story</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.1.5">1.1.5 Help Wanted</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.1.1">1.1.1 Installation</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.1.2">1.1.2 Licensing</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.1.3">1.1.3 Credits</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.1.4">1.1.4 Success Story</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.1.5">1.1.5 Help Wanted</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 1.1 -->
- <li><p><img id="i1.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h1.2">1.2 Important Behavior</a></p>
+ <li id="l1.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h1.2">1.2 Important Behavior</a>
<ul id="u1.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.1">1.2.1 Always UTF-8, No fontenc</a></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.2">1.2.2 Fonts Not Loaded by \usepackage or \RequirePackage</a></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.3">1.2.3 LuaLaTeX, Open Type Fonts</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.4">1.2.4 Standard TeX Size Commands Disabled</a></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.5">1.2.5 Academic Style Commands Disabled</a></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.6">1.2.6 Raster png/jpg Images Only</a></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.7">1.2.7 Beware of Special Characters</a></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.8">1.2.8 Avoid TeX Editors, IDEs</a></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.9">1.2.9 Write Using Word Processor</a></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h1.2.10">1.2.10 Think for Yourself</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.1">1.2.1 Always UTF-8, No fontenc</a>
+ <ul id="u1.2.1">
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.1.1">1.2.1.1 Polyglossia Languages</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.2">1.2.2 Fonts Not Loaded by \usepackage or \RequirePackage</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.3">1.2.3 LuaLaTeX, Open Type Fonts</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.4">1.2.4 Standard TeX Size Commands Disabled</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.5">1.2.5 Academic Style Commands Disabled</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.6">1.2.6 Raster png/jpg Images Only</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.7">1.2.7 Beware of Special Characters</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.8">1.2.8 Avoid TeX Editors, IDEs</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.9">1.2.9 Write Using Word Processor</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h1.2.10">1.2.10 Think for Yourself</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 1.2 -->
</ul>
</li><!-- end 1 -->
- <li><p><img id="i2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h2"><b>2. Document Class Options</b></a></p>
+ <li id="l2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h2"><b>2. Document Class Options</b></a>
<ul id="u2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.1">2.1 draft</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.2">2.2 graytext</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.3">2.3 shademargins</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.4">2.4 cropmarks</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.5">2.5 cropview</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.6">2.6 closecrop</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.7">2.7 xml</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.8">2.8 coverart</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h2.9">2.9 unblock (dev)</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.1">2.1 draft</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.2">2.2 graytext</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.3">2.3 shademargins</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.4">2.4 cropmarks</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.5">2.5 cropview</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.6">2.6 closecrop</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.7">2.7 xml</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.8">2.8 coverart</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h2.9">2.9 unblock (dev)</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 2 -->
- <li><p><img id="i3" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h3"><b>3. Metadata, File Data, PDF/X</b></a></p>
+ <li id="l3"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h3"><b>3. Metadata, File Data, PDF/X</b></a>
<ul id="u3">
- <li><p><img id="i3.1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h3.1">3.1 Definitions of Terms</a></p>
+ <li id="l3.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h3.1">3.1 Definitions of Terms</a>
<ul id="u3.1">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.1.1">3.1.1 ISBN Metadata</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.1.2">3.1.2 Printed Metadata</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.1.3">3.1.3 File (PDF) Metadata</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.1.1">3.1.1 ISBN Metadata</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.1.2">3.1.2 Printed Metadata</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.1.3">3.1.3 File (PDF) Metadata</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 3.1 -->
- <li><p><img id="i3.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h3.2">3.2 Rules for File Data</a></p>
+ <li id="l3.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h3.2">3.2 Rules for File Data</a>
<ul id="u3.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.2.1">3.2.1 Required, Prohibited?</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.2.2">3.2.2 Limited to Latin-1?</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.2.3">3.2.3 TeX Escapes</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.2.4">3.2.4 Forbidden Characters</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.2.1">3.2.1 Required, Prohibited?</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.2.2">3.2.2 Limited to Latin-1?</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.2.3">3.2.3 TeX Escapes</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.2.4">3.2.4 Forbidden Characters</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 3.2 -->
- <li><p><img id="i3.3" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h3.3">3.3 File Data Commands</a></p>
+ <li id="l3.3"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h3.3">3.3 File Data Commands</a>
<ul id="u3.3">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.3.1">3.3.1 \SetTitle{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.3.2">3.3.2 \SetAuthor{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.3.3">3.3.3 \SetSubtitle{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.3.4">3.3.4 \SetApplication{}, \SetProducer{}</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.3.1">3.3.1 \SetTitle</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.3.2">3.3.2 \SetAuthor</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.3.3">3.3.3 \SetSubtitle</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.3.4">3.3.4 \SetApplication, \SetProducer</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 3.3 -->
- <li><p><img id="i3.4" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h3.4">3.4 PDF/X</a></p>
+ <li id="l3.4"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h3.4">3.4 PDF/X</a>
<ul id="u3.4">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.4.1">3.4.1 Compliance Standards</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.4.2">3.4.2 Output Intents</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.4.3">3.4.3 Built-IN OI Codes</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.4.4">3.4.4 Other Output Intents</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.4.5">3.4.5 Embed *.icc or Not?</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h3.4.6">3.4.6 Finding *.icc Files</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.4.1">3.4.1 Compliance Standards</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.4.2">3.4.2 Output Intents</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.4.3">3.4.3 Built-IN OI Codes</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.4.4">3.4.4 Other Output Intents</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.4.5">3.4.5 Embed *.icc or Not?</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h3.4.6">3.4.6 Finding *.icc Files</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 3.4 -->
</ul>
</li><!-- end 3 -->
- <li><p><img id="i4" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h4"><b>4. Book Size and Page Layout</b></a></p>
+ <li id="l4"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h4"><b>4. Book Size, Page Layout, Fonts</b></a>
<ul id="u4">
- <li><p><img id="i4.1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h4.1">4.1 Book Dimensions</a></p>
+ <li id="l4.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h4.1">4.1 Book Dimensions</a>
<ul id="u4.1">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.1.1">4.1.1 Trim Size</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.1.2">4.1.2 Media Size, TrimBox</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.1.3">4.1.3 Margins</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.1.1">4.1.1 Trim Size</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.1.2">4.1.2 Media Size, TrimBox</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.1.3">4.1.3 Advanced: Cropmark Gap</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 4.1 -->
- <li><p><img id="i4.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h4.2">4.2 Layout Commands</a></p>
+ <li id="l4.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h4.2">4.2 Fonts, Normal Font Size</a>
<ul id="u4.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.2.1">4.2.1 \SetTrimSize{}{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.2.2">4.2.2 \SetMargins{}{}{}{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.2.3">4.2.3 \SetFontSize{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.2.4">4.2.4 \SetLinesPerPage{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.2.5">4.2.5 \SetHeadFootStyle{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.2.6">4.2.6 \SetHeadJump{}, \SetFootJump{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.2.7">4.2.7 \SetMediaSize[]{}{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h4.2.8">4.2.8 \SetCropmarkGap{}</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.2.1">4.2.1 Parent (Main) Font, Size</a>
+ <ul id="u4.2.1">
+ <li><a href="#h4.2.1.1">4.2.1.1 \SetParentFont</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.2.1.2">4.2.1.2 \SetFontSize</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.2.2">4.2.2 Descendant Fonts</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.2.3">4.2.3 Advanced: Deco Font</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.2.4">4.2.4 Advanced: Mono, Sans, Math</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.2.5">4.2.5 Advanced: New Fonts</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 4.2 -->
+ <li id="l4.3"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h4.3">4.3 Interior Page Layout</a>
+ <ul id="u4.3">
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.1">4.3.1 Margins</a>
+ <ul id="u4.3.1">
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.1.1">4.3.1.1 Gutter? Which?</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.2">4.3.2 Lines Per Page</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.3">4.3.3 Global Header/Footer</a>
+ <ul id="u4.3.3">
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.3.1">4.3.3.1 H/F Style Choices</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.3.2">4.3.3.2 Custom H/F Style</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.4">4.3.4 Tweaking Global H/F Style</a>
+ <ul id="u4.3.4">
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.4.1">4.3.4.1 Head/Foot Jump</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.4.2">4.3.4.2 \SetHeadFont</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.4.3">4.3.4.3 \SetLooseHead</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.4.4">4.3.4.4 \SetPageNumberStyle</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.4.5">4.3.4.5 \SetEmblems</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.4.6">4.3.4.6 Header Text</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.5">4.3.5 H/F Exceptional Pages</a>
+ <ul id="u4.3.5">
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.5.1">4.3.5.1 \thispagestyle</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h4.3.5.2">4.3.5.2 \SetChapterStartStyle</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li><!-- end 4.3 -->
</ul>
</li><!-- end 4 -->
- <li><p><img id="i5" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h5"><b>5. Fonts</b></a></p>
+ <li id="l5"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h5"><b>5. Chapter Structure</b></a>
<ul id="u5">
- <li><p><img id="i5.1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h5.1">5.1 Parent Font and Descendants</a></p>
+ <li id="l5.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h5.1">5.1 Starting a Chapter</a>
<ul id="u5.1">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.1.1">5.1.1 Where Fonts Are Used</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.1.2">5.1.2 Text Font</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.1.3">5.1.3 Chapter Font</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.1.4">5.1.4 Subch Font</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.1.5">5.1.5 Head Font</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.1">5.1.1 \clearpage, \cleartorecto</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.2">5.1.2 ChapterStart Environment</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.2.1">5.1.2.1 \SetChapterStartStyle</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.2.2">5.1.2.2 \SetChapterStartHeight</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.2.3">5.1.2.3 Begin ChapterStart</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.3">5.1.3 Chapter Title, etc.</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.3.1">5.1.3.1 \SetChapterFont, \SetSubchFont</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.3.2">5.1.3.2 \ChapterTitle, \ChapterSubtitle</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.3.3">5.1.3.3 \ChapterDeco</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.3.4">5.1.3.4 Chapter Epigraph</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.4">5.1.4 ChapterStart With Image</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.4.1">5.1.4.1 Text Over Image</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.1.4.2">5.1.4.2 Text Within Image</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 5.1 -->
- <li><p><img id="i5.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h5.2">5.2 Other Pre-Defined Fonts</a></p>
+ <li id="l5.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h5.2">5.2 Continuous Chapters</a>
<ul id="u5.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.2.1">5.2.1 Sans and Mono Fonts</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.2.2">5.2.2 Math Font: Forget It</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.2.3">5.2.3 Deco Font</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.2.1">5.2.1 Short ChapterStart</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h5.2.2">5.2.2 \QuickChapter</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 5.2 -->
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.3">5.3 Defining New Fonts</a></p></li>
- <li><p><img id="i5.4" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h5.4">5.4 Font Customization Syntax</a></p>
- <ul id="u5.4">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.4.1">5.4.1 Font Family vs. File Name</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.4.2">5.4.2 Set/New by Family/Filename</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.4.3">5.4.3 Open Type Features</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.4.4">5.4.4 Scale Pseudo-Feature</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.4.5">5.4.5 Color and Opacity</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.4.6">5.4.6 \CreateFontFeature{}{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.4.7">5.4.7 Local Feature Changes</a></p></li>
+ <li id="l5.3"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h5.3">5.3 Scene Breaks</a>
+ <ul id="u5.3">
+ <li><a href="#h5.3.1">5.3.1 \SetScenebreakIndent</a></li>
</ul>
- </li><!-- end 5.4 -->
- <li><p><img id="i5.5" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h5.5">5.5 Superscripts, Subscripts</a></p>
- <ul id="u5.5">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.5.1">5.5.1 \SetMarkers[]{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h5.5.2">5.5.2 \realmarker, \fakemarker</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 5.5 -->
-
+ </li><!-- end 5.3 -->
</ul>
</li><!-- end 5 -->
- <li><p><img id="i6" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h6"><b>6. Headers and Footers</b></a></p>
+ <li id="l6"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h6"><b>6. Text Size, Style, Position, Notes</b></a>
<ul id="u6">
- <li><p><img id="i6.1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h6.1">6.1 Global Header/Footer Settings</a></p>
+ <li id="l6.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h6.1">6.1 Text Sizes</a>
<ul id="u6.1">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.1.1">6.1.1 \SetHeadJump{}, \SetFootJump{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.1.2">6.1.2 \SetHeadFootStyle{}</a></p>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.1.3">6.1.3 \SetEmblems{}{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.1.4">6.1.4 \SetPageNumberStyle{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.1.5">6.1.5 \SetHeadFont[]{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.1.6">6.1.6 \SetLooseHead{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.1.7">6.1.7 \SetChapterStart{}</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.1.1">6.1.1 Standard Sizes: Disabled!</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.1.2">6.1.2 Local sizing: \charscale</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.1.3">6.1.3 Environment: parascale</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.1.4">6.1.4 Open Type Scale</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 6.1 -->
- <li><p><img id="i6.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h6.2">6.2 Local Header/Footer Settings</a></p>
+ <li id="l6.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h6.2">6.2 General Styling</a>
<ul id="u6.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.2.1">6.2.1 \SetVersoHeadText{}, \SetRectoHeadText{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h6.2.2">6.2.2 \thispagestyle{}</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.2.1">6.2.1 Italics and Emphasis</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.2.2">6.2.2 Bold and Semibold</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.2.3">6.2.3 Underlining</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.2.4">6.2.4 Small Caps, Acronyms</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.2.5">6.2.5 Local Tracking</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.2.6">6.2.6 Local Font Selection</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.2.7">6.2.7 Local Font Features</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.2.8">6.2.8 Text Color (grayscale)</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 6.2 -->
+ <li id="l6.3"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h6.3">6.3 Positioning and Alignment</a>
+ <ul id="u6.3">
+ <li><a href="#h6.3.1">6.3.1 What to Avoid</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h6.3.2">6.3.2 Some Useful Commands</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li><!-- end 6.3 -->
</ul>
</li><!-- end 6 -->
- <li><p><img id="i7" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h7"><b>7. Text</b></a></p>
+ <li id="l7"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h7"><b>7. Interior Images, Cover Artwork</b></a>
<ul id="u7">
- <li><p><img id="i7.1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h7.1">7.1 Text Sizes</a></p>
+ <li id="l7.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h7.1">7.1 Raster Images Only</a>
<ul id="u7.1">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.1.1">7.1.1 Standard Sizes: Disabled!</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.1.2">7.1.2 Local sizing: \charscale[]{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.1.3">7.1.3 Environment: parascale</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.1.4">7.1.4 Open Type Scale</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.1.1">7.1.1 Use PNG or JPG</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.1.2">7.1.2 Saving the Resolution</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.1.3">7.1.3 Removing Private Metadata</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 7.1 -->
- <li><p><img id="i7.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h7.2">7.2 General Styling</a></p>
+ <li id="l7.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h7.2">7.2 Interior Image Workflow</a>
<ul id="u7.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.2.1">7.2.1 Italics and Emphasis</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.2.2">7.2.2 Bold and Semibold</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.2.3">7.2.3 Underlining</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.2.4">7.2.4 Small Caps, Acronyms</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.2.5">7.2.5 Local Tracking</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.2.6">7.2.6 Local Font Selection</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.2.7">7.2.7 Local Font Features</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.2.8">7.2.8 Text Color (grayscale)</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.2.1">7.2.1 Line Art in GIMP</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.2.2">7.2.2 Grayscale in GIMP</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.2.3">7.2.3 Scaling After \Rework</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 7.2 -->
- <li><p><img id="i7.3" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h7.3">7.3 Positioning and Alignment</a></p>
+ <li id="l7.3"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h7.3">7.3 Placing Images</a>
<ul id="u7.3">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.3.1">7.3.1 What to Avoid</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h7.3.2">7.3.2 Some Useful Commands</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.3.1">7.3.1 \charscale Text</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.3.2">7.3.2 \InlineImage</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.3.3">7.3.3 Text Over \InlineImage</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.3.4">7.3.4 \BlockImage</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h7.3.5">7.3.5 \BlockImage With Text</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 7.3 -->
+ <li id="l7.4"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h7.4">7.4. Color Cover Artwork</a>
+ <ul id="u7.4">
+ <li id="l7.4.1"><a href="#h7.4.1">7.4.1 Begin with PNG</a></li>
+ <li id="l7.4.2"><a href="#h7.4.2">7.4.2 Get Some Software</a></li>
+ <li id="l7.4.3"><a href="#h7.4.3">7.4.3 CMYK at Ink Limit</a></li>
+ <li id="l7.4.4"><a href="#h7.4.4">7.4.4 Convert to PDF/X</a></li>
+ <li id="l7.4.5"><a href="#h7.4.5">7.4.5 Final Check</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li><!-- end 7.4 -->
</ul>
</li><!-- end 7 -->
- <li><p><img id="i8" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h8"><b>8. Images</b></a></p>
+ <li id="l8"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h8"><b>8. Book Design</b></a>
<ul id="u8">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.1">8.1 Use Raster Images</a></p></li>
- <li><p><img id="i8.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h8.2">8.2 Use Flattened png or jpg</a></p>
+ <li id="l8.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h8.1">8.1 Terminology</a>
+ <ul id="u8.1">
+ <li><a href="#h8.1.1">8.1.1 Sheet, Page, Leaf</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.1.2">8.1.2 Folio, Spine</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.1.3">8.1.3 Signature, Imposition</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li><!-- end 8.1 -->
+ <li id="l8.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h8.2">8.2 Book Manufacture</a>
<ul id="u8.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.2.1">8.2.1 Saving the Resolution</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.2.2">8.2.2 Removing Private Metadata</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.2.1">8.2.1 Perfect Binding</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.2.2">8.2.2 Library Binding</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.2.3">8.2.3 Other Bindings</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.2.4">8.2.4 Paper, Cover Materials</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end 8.2 -->
- <li><p><img id="i8.3" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h8.3">8.3 Line Art vs. Grayscale</a></p>
+ <li id="l8.3"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h8.3">8.3 Interior Structure</a>
<ul id="u8.3">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.3.1">8.3.1 Line Art in GIMP</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.3.2">8.3.2 Grayscale in GIMP</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.3.3">8.3.3 Scaling After \Rework</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 8.3 -->
- <li><p><img id="i8.4" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h8.4">8.4 Placing Images</a></p>
- <ul id="u8.4">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.4.1">8.4.1 \charscale</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.4.2">8.4.2 \InlineImage</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.4.3">8.4.3 Text Over \InlineImage</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.4.4">8.4.4 \BlockImage</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h8.4.5">8.4.5 \BlockImage and Text</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 8.4 -->
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 8 -->
-
- <li><p><img id="i9" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h9"><b>9. Front Matter</b></a></p>
- <ul id="u9">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.1">9.1 Useful Commands in Front Matter</a></p></li><!-- end 9.1 -->
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.2">9.2 Chapter-Like Sections in Front Matter</a></p></li><!-- end 9.2 -->
- <li><p><img id="i9.3" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h9.3">9.3 Examples of Front Matter Pages</a></p>
- <ul id="u9.3">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.1">9.3.1 Sample Title Page</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.2">9.3.2 Sample Copyright Page</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.3">9.3.3 Sample Dedication</a></p>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.4">9.3.4 Sample Epigraph</a></p>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.5">9.3.5 Sample Table of Contents</a></p>
- <ul>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.5.1">9.3.5.1 Environment: toc</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.5.2">9.3.5.2 \tocitem and \tocitem*</a></p></li>
+ <li id="l8.3.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h8.3.1">8.3.1 Display, Chapter-Like</a>
+ <ul id="u8.3.1">
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.1.1">8.3.1.1 Display Pages</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.1.2">8.3.1.2 Chapter-Like Sections</a></li>
</ul>
</li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.6">9.3.6 Sample Foreword</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.7">9.3.7 Sample Preface</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.8">9.3.8 Sample Acknowledgements</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.9">9.3.9 Sample Map</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h9.3.10">9.3.10 Characters, Synopsis</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 9.3 -->
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 9 -->
-
- <li><p><img id="i10" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h10"><b>10. Front/Main Matter Transition</b></a></p>
- <ul id="u10">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h10.1">10.1 Introduction in Front Matter</a></p></li>
- <li><p><img id="i10.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h10.2">10.2 Author's Note in Front Matter</a></p>
- <ul id="u10.2">
- <li><p><a href="#h10.2.1">10.2.1 Sample Author's Note</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 10.2 -->
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h10.3">10.3 Second Half-Title in Front Matter</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h10.4">10.4 Part Separator in Main Matter</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h10.5">10.5 Second Half-Title in Main Matter</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h10.6">10.6 Introduction in Main Matter</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h10.7">10.7 Prologue in Main Matter</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h10.8">10.8 Chapters</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 10 -->
-
- <li><p><img id="i11" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h11"><b>11. Chapter Structure</b></a></p>
- <ul id="u11">
- <li><p><img id="i11.1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h11.1">11.1 Environment: ChapterStart</a></p>
- <ul id="u11.1">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.1.1">11.1.1 Chapter Title, Subtitle, Deco</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.1.2">11.1.2 Default ChapterStart Header/Footer</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.1.3">11.1.3 \thispagestyle at ChapterStart</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.1.4">11.1.4 ChapterStart With Image</a></p>
- <ul>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.1.4.1">11.1.4.1 Text Over Image</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.1.4.2">11.1.4.2 Text Within Image</a></p></li>
+ <li id="l8.3.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h8.3.2">8.3.2 Front Matter</a>
+ <ul id="u8.3.2">
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.1">8.3.2.1 Half-Title, i</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.2">8.3.2.2 Blank, ii</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.3">8.3.2.3 Title Page, iii</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.4">8.3.2.4 Copyright Page, iv</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.5">8.3.2.5 Dedication</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.6">8.3.2.6 Epigraph</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.7">8.3.2.7 Table of Contents</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.8">8.3.2.8 Foreword, Preface, Intro</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.9">8.3.2.9 Acknowledgements</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.10">8.3.2.10 Author's Note</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.11">8.3.2.11 Map</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.2.12">8.3.2.12 Second Half-Title</a></li>
</ul>
</li>
+ <li id="l8.3.3"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h8.3.3">8.3.3 Main Matter</a>
+ <ul id="u8.3.3">
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.3.1">8.3.3.1 Half-Title in Main</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.3.2">8.3.3.2 Part Separator</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.3.3">8.3.3.3 Introduction</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.3.4">8.3.3.4 Prologue</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.3.5">8.3.3.5 Chapters</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.3.6">8.3.3.6 Epilogue, Conclusion</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.3.7">8.3.3.7 End Notes, Appendix</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li id="l8.3.4"><span class="n"></span><a href="#h8.3.4">8.3.4 At Very End</a>
+ <ul id="u8.3.4">
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.4.1">8.3.4.1 Back Matter? Not!</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#h8.3.4.2">8.3.4.2 About the Author</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
</ul>
- </li><!-- end 11.1 -->
- <li><p><img id="i11.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h11.2">11.2 \QuickChapter and Breaks</a></p>
- <ul id="u11.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.2.1">11.2.1 \QuickChapter</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.2.2">11.2.2 \scenebreak and Others</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.2.3">11.2.3 \IndentAfterScenebreak</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.2.4">11.2.4 \linebreak</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h11.2.5">11.2.5 Widows, Orphans, Clubs</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 11.2 -->
+ </li><!-- end 8.3 -->
</ul>
- </li><!-- end 11 -->
+ </li><!-- end 8 -->
- <li><p><img id="i12" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h12"><b>12. Footnotes, Endnotes</b></a></p>
- <ul id="u12">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h12.1">12.1 Footnotes</a></p></li>
- <li><p><img id="i12.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h12.2">12.2 Endnotes</a></p>
- <ul id="u12.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h12.2.1">12.2.1 \endnote, \ResetEndnote, \memo{}</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h12.2.2">12.2.2 \endnotetext{}{}</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 12.2 -->
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h12.3">12.3. Regarding Back Matter</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h12.4">12.4. \cleartoend</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 12 -->
+ <li><i>Appendices:</i></li>
- <li><p><img id="i13" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#h13"><b>13. Cover Artwork</b></a></p>
- <ul id="u13">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h13.1">13.1 Begin with PNG</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h13.2">13.2 Get Some Software</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h13.3">13.3 Convert to CMYK at Ink Limit</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h13.4">13.4 Convert to PDF/X</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#h13.5">13.5 Final Check</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end 13 -->
-
- <li><p><img id="iA" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#hA"><b>Appendix A. Book Terminology</b></a></p>
+ <li id="lA"><span class="n"></span><a href="#hA"><b>A. Emergency Rework</b></a>
<ul id="uA">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hA.1">A.1 Sheet, Page, Leaf</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hA.2">A.2 Folio, Spine</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hA.3">A.3 Signature, Imposition</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hA.4">A.4 Perfect Binding</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hA.5">A.5 Library Binding</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hA.6">A.6 Paper and Cover Materials</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#hA.1">A.1 \ReworkTrimSize</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hA.2">A.2 \ReworkMargins</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hA.3">A.3 Example of Rework</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hA.4">A.4 Limitations of Rework</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hA.5">A.5 Scaling Images</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end A -->
- <li><p><img id="iB" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#hB"><b>Appendix B. Six-Page Front Matter</b></a></p>
+ <li id="lB"><span class="n"></span><a href="#hB"><b>B. Six-Page Front Matter</b></a>
<ul id="uB">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hB.1">B.1 Half-Title to Copyright</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hB.2">B.2 Post-Copyright</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#hB.1">B.1 Half-Title to Copyright</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hB.2">B.2 Post-Copyright</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end B -->
- <li><p><img id="iC" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#hC"><b>Appendix C. Shopping for Fonts</b></a></p>
+ <li id="lC"><span class="n"></span><a href="#hC"><b>C. Shopping for Fonts</b></a>
<ul id="uC">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hC.1">C.1 Licensing Issues</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hC.2">C.2 Technical Issues</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hC.3">C.3 Appearance Issues</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#hC.1">C.1 Licensing Issues</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hC.2">C.2 Technical Issues</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hC.3">C.3 Appearance Issues</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end C -->
- <li><p><img id="iD" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#hD"><b>Appendix D. 240% Ink Limit</b></a></p>
+ <li id="lD"><span class="n"></span><a href="#hD"><b>D. 240% Ink Limit</b></a>
<ul id="uD">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hD.1">D.1 Bright Colors Preserved</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hD.2">D.2 Natural Light Preserved</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hD.3">D.3 Dark, Rich Colors Lost</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#hD.1">D.1 Bright Colors Preserved</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hD.2">D.2 Natural Light Preserved</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hD.3">D.3 Dark, Rich Colors Lost</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end D -->
- <li><p><img id="iE" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#hE"><b>Appendix E. Command Summary</b></a></p>
+ <li id="lE"><span class="n"></span><a href="#hE"><b>E. Fontspec Syntax</b></a>
<ul id="uE">
- <li><p><img id="iE.1" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#hE.1">E.1 Preamble</a></p>
+ <li id="lE.1"><span class="n"></span><a href="#hE.1">E.1 Family vs. File Name</a>
<ul id="uE.1">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.1.1">E.1.1 Class Options</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.1.2">E.1.2 Metadata (File Data)</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.1.3">E.1.3 Layout</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.1.4">E.1.4 Specifying Fonts</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.1.5">E.1.5 Other Configuration</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#hE.1.1">E.1.1 Set/New by Name</a></li>
</ul>
</li>
- <li><p><img id="iE.2" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#hE.2">E.2 Document Body</a></p>
+ <li id="lE.2"><span class="n"></span><a href="#hE.2">E.2 Open Type Features</a>
<ul id="uE.2">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.2.1">E.1.1 Book Divisions</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.2.2">E.2.2 Page Management</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.2.3">E.2.3 Environments and Other Blocks</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.2.4">E.2.4 Scene Breaks, First Lines</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.2.5">E.2.5 Inline Text Effects</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.2.6">E.2.6 Footnotes and Endnotes</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.2.7">E.2.7 Images</a></p></li>
+ <li><a href="#hE.2.1">E.2.1 Scale Pseudo-Feature</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hE.2.2">E.2.2 Color and Opacity</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#hE.2.3">E.2.3 Create Font Feature</a></li>
</ul>
</li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.3">E.3 Disabled LaTeX Commands</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hE.4">E.4 Discouraged LaTeX Commands</a></p></li>
+ <li id="lE.3"><a href="#hE.3">E.3 Local Font Modification</a></li>
</ul>
</li><!-- end E -->
- <li><p><img id="iF" src="data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAAEAAAABCAYAAAAfFcSJAAAAC0lEQVQI12NgAAIAAAUAAeImBZsAAAAASUVORK5CYII=" class="nodisplaynav" onclick="plusminus(this.id);" title="open/close" alt=""/><a href="#hF"><b>Appendix F. Emergency Rework</b></a></p>
- <ul id="uF">
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hF.1">F.1 \ReworkTrimSize</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hF.2">F.2 \ReworkMargins</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hF.3">F.3 Example of Rework</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hF.4">F.4 Limitations of Rework</a></p></li>
- <li><p class="noimg"><a href="#hF.5">F.5 Scaling Images</a></p></li>
- </ul>
- </li><!-- end F -->
+ <li id="lF"><span class="n" style="visibility:hidden"></span><a href="#hF"><b>F. Sample Document</b></a></li><!-- end F -->
</ul><!-- end master toc ul -->
-<div style="height:1em"><script type="text/javascript">placenav();</script></div>
+<div style="height:1em"></div>
</div><!-- end toc -->
@@ -508,9 +525,10 @@
<!-- **************************************************************************************** -->
<h1 id="h0">Document class <i>novel</i> - documentation</h1>
-<p class="noindent">Version: 1.40, 2017/09/14. This is a complete re-write of the documentation, with the HTML in a single file, and many improvements. Version 1.40.1: Minor doc changes, especially correction to code for converting cover image to CMYK. Version 1.40.2: More minor doc changes.</p>
+<p class="noindent">Version: 1.41, 2017/10/02. This is a complete re-write of the documentation, with the HTML in a single file, and many improvements.</p>
<p class="noindent" style="position:relative"><span style="position:absolute; top:-.1em; font-size:150%; color:#008000">☺</span> An example novel, text and cover, can be found at the <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://github.com/RobtAll/novel/">GitHub project page</a>, in the "other" folder. You will find its TeX source and the resulting PDF. The PDF text and cover meet submission standards for major American print-on-demand services.</p>
<p>A smaller example document is <i>novel-example.tex</i>, which can be found in the <i>extras</i> folder within this documentation.</p>
+<p><b>Printing this file:</b> Some user agents have difficulty previewing this HTML file for print, or printing it. If you wish to print (to PDF or paper) then do this: Edit the HTML file, in a text editor that understands UNIX-type line endings. Look slightly below the top (around line 70) for a block of code that is commented-out. Remove the comment, so that the block is effective.</p>
<p> </p>
@@ -517,10 +535,10 @@
<div id="page01" class="page">
-<h2 id="h1">1. Overview</h2>
+<h2 id="h1">1. Overview</h2>
<div class="d2" id="d1">
-<h3 id="h1.1">1.1. Description</h3>
+<h3 id="h1.1">1.1. Description</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d1.1">
<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> document class is intended for writers of original fiction, such as novels and collections of short stories. For this purpose, it provides easy-to-use settings that are pre-configured for the most common book Trim Sizes, according to publishing standards.</p>
<p>The class uses the advanced typographic features of LuaTeX, fontspec, and microtype, and has the built-in capability to produce files compliant with PDF/X. All these capabilities are accessed via simple front-end commands that do the work for you, thereby reducing the learning curve.</p>
@@ -532,48 +550,48 @@
<p>Before you panic, look at the <i>novel-example.tex</i> demonstration file, in the documentation <i>extras</i> folder. It uses mostly default settings. See how easy that can be?</p>
<p>If you are ready to typeset your great detective novel, or your collection of sci-fi short stories, then <i>novel</i> is for you. And, if you are unfamiliar with the terminology of commercial book publishing, have no fear! This documentation is here to help you.</p>
-<h4 id="h1.1.1">1.1.1. Installation</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.1.1">1.1.1. Installation</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.1.1">
<p class="noindent">Your TeX installation must be based on TeXLive 2016 or later (including any recent MiKTeX). If you are on Linux and your distro is something such as Ubuntu 16.04 LTS (Xenial), then the distro version of TeXLive is too old. However, you can still install a more recent version of TeXLive manually, to your home directory, from <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://www.tug.org/texlive/">tug.org</a>.</p>
<p>The <i>novel</i> package is not (yet) included with default TeX distribution. Once you have TeX working, use its package manager to install <i>novel</i>. The TeX package will be placed in <i>(texroot)/tex/lualatex/novel/</i>, the documentation will be placed in <i>(texroot)/doc/lualatex/novel/</i>, and the included font will be placed in <i>(texroot)/fonts/opentype/novel/</i>.</p>
<p>Fonts from the <i>libertinus</i> package are required, and may be installed via your TeX package manager. Note that a <i>novel</i> document does not request the package, so you will not see an error if the fonts are not installed! Instead, if you have not manually specified which fonts to use, it will automatically look for pre-installed Libertinus fonts (or Linux Libertine O) as defaults.</p>
<p>Since you will be using LuaLaTeX, the font cache will be updated to include the newly-installed fonts, the next time you run this software. However, I recommend that you force a full cache refresh, by locating the <i>luatex-cache</i> directory, and discard its contents. The cache may be anywhere (sadly), so you will have to hunt for it. If you have never used LuaLaTeX before, it may not exist. If there are any updates to the fonts, then a manual cache refresh is necessary.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.1.1 -->
-<h4 id="h1.1.2">1.1.2. Licensing</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.1.2">1.1.2. Licensing</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.1.2">
<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> document class, including software, examples, documentation and supporting images, is distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Publc License, either version 1.3c of this license or (at your option) any later version. The exception is the included font NovelDeco.otf, which is distributed under terms of the SIL Open Font License, v.1.1.</p>
<p>To ensure that your book may be sold commercially, be careful to use only fonts that allow commercial usage. That may exclude some of the fonts in the LaTeX font catalog. See this documentation regarding fonts.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.1.2 -->
-<h4 id="h1.1.3">1.1.3. Credits</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.1.3">1.1.3. Credits</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.1.3">
<p class="noindent">My method of "programming" largely involves using or modifying code provided by others under allowable license terms. Thus, within the TeX code files, you will find places where small or large pieces of code are the work of someone else. Names or organizations are credited in-place within the TeX code, according to license.</p>
<p>Various clipart graphics were obtained from <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://openclipart.org">openclipart.org</a>. The <i>NovelDeco.otf</i> font is partly derived from <i>Linux Libertine O</i>, using <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://fontforge.github.io/en-US/">FontForge.</a></p>
<p>I read popular fiction a lot, usually books from my local public library. Even if I do not read a particular book, I often look a how it is designed. Throughout this documentation, where I recommend a design or style, it is most often based on the preponderance of designs/styles as I have seen in softcover or hardcover popular fiction, from major publishers in the U.S.A. That does not include "mass-market paperback" versions (the kind seen at supermarkets, rather than at bookstores). I may mention several common alternatives.</p>
-<p>I have also consulted the authoritative <i>Chicago Manual of Style (CMoS)</i> hardcover 16th Edition. In the case of fiction, <i>CMoS</i> notes that publishers sometimes don't do things the official way.</p>
-<p>Although I have looked at a variety of web sites concerning book design, I give these the least credence, because (a) often they merely duplicate each other's opinions, right or wrong, and (b) they may simply echo <i>CMoS</i>.</p>
-</div>
+<p>I have also consulted the authoritative <i>Chicago Manual of Style</i> (CMoS) hardcover 16th Edition. In the case of fiction, <i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i> notes that publishers sometimes don't do things the official way.</p>
+<p>Although I have looked at a variety of web sites concerning book design, I give these the least credence, because (a) often they merely duplicate each other's opinions, right or wrong, and (b) they may simply echo <i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i>.</p>
+</div><!-- end 1.1.3 -->
-<h4 id="h1.1.4">1.1.4. Success Story</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.1.4">1.1.4. Success Story</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.1.4">
<p class="noindent">In August 2017, an original novel using this document class was published. The text block used nearly all the default settings, and was electronically submitted as PDF/X-1a:2001.</p>
<p>The color cover image was designed in RGB using <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://inkscape.org">Inkscape</a> and <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://www.gimp.org">GIMP</a>, coverted to CMYK at 240% ink limit using <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="http://www.graphicsmagick.org">GraphicsMagick</a> and the methods described in this documentation, then finally converted to PDF/X-1a:2001 using this document class.</p>
<p>Both files were automatically reviewed and accepted <i>on first attempt</i>, with the actual printed books for sale within a few days of file submission.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.1.4 -->
-<h4 id="h1.1.5">1.1.5. Help Wanted</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.1.5">1.1.5. Help Wanted</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.1.5">
<p class="noindent">Although this package works for me, and there are no <i>known</i> issues, bugs are always possible. You may file an issue at the <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://github.com/RobtAll/novel">GitHub project page</a>, or contact me by e-mail if you do not have a GitHub account. My e-mail address is towards the top of the <i>novel.cls</i> file.</p>
<p>I, the original author of this package, am a retiree who prefers to move on to other things. If you are of a mind to take up long-term maintenance, then contact me by e-mail. If you already are a package developer with a <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://ctan.org/contact">CTAN</a> login, also contact them. You will need to understand elementary LuaLaTeX, fontspec, Unicode, Open Type fonts, PDF/X, and the general needs of fiction writers in the printed (not e-book) market. However, Lua, XeTeX, TiKz, math, and physics are not required (possibly counterproductive).</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 1.1.5 -->
+</div><!-- end 1.1 -->
-<h3 id="h1.2">1.2. Important Behavior</h3>
+<h3 id="h1.2">1.2. Important Behavior</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d1.2">
<p class="noindent">There are several ways that <i>novel</i> is very different from other TeX document classes. Before you wonder why your document doesn't work, you need to understand the differences. All of these are features, not bugs. They are done with the intent of making <i>novel</i> best for its intended purpose.</p>
-<h4 id="h1.2.1">1.2.1. Always Use UTF-8, Without fontenc</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.1">1.2.1. Always Use UTF-8, Without fontenc</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.1">
<p class="noindent">You must create your document in utf-8 encoding. No OT1, no T1, no LY1, or other TeX font encoding that pre-dates cell phones.</p>
<p>Instead of typing TeX codes such as <code>\`{e}</code> you can simply paste <code>è</code> from a Unicode character map. Other alphabets such as Greek and Cyrillic are directly supported, as long as you choose fonts that support those character sets.</p>
@@ -580,39 +598,45 @@
<p>Do not call for <i>fontenc</i> in your Preamble. The <i>novel</i> class is pre-configured for utf-8.</p>
<p>If you use a plain text editor, or TeXWorks, or export plain text from a word processor, be sure that your text is encoded as utf-8, without byte order mark (BOM).</p>
<p>If you are on Windows, do not use Notepad! The free <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://notepad-plus-plus.org">Notepad++</a> (also <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://portableapps.com/apps/development/notepadpp_portable">Portable</a> version) is a suitable plain text editor. Configure it as specified, with utf-8 and without BOM. Does not matter whether UNIX or DOS line endings, as long as you are consistent.</p>
-</div>
-<h4 id="h1.2.2">1.2.2. Do Not Load Fonts via <code>\usepackage</code> or <code>\RequirePackage</code></h4>
+<h5 id="h1.2.1.1">1.2.1.1. Polyglossia Language Support</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d1.2.1.1">
+<p class="noindent">The pre-loaded <i>polyglossia</i> package (not <i>babel</i>) provides language support. By default, <i>novel</i> is configured for American English.</p>
+<p>If your document's language is something else, or if you will be writing in multiple languages, see the <i>polyglossia</i> package documentation regarding <code>\setdefaultlanguage</code> and other commands.</p>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.2.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 1.2.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h1.2.2">1.2.2. Do Not Load Fonts via <code>\usepackage</code> or <code>\RequirePackage</code></h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.2">
<p class="noindent">The method for loading fonts is described elsewhere on this page. Be sure you read that! For example, you cannot load a font with <code>\usepackage{<em>fontname</em>}</code> in this document class.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.2 -->
-<h4 id="h1.2.3">1.2.3. Use LuaLaTeX and Open Type fonts</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.3">1.2.3. Use LuaLaTeX and Open Type fonts</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.3">
<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/doordie.png" width="279" height="300" alt="Thou Shalt"/> With <i>novel</i>, you will be using the <i>LuaLaTeX</i> engine, whether you like it or not. No <i>pdfTeX</i>, no <i>XeTeX</i>, no <i>dvips</i>. You do not have to understand <i>Lua</i> code, since the heavy lifting is already done for you. Just follow the instructions in this documentation.</p>
<p>The built-in <i>fontspec</i> package handles modern Open Type fonts, and is able to access their internal features. The syntax is easy to learn, and very powerful. And, you can directly include text with diacritical marks, Greek, Cyrillic, and most other utf-8 encoded characters in your document. All you need are the fonts, and you probably have them. You will wonder why you never did this before.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.3 -->
-<h4 id="h1.2.4">1.2.4. Disabled standard text size commands</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.4">1.2.4. Disabled standard text size commands</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.4">
<p class="noindent">Would you like to size text, using command such as <code>\small</code> or<code> \LARGE</code> ? Bah! They will be ignored. Write these commands, and the text will appear at its usual size, just as if the commands did not exist.</p>
<p>There is a reason for this behavior, related to the need for constant line spacing. Thus, <i>novel</i> provides its own capability to size text, using different commands.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.4 -->
-<h4 id="h1.2.5">1.2.5. Disabled academic-purpose commands</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.5">1.2.5. Disabled academic-purpose commands</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.5">
<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/fpaper.png" width="134" height="215" alt="flunked math"/> Commands such as <code>\section</code>, <code>\chapter</code>, <code>\abstract</code>, <code>\index</code>, <code>\tableofcontents</code>, <code>\maketitle</code>, and many other structural commands will not work with <i>novel</i>. Those are for academic papers. The results they would produce (if enabled) would be inappropriate for fiction. If you attempt to use them, you will either get an error message, or they will simply be ignored.</p>
<p>Novelists do not need many ways to distinguish chapters. With <i>novel</i> there are commands specifically created for the needs of fictional works. They are described below.</p>
<p>Also, the <i>float</i> and <i>table</i> environments are ineffective. In <i>novel</i> there are specific ways to place images or construct a table of contents.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.5 -->
-<h4 id="h1.2.6">1.2.6. Images must be raster png or jpg</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.6">1.2.6. Images must be raster png or jpg</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.6">
<p class="noindent">You read that correctly. Sometimes fiction uses images, especially for the title page and chapter titles. With <i>novel</i>, do not use vector formats such as <i>eps</i>, <i>svg</i>, or <i>pdf</i> images. Use raster images in <i>png</i> or <i>jpg</i> format.</p>
<p>There is a reason for this, explained below, where the use of images is discussed in detail. Be sure to read it, as <i>novel</i> has its own way to place images, in a way that is most likely to work well with fiction.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.6 -->
-<h4 id="h1.2.7">1.2.7. Beware of $, %, and Other TeX Special Characters</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.7">1.2.7. Beware of $, %, and Other TeX Special Characters</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.7">
<p class="noindent">This is standard TeX behavior. Just a reminder!</p>
<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/trdol.png" width="238" height="67" alt="dollar is math mode"/> TeX has a number of special characters. If you type them in a document, they will not appear as an ordinary printed character, but will do something else. These are:</p>
@@ -620,15 +644,15 @@
<p>In most cases, an incorrect usage will provide an error message that can be easily deciphered. However, the dollar sign and percent symbol are tricky. Incorrect use of the dollar sign may either place your text in math mode (not your intent) or produce a baffling error message that points to an innocent package. The percent symbol normally produces no error, since it is a comment character. But then, whatever text follows on that line will be missing from your PDF.</p>
<p>Special characters, other than the backslash, are escaped by placing a backslash in front, thus: <code>\$</code> for the dollar sign, <code>\%</code> for percent. If you must print a backslash, <code>\string\</code> does it.</p>
<p class="noindent"><b>• Tip:</b> To avoid unforeseen problems, you should review your document in a text editor, prior to compiling. Search for any instances of special characters, particularly dollar and percent. Backslash them as needed.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.7 -->
-<h4 id="h1.2.8">1.2.8. Avoid TeX Editors and IDEs</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.8">1.2.8. Avoid TeX Editors and IDEs</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.8">
<p class="noindent">You must create your document in utf-8 encoding. You may use a plain text editor (with or without TeX code highlighting), export plain text from a word processor (recommended), or use the minimal <i>TeXWorks</i> GUI. If you use <i>TeXWorks</i>, be sure that you are not running scripts that change the content of your document.</p>
<p>Do not use another TeX editor, such as <i>Lyx</i> or <i>TeXstudio</i>, or an Integrated Development Environment (IDE). Those programs are often capable of inserting standard LaTeX code from menus. However, <i>novel</i> does not necessarily use that standard LaTeX code. The result may be unexpected.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.8 -->
-<h4 id="h1.2.9">1.2.9. Suggestion: Write Using a Word Processor</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.9">1.2.9. Suggestion: Write Using a Word Processor</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.9">
<p class="noindent">I suggest that you write your novel in a word processor rather than in a text editor. <i>MS Word</i> and similar programs work. I use <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://www.libreoffice.org">LibreOffice</a> (also <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://portableapps.com/apps/office/libreoffice_portable">Portable</a> version). If you use <i>LibreOffice</i>, version 5.3 or later is much better than earlier versions.</p>
<p>Why begin with a word processor? These programs can automatically substitute curly quotes and other characters. Remember than since you are using utf-8 encoding, you don't need to use TeX code for that, since you can simply insert the character directly. And, word processors have much better support for spell checking (and sometimes grammar). Just be sure that the word processor does not <i>automatically</i> correct your spelling, because any TeX code won't be in its dictionary.</p>
@@ -636,24 +660,24 @@
<p>In any case, be sure to export plain text as utf-8, then compile it with <i>lualatex</i>.</p>
<p class="noindent"><b>• Tip:</b> For the editing and proofreading phase, where spelling and grammar are carefully reviewed, I use a special font <i>CPmodified.otf</i>. This is my custom derivative of the <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://quoteunquoteapps.com/courierprime/">Courier Prime</a> regular font. <i>Cpmodified</i> can be found in the documentation <i>extras</i> folder. It is released under the SIL Open Font License v.1.1. To use this font for editing, install it in your <i>operating system</i>, not TeX. Then, call it from your word processor. The font includes Latin-1 and ANSI characters, and a few others. It is not quite monospaced (the em dash and ellipsis are longer). Punctuation is highly exaggerated, so you can see it more easily. My own experience is that most errors in the nearly-finished document involve punctuation.</p>
<p class="noindent"><b>• Tip:</b> Word processors usually make an incorrect substitution for certain English elisions (possibly in other languages also). When you type "Give 'em hell," the substitution may provide <i>Give ‘em hell</i>, but the correct rendition is <i>Give ’em hell</i>. Can you see the tiny difference in the direction of the single quote? Probably not on your computer screen, but it will be noticeable in print. The <i>CPmodified.otf</i> font makes the difference obvious.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 1.2.9 -->
-<h4 id="h1.2.10">1.2.10. Think for yourself</h4>
+<h4 id="h1.2.10">1.2.10. Think for yourself</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d1.2.10">
<p>When TeX processes a document on a paragraph-by-paragraph basis, it chooses the layout that has the least total "penalty." Penalties are assessed based on factors such as word spacing, inter-line spacing, hyphenation, widows, and orphans. You may choose the value of each penalty.</p>
<p>With <i>novel</i>, inter-line spacing is fixed, and there is no padding between paragraphs. No plus-or-minus. Hyphens are allowed, but strongly penalized. A reasonable amount of altered word spacing is allowed, and the built-in <i>microtype</i> package allows reasonable changes to letter spacing and the letters themselves. These choices achieve a high level of visual appeal and readability for flowing text.</p>
<p>However, there is little penalty for widows or orphans. When you process a document with <i>novel</i> you are likely to find widows and orphans on many pages. This choice was made for several reasons. First, attention to widows and orphans would reduce the effectiveness of the other, more important, layout penalties. Second, fiction often has numerous short paragraphs (especially with dialogue), and it is very difficult for software to deal with all of them. Third, a great deal of contemporary fiction has widows and orphans. Fourth, it's your book... You can rewrite it!</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 1.2.10 -->
+</div><!-- end 1.2 -->
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end 1 -->
</div><!-- end page01 -->
<!-- ********************************************************************** -->
<div id="page02" class="page">
-<h2 id="h2">2. Document Class Options</h2>
+<h2 id="h2">2. Document Class Options</h2>
<div class="d2" id="d2">
<p class="noindent">As with other LaTeX classes, <i>novel</i> is called this way:</p>
<p><code>\documentclass[options]{novel}</code></p>
@@ -662,7 +686,7 @@
<p>Still, there are a number of class options. As usual, options must be enclosed in braces and be separated by commas.</p>
<p>Note: The <i>debug</i> option, unique to version 1.38, has been removed.</p>
-<h3 id="h2.1">2.1. draft</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.1">2.1. draft</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.1">
<p class="noindent">The word DRAFT will appear at the upper left of each page.</p>
<p>In draft mode, a little black bar will be placed at the right side of text that didn't quite fit on the line. These locations are reported in the log file as "overfull hbox" warnings. The black bar is called an "overflow rule".</p>
@@ -669,9 +693,9 @@
<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/overflowrule.png" width="525" height="155" title="draft mode, overflow rule" alt="overflow rule"/></p>
<p>Some packages take note of whether or not the document is in draft mode, and change their behavior accordingly. However, the included <i>microtype</i> package will always be in final mode, and the included <i>hyperref</i> package will always be in draft mode.</p>
<p>In draft mode, PDF/X compliance is turned off, no matter what you specify.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 2.1 -->
-<h3 id="h2.2">2.2. graytext</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.2">2.2. graytext</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.2">
<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> document class is intended for black/white book interiors. Normally, any color command, even gray, will be ignored, and the text will be rendered black. This does not affect images.</p>
<p>The <i>graytext</i> option over-rides this restriction, and obeys grayscale color commands from the <i>xcolor</i> package, which is already loaded with the class. Non-grayscale colors will be converted to shades of gray.</p>
@@ -679,10 +703,10 @@
<p>Your book will not be printed with "gray ink." Instead, anything other than pure black will be emulated by a pattern of black dots. This is known as "halftone." It causes a reduction in resolution, so your gray text will appear somewhat fuzzy. Therefore, do not use very small text, or characters with fine lines.</p>
<p>Sometimes the halftone operation extends to nearby text that is not gray. So: Unlike the example shown above, it is a bad idea to mingle gray with the ordinary flow of black text. The most appropriate use of gray text is for special items such as chapter titles.</p>
<p>You may place darker text over a lighter background. But even though the resulting PDF meets standards, lighter text over darker background is unlikely to print as intended.</p>
-<p>See also <a href="#h7.2.8">section 7.2.8</a>.</p>
-</div>
+<p>See also <a href="#h7.3.3">section 7.3.3</a>.</p>
+</div><!-- end 2.2 -->
-<h3 id="h2.3">2.3. shademargins</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.3">2.3. shademargins</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.3">
<p class="noindent">This option is ignored unless using draft mode. It is not necessary to use the <i>graytext</i> option.</p>
<p><img class="floatright" style="margin-top:6px" src="html-resources/shademargins.png" width="132" height="205" title="shademargins" alt="shademargins"/> The <i>shademargins</i> option is simple: The margins will have a light gray background.</p>
@@ -690,9 +714,9 @@
<p>Some commands (in particular, images) allow their content to overflow the textblock area. With <i>shademargins</i> you can see where such object intrude into the margins.</p>
<p>Sometimes it is hard to see whether a centered object is really centered, because the left-right margins are not the same width. With <i>shademargins</i> you can more easily see centering.</p>
<p>Note that headers and footers are not part of the margins.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 2.3 -->
-<h3 id="h2.4">2.4. cropmarks</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.4">2.4. cropmarks</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.4">
<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" style="margin-top:6px" src="html-resources/cropmarks.png" width="205" height="265" title="cropmarks" alt="cropmarks"/> This option is ignored if the TrimSize is the same as the MediaSize (the usual situation). It works whether or not in draft mode.</p>
<p>If the PDF Media Size is larger than its finished TrimSize, you can place crop marks (also known as trim marks) to indicate where the paper will be cut. The <i>cropmarks</i> option makes the marks visible. If this option is not used, then no marks are placed, regardless of any other commands.</p>
@@ -701,100 +725,100 @@
<p class="code"><code>\SetCropmarkGap{<em>length</em>}</code></p>
<p>The cropmark gap is the distance between the Trim Box and where the crop lines begin. The purpose of the gap is so that the marks do not show on the trimmed paper, if the cut is a little bit off. In all cases, the far end of the cropmarks is 0.5in from the Trim Area. The gap is marked G in this diagram. The length must be least 0pt, and is more typically 0.125in or 0.250in. The default is 0.125in. </p>
<p>If your Trim is placed off-center in the Media, then only one pair of cropmarks will be visible.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 2.4 -->
-<h3 id="h2.5">2.5. cropview</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.5">2.5. cropview</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.5">
<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" style="margin-top:6px" src="html-resources/cropview.png" width="132" height="203" title="cropview" alt="cropview"/> This option is ignored if the TrimSize is the same as the MediaSize (the usual situation), because it is unnecessary. Also, it is ignored unless using draft mode.</p>
<p>With <i>cropview</i>, there is an internal instruction to PDF viewers, requesting that only the Trim Size be displayed on the screen, rather than the whole Media Size. This is useful during the layout phase, because it is hard to visualize layout when you have a small finished size floating in a much larger paper size. Nothing else is changed.</p>
<p>The accompanying image is the <i>cropview</i> display of the same page that was used to illustrate the <i>cropmarks</i> command. However, you do not need to have cropmarks, to use <i>cropview</i>.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 2.5 -->
-<h3 id="h2.6">2.6. closecrop</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.6">2.6. closecrop</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.6">
<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" style="margin-top:6px" src="html-resources/closecrop.png" width="110" height="186" title="closecrop" alt="closecrop"/> This option is only effective in draft mode. When used, the layout of your text is unchanged, but the surrounding margins are shrunk so that they just clear the live text area (which includes header and footer, if present). Also, the TrimSize is shrunk accordingly. The resulting PDF will be easier to read on a handheld device.</p>
<p>This does <em>not</em> produce an E-book, since the file will be missing some things that an E-book ought to have. The sole purpose of this option is to create a conveniently-sized file that you can carry around while you are thinking about edits and revisions.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 2.6 -->
-<h3 id="h2.7">2.7. xml</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.7">2.7. xml</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.7">
<p class="noindent">If you request your PDF to comply with PDF/X standards, it will automatically include XMP Metadata that can be seen as document properties in some (mostly professional) PDF reader software. The <i>xml</i> option exports this data with an xml header added, so that it can be independently viewed in software such as a browser.</p>
<p>This option is only for your information; the exported xml file is not necessary. Whether or not you choose this option will not affect the structure or content of your PDF. If you set PDF/X compliance to <i>off</i>, then there will be no exported xml file.</p>
<p>The exported file will be named <i>jobname-XMPasXML.xml</i>, where <i>jobname</i> is the file name of your *.tex document. If you wish to obtain the XMP packet, without the xml header, you can easily do that with a Unicode-compatible text editor. The necessary editing is obvious.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 2.7 -->
-<h3 id="h2.8">2.8. coverart</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.8">2.8. coverart</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.8">
<p class="noindent">This option is only used for cover artwork. See section 12.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 2.8 -->
-<h3 id="h2.9">2.9. unblock (primarily for developer use)</h3>
+<h3 id="h2.9">2.9. unblock (primarily for developer use)</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d2.9">
<p class="noindent">A number of LaTeX packages are known to be incompatible with <i>novel</i>, because "the way those packages do things" conflicts with "the way <i>novel</i> does things." If you attempt to load one of those packages, then the results you get may not be in agreement with the formats and styles described in this documentation, because the other package over-rides some of <i>novel's</i> own macros.</p>
<p>Therefore, at the end of your Preamble, <i>novel</i> reviews the loaded packages, and throws an error message if you included any of them via <code>\usepackage</code> or <code>\RequirePackage</code>. That also applies if you call some other package that chain-loads one of the forbidden packages.</p>
<p>The odds that you will need a forbidden package are small, because they generally pertain to layout for mathematical and academic papers (tables, floats, equations, diagrams, etc.).</p>
<p>If you specify document class option <i>unblock</i> then the list of forbidden packages will be disregarded by <i>novel</i>. Use at your own risk! This option is really intended for the convenience of developers, rather than ordinary users.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 2.9 -->
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end 2 -->
</div><!-- end page02 -->
<!-- ********************************************************************* -->
<div id="page03" class="page">
-<h2 id="h3">3. Metadata, File Data, and PDF/X</h2>
+<h2 id="h3">3. Metadata, File Data, and PDF/X</h2>
<div class="d2" id="d3">
<p class="noindent">The commands described on this page are used only in the Preamble.</p>
<p>These commands write non-printing information to the PDF file. Some of the information is used to identify and classify the file. Other information is read by the printer, to assist it with printing choices.</p>
<p>Unfortunately, some of the terms have slightly different meaning, depending on whether they are used in the context of printing, book distribution, or ebooks. To avoid confusion <em>within this documentation</em> I will use different terms when they mean different things. When you are communicating with your printing and distribution service, take care to ensure that your understanding of terminology is what they really mean.</p>
-<h3 id="h3.1">3.1. Definition of Terms</h3>
+<h3 id="h3.1">3.1. Definition of Terms</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d3.1">
<p class="noindent">This section is more detailed than it needs to be, because my review of various online forums (unrelated to TeX) shows a lot of user confusion.</p>
-<h4 id="h3.1.1">3.1.1. ISBN Metadata</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.1.1">3.1.1. ISBN Metadata</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.1.1">
<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/bookmanglerdashboard.png" width="500" height="309" alt="online form for ISBN metadata"/> When you obtain the ISBN for your book, either directly through the issuing agency or via your chosen print service, you will enter <em>ISBN Metadata</em> in an online form. This metadata will go into a database, and identify your printed book in distribution and sales channels. It neither knows nor cares about PDF. (If you were marketing a PDF ebook, instead of print, that would be a different story.)</p>
<p>ISBN Metadata includes title, author(s), subtitle if any, ISBN, other identifying information, and a description. The description is by way of advertising, and can usually be changed later; it need not appear anywhere in your book or PDF file, although some authors might use the description on the book's rear cover or cover flap.</p>
<p>Note: The ISBN refers to your <em>printed book</em>, not to the PDF file. You are not selling copies of the PDF.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.1.1 -->
-<h4 id="h3.1.2">3.1.2. Printed Metadata</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.1.2">3.1.2. Printed Metadata</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.1.2">
<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/megatitlepagesm.png" width="165" height="256" alt="printed metadata, cover page"/> <em>Printed Metadata</em> refers to the information that can be seen on paper, in expected places: the book cover, the title page, and the copyright page. Whether your book was printed from a PDF file, or by some other method, is not relevant.</p>
<p>Your print service will insist that the title, subtitle (if any), author, and ISBN in these places exactly match what appears in the ISBN database. Of course, you can (and usually will) use styling or images to make the Printed Metadata more attractive than the plain-text ISBN Metadata.</p>
<p>Some print services may object to artwork that is too fancy, on the grounds that it is difficult to discern the title and author. Although this is very unlikely, it is better to ask before committing resources.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.1.2 -->
-<h4 id="h3.1.3">3.1.3. File Data (PDF Metadata)</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.1.3">3.1.3. File Data (PDF Metadata)</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.1.3">
<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/megadocprops.png" width="298" height="215" alt="PDF metadata"/> When your PDF file is produced, internal metadata will be automatically created for the benefit of PDF reader software. <em>To avoid confusion, this documentation uses the term "File Data" to mean this internal PDF metadata.</em> You can see some of the File Data when you open the PDF in any reader, and go to File>Properties. To see all of it, you need professional software (such as Adobe Acrobat Pro).</p>
<p>Be sure to read the rules for File Data, below. Some of it is generic, and some is particular to TeX or to the <i>novel</i> class.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 3.1.3 -->
+</div><!-- end 3.1 -->
-<h3 id="h3.2">3.2. Rules for File Data</h3>
+<h3 id="h3.2">3.2. Rules for File Data</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d3.2">
<p class="noindent">File Data must conform to several specifications, in terms of what you may or may not write. Some of the limitations are imposed by the book distribution industry, which stores information in its databases a certain way.</p>
-<h4 id="h3.2.1">3.2.1. Required, Prohibited, Optional?</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.2.1">3.2.1. Required, Prohibited, Optional?</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.2.1">
-<p class="noindent">If PDF/X compliance is required, then you <em>must</em> at least set the title in File Data, using the \SetTitle{} command. Note that this title is not styled in any way.</p>
-<p>Some print services require a minimum amount of file data, particularly title and author, which must match the printed metadata and ISBN metadata for these fields. Other services may require that the book's ISBN number, with something like <i>_text</i> added, be used in place of the title (remember that underscore is a special character in LaTeX). You will have to communicate with your service, and determine their requirements.</p>
+<p class="noindent">If PDF/X compliance is required, then you <em>must</em> at least set the title in File Data, using the <code>\SetTitle</code> command. Note that this title is not styled in any way.</p>
+<p>Some print services require a minimum amount of file data, particularly title and author, which must match the printed metadata and ISBN metadata for these fields. Other services may require that the book's ISBN number, with something like <i>_text</i> added, be used in place of the title (remember that underscore is a special character in LaTeX, so it must be preceded by a backslash). You will have to communicate with your service, and determine their requirements.</p>
<p>Many print services do not care about File Data, one way or the other. Your PDF is passed through production according to its file name, not its internals. In such a case, assume that title and author are required.</p>
<p>Caution: Be sure that any included images are stripped of their own image metadata. The procedure is described on farther along in this documentation.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.2.1 -->
-<h4 id="h3.2.2">3.2.2. Limited to Latin-1?</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.2.2">3.2.2. Limited to Latin-1?</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.2.2">
<p class="noindent">At least in the USA, your print service may require that File Data be limited to characters in the Latin-1 set. This is because their production and distribution software uses Latin-1 for the database. Note that Latin-1 does not include curly quotes or em dash. You will still be using utf-8 encoding in your document files, but your choice of characters is restricted.</p>
<p>If it were not for the database limitation to Latin-1, you could give your book a Greek or Cyrillic title, because <i>novel</i> can do it, and so can the PDF.</p>
-<p>If your book has File Data using quotes, then use the special commands <code>\straightquote{}</code> and <code>\straightdblquote{}</code>. Be sure to use the braces, so that you don't have to worry about gobbled space. When you use these commands instead of typing ' or " you eliminate the risk that your software will automatically convert them to the forbidden curly quotes. Example title:</p>
+<p>If your book has File Data using quotes, then use the special commands <code>\straightquote{}</code> and <code>\straightdblquote{}</code>. Be sure to use the braces, so that you don't have to worry about gobbled space. When you use these commands instead of typing <code>'</code> or <code>"</code> you eliminate the risk that your software will automatically convert them to the forbidden curly quotes. Example title:</p>
<p class="code"><code>\SetTitle{That\straightquote{}s Amore} % That's Amore</code></p>
<p>If you are limited to Latin-1 in File Data, you can still use curly quotes and em dash on the cover and title page, and in headings. In <i>novel</i> there is no <code>\maketitle</code> command, so you may (and should) apply styling to the printed title, even though the File Data title cannot be styled.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.2.2 -->
-<h4 id="h3.2.3">3.2.3. TeX escapes</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.2.3">3.2.3. TeX escapes</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.2.3">
<p class="noindent">In File Data, you must obey the same TeX rules that apply everywhere: Certain characters have special meaning, and must be preceded by a backslash, if you wish to use them as ordinary characters. These are:</p>
<p><code># $ % & _ { }</code> (hash, dollar, percent, ampersand, underscore, left and right curly brackets)</p>
@@ -801,9 +825,9 @@
<p>Example: The title <em>Doing 9% & Gone</em> is coded:</p>
<p class="code"><code>\SetTitle{Doing 9\% \& Gone}</code></p>
<p>The above characters are rarely needed in File Data. Sometimes they must be spelled out, in order to agree with your book's ISBN Metadata. For example, you may need to write "and" rather than the ampersand.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.2.3 -->
-<h4 id="h3.2.4">3.2.4. Forbidden Characters</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.2.4">3.2.4. Forbidden Characters</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.2.4">
<p class="noindent">• Do not use the backslash <code>\</code> except as described above.</p>
<p class="noindent">• Do not use the tilde <code>~</code> or the circumflex <code>^</code>.</p>
@@ -811,44 +835,45 @@
<p class="noindent">• Do not use styling, such as <code>{\small text}</code> or <code>\textit{text}</code>.</p>
<p class="noindent">• Use only <code>\straightquote{}</code> and <code>\straightdblquote{}</code> if necessary, not TeX code for apostrophe or quote.</p>
<p class="noindent">• Do not use multiple hyphens to create longer dashes. Do not use em dash or en dash.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 3.2.4 -->
+</div><!-- end 3.2 -->
-<h3 id="h3.3">3.3. File Data Commands</h3>
+<h3 id="h3.3">3.3. File Data Commands</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d3.3">
<p class="noindent">Now that you understand what File Data means, and how it may be written, you can use commands to write it.</p>
-<h4 id="h3.3.1">3.3.1. <code>\SetTitle{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
+<h4 id="h3.3.1">3.3.1. <code>\SetTitle{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.3.1">
<p class="noindent">If you do not use the <code>\SetTitle{}</code> command, or leave it empty or blank, then the resulting PDF cannot comply with PDF/X standards. In <i>very rare</i> cases, that is desirable.</p>
-<p>This information is not automatically transferred to your book's title page. It will be used as default in certain page heading styles, but you can over-ride it. The information can be retrieved as \theTitle anywhere in your document.</p>
-</div>
+<p>This information is not automatically transferred to your book's title page. It will be used as default in certain page heading styles, but you can over-ride it. The information can be retrieved as <code>\theTitle</code> anywhere in your document.</p>
+</div><!-- end 3.3.1 -->
-<h4 id="h3.3.2">3.3.2. <code>\SetAuthor{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
+<h4 id="h3.3.2">3.3.2. <code>\SetAuthor{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.3.2">
<p class="noindent">This information is not automatically transferred to your book's title page. It will be used as default in certain page heading styles, but you can over-ride it. The information can be retrieved as <code>\theAuthor</code> anywhere in your document.</p>
-</div>
+<p>Use the name as it is spoken. Correct: Mary Smith. Incorrect: Smith, Mary. Possibly correct, if true: Mary Smith, Ph. D. (ask your print service).</p>
+</div><!-- end 3.3.2 -->
-<h4 id="h3.3.3">3.3.3. <code>\SetSubtitle{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
+<h4 id="h3.3.3">3.3.3. <code>\SetSubtitle{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.3.3">
<p class="noindent">There is no file data for subtitle! The only reason for using this command is if you wish to later retrieve the information as <code>\theSubtitle</code> in your document.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.3.3 -->
-<h4 id="h3.3.4">3.3.4 Advanced: <code>\SetApplication{<em>text</em>}</code> and <code>\SetProducer{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
+<h4 id="h3.3.4">3.3.4 Advanced: <code>\SetApplication{<em>text</em>}</code> and <code>\SetProducer{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.3.4">
<p class="noindent">The <i>Application</i>, also known as <i>CreatorTool</i>, is the program used to create your source document. Text editors, word processors, and page layout programs are the most common Applications (not specific to TeX). The PDF <i>Producer</i> is the program that converts the source document to PDF. In many cases, the Producer is a back-end, directly linked to the Application.</p>
<p>These details are automatically created when you compile your document, without any input from you. However, if you have the need to provide a custom text string for the Application or Producer, these commands will do it.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 3.3.4 -->
+</div><!-- end 3.3 -->
-<h3 id="h3.4">3.4. PDF/X</h3>
+<h3 id="h3.4">3.4. PDF/X</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d3.4">
<p class="noindent">Commercial printers are very likely to require PDF/X compliance. This ensures that your PDF meets a variety of criteria, by containing those things it must contain, and omitting those things it must not contain. Most perfectly valid PDF files are <em>not</em> PDF/X compliant, simply because they are not intended for commercial printing.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetPDFX[<em>output intent</em>]{<em>compliance standard</em>}</code> and starred version</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetPDFX[<em>OutputIntent</em>]{<em>ComplianceStandard</em>}</code> and starred version</p>
<p>If the <code>\SetPDFX</code> command is not used, it is <i>off</i> by default. Note that a non-compliant file is not a defective file! It complies with PDF standards, but not PDF/X standards. Some print services insist on PDF/X, and others don't care as long as the fonts are embedded (which they always are).</p>
-<h4 id="h3.4.1">3.4.1. Compliance Standards</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="3.4.1">
+<h4 id="h3.4.1">3.4.1. Compliance Standards</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d3.4.1">
<p class="noindent">The following choices are available:</p>
<p><code>X-1a:2001</code></p>
<p><code>X-1a:2003</code></p>
@@ -855,16 +880,16 @@
<p><code>X-3:2002</code></p>
<p><code>X-3:2003</code></p>
<p><code>off</code> (default)</p>
-<p>The first of these is the one that is most widely accepted in commercial printing. Anything meeting X-1a:2001 necessarily meets the other standards. If your book involved complicated color artwork, then the correct choice might be crucial. But for a black and white book block, X-1a:2001 is the preferred choice unless your print service says otherwise.</p>
-</div>
+<p>The first of these is the one that is most widely accepted in commercial printing. Anything meeting X-1a:2001 necessarily meets the other standards. If your book involved complicated color artwork, then the correct choice might be crucial. But for a black and white book block, <span style="white-space:nowrap">X-1a:2001</span> is the preferred choice unless your print service says otherwise.</p>
+</div><!-- end 3.4.1 -->
-<h4 id="h3.4.2">3.4.2. Output Intent</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.4.2">3.4.2. Output Intent</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.4.2">
-<p class="noindent">Unless compliance is <i>off</i>, an Output Intent is always required. However, <i>novel</i> treats this as an optional argument, because it will automatically use CGATSTR001 as default Output Intent.</p>
+<p class="noindent">Unless compliance is <i>off</i>, an Output Intent is always required. However, <i>novel</i> treats this as an optional argument, because it will automatically use <i>CGATSTR001</i> as default Output Intent.</p>
<p>Output Intent informs the printer that you "intend" your PDF to be printed according to certain printer capabilities. If you took the trouble to soft-proof your PDF on a color-calibrated monitor using color-managed software, and if the printer's capabilities actually correspond to the intent, then the printed result will closely match what you expected. This is very important in commercial color printing (such as for cover artwork), but nearly irrelevant for a black and white book block. Nevertheless, an Output Intent is required to meet PDF/X compliance.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.4.2 -->
-<h4 id="h3.4.3">3.4.3. Built-in Output Intent Codes</h4>
+<h4 id="h3.4.3">3.4.3. Built-in Output Intent Codes</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d3.4.3">
<p class="noindent">There are three pre-defined choices:</p>
<p><code>CGATSTR001</code> (default)</p>
@@ -871,25 +896,25 @@
<p><code>FOGRA39</code></p>
<p><code>JC200103</code></p>
<p>The first of these, more properly named "CGATS TR 001" with spaces, is also known as "US Web Coated SWOP v2" in the USA, and is the most commonly-used American print standard for this kind of book. The second is widely used in Europe, the third in Japan.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.4.3 -->
-<h4 id="h3.4.4">3.4.4. Other Output Intents</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d3.4.4">
-<p class="noindent">If you are required to use an Output Intent that is not one of the above three, then you have to code it yourself. Have a look at the three pre-configured Output Intents (files <i>novel-CGATSTR001.clo</i>, <i>novel-FOGRA39.clo</i>, and <i>novel-JC200103.clo</i>). Instructions are inside the files. There are several places where you can find the necessary data; the most comprehensive is at the <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="http://www.color.org/index.xalter">Inernational Color Consortium</a>.</p>
-<p>In essence: If you create a custom Output Intent file named <em>novel-MyFunkyPrinter.clo</em>, then you request <i>MyFunkyPrinter</i> (without the preceding <i>novel-</i> or the <i>.clo</i> extension) as Output Intent, and that file will be loaded.</p>
-</div>
+<h4 id="h3.4.4">
+3.4.4. Other Output Intents</h4><div class="d4" id="d3.4.4">
+<p class="noindent">If you are required to use an Output Intent that is not one of the above three, then you have to code it yourself. Have a look at the three pre-configured Output Intents (files <span style="white-space:nowrap"><i>novel-CGATSTR001.clo</i></span>, <span style="white-space:nowrap"><i>novel-FOGRA39.clo</i></span>, and <span style="white-space:nowrap"><i>novel-JC200103.clo</i>).</span> Instructions are inside the files. There are several places where you can find the necessary data; the most comprehensive is at the <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="http://www.color.org/index.xalter">Inernational Color Consortium</a>.</p>
+<p>In essence: If you create a custom Output Intent file named <span style="white-space:nowrap"><em>novel-MyFunkyPrinter.clo</em></span>, then you request <i>MyFunkyPrinter</i> (without the preceding <i>novel-</i> or the <i>.clo</i> extension) as Output Intent, and that file will be loaded.</p>
+</div><!-- end 3.4.4 -->
-<h4 id="h3.4.5">3.4.5. Whether or Not to Embed *.icc</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d3.4.5">
+<h4 id="h3.4.5">
+3.4.5. Whether or Not to Embed *.icc</h4><div class="d4" id="d3.4.5">
<p class="noindent">Each Output Intent has a corresponding color profile, in the form of a file with extension <i>*.icc</i>.</p>
<p>You usually do not need it. In fact, unless your print service specifically asks you to embed the file, <i>don't do it</i>. When you use <code>\SetPDFX</code> in its un-starred form, the *.icc file will not be embedded.</p>
<p>If your print service demands that you embed the *.icc color profile, then use <code>\SetPDFX*</code> (with the asterisk).</p>
<p>Repeat: Do not embed the *.icc color profile unless specifically requested by your print service.</p>
<p>• If your printer requests "US Web Coated SWOP v2" and, as usual, requests that you <em>not</em> embed the corresponding *.icc color profile, then some software will read the Output Intent as "CGATS TR 001" instead of "US Web Coated SWOP v2". They are identical. But not everyone knows that.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 3.4.5 -->
-<h4 id="h3.4.6">3.4.6. Where to Find *.icc Files</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d3.4.6">
+<h4 id="h3.4.6">
+3.4.6. Where to Find *.icc Files</h4><div class="d4" id="d3.4.6">
<p class="noindent">You do not need an *.icc color profile unless you choose to embed it.</p>
<p>Although many *.icc files are freely available, they usually cannot be distributed within an open-source project. You might already have them in your system, wherever such files are stored. Note that TeX uses forward slash in file paths, not backslash, even if the platform is Windows:</p>
<p class="isolate">
@@ -900,21 +925,20 @@
<p>If you do not have the files, look on the Internet <a href="https://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/iccprofiles/icc_eula_win_end.html" target="new">here</a> and <a href="http://www.color.org/profiles.xalter" target="new">here</a>. These links also have many other profiles, beyond the basic three. In a few cases, your print service may provide the necessary file.</p>
<p>You want printer profiles, usually CMYK. Don't worry about the files being "for Windows," as they are actually cross-platform.</p>
<p>If your system has the necessary <i>*.icc</i> file for your Output Intent, but <i>novel</i> cannot find it, then copy the file to the same folder as your TeX document.</p>
-<p>Again: Do not embed the file unless the printer requests it.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p>Again: Do not embed the color profile unless the printer requests it.</p>
+</div><!-- end 3.4.6 -->
+</div><!-- end 3.4 -->
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end 3 -->
</div><!-- end page03 -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<div id="page04" class="page">
-<h2 id="h4">4. Book Size and Page Layout</h2>
+<h2 id="h4">4. Book Size, Page Layout, and Fonts</h2>
<div class="d2" id="d4">
-<p class="noindent">There are many layout settings available, but you do not have to use them all. In fact, you may not need to use any of them! Your <i>novel</i> is pre-configured with settings that will often be suitable for the 5.5"W x 8.5"H Trim Size that is widely used in the American softcover fiction market.</p>
-<p>If you choose a different Trim Size, then some of the other defaults will be automatically tweaked, so that your starting point is reasonable for the requested size.</p>
+<p class="noindent">In <i>novel</i>, you do not use class options to set the size or layout of your book, or font size.</p>
<h3 id="h4.1">4.1. Book Dimensions</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d4.1">
@@ -923,234 +947,109 @@
<div class="d4" id="d4.1.1">
<p class="noindent"><b>Trim Size</b> is the finished size of your book, width and height (but not thickness). In the case of softcover books, it is the exact size. In the case of hardcover books, where the cover is larger than the contents, it is (usually) the cover size that is measured, with the internal trim size being slightly smaller than nominal (some of the margins shaved away).</p>
<p>Your print service has a list of standard trim sizes. For fiction, you probably want creme (off-white) paper, which eliminates a few of the choices. Choice of size may also be limited by the distribution channels you choose.</p>
-</div>
+<p>Trim Size is set using this command in Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetTrimSize{<em>width</em>}{<em>height</em>}</code></p>
+<p>The width and height must have dimensions, such as <i>in</i> or <i>cm</i>.</p>
+<p>If you do not specify the Trim Size, the default is <i>5.5in</i> wide, <i>8.5in</i> high. This is a widely-used "trade" size for softcover print-on-demand fiction in the U.S.A. If in doubt, leave the default.</p>
+<p>If you ever need to <i>retroactively</i> change Trim Size, see <a href="#hA">Appendix A</a>.</p>
+<p>Do not request a <em>mass-market paperback</em> Trim Size unless you really, truly, know what you are doing. Since you are not a major writer for a major publishing house, you don't know; so, don't do it.</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.1.1 -->
-<h4 id="h4.1.2">4.1.2. Media Size, TrimBox</h4>
+<h4 id="h4.1.2">4.1.2. Media Size and TrimBox</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d4.1.2">
-<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/mbcrectomar.png" width="202" height="264" alt="media size recto"/> In a few cases, the commercial printer will request that the PDF page size be something larger than the Trim Size of your book. In PDF terminology, the larger dimensions are the <b>Media Size</b>. Typically, the Media Size will be U.S. Letter, or A4, and the Trim Size must be floated in the center, horizontally and vertically. As an alternative, the Trim Size will be at the edge. Something of the sort happens when you print a copy of your PDF at home, where your printer's paper tray has Letter or A4, not the Trim Size.</p>
-<p>Unless you explicitly set it to a different value, Media Size will automatically be set at Trim Size. <i>Do not specify the Media Size, unless the commercial printer requests it.</i></p>
-<p>Since your PDF is being prepared for commercial print production, it will have an invisible <code>TrimBox</code> automatically encoded. This information tells the printer where the Trim Size is located. If (as usual) the Trim Size and Media Size are identical, then the TrimBox is the full size of the PDF page. But when the Trim Size is smaller than the Media Size, the TrimBox defines where the paper will be trimmed. Although it is not normally marked on the PDF page and never appears in print, some PDF viewers allow you make the TrimBox visible.</p>
-<p>In the accompanying diagram, the TrimBox is shown as a faint green line. The margins, shaded gray, are measured relative to the Trim Size, not relative to the Media Size. The excess area beyond the Trim Size is "wasted paper" that will not become part of the book.</p>
-</div>
+<p class="noindent">In PDF terminology, <b>Media Size</b> is the size of the PDF page. By default, it is identical to the Trim Size.</p>
+<p>Some print services insist that the Trim Size be floated in a larger Media Size, which is likely to be U.S. Letter or A4 paper. This quietly happens when you print at home: The printout is at tray paper size, whether you like it or not.</p>
+<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/mediasize.png" width="202" height="264" title="Trim Size floated in larger Media Size" alt="Trim Size floated in larger Media Size"/>This is illustrated at right, where the Trim Size (green border) is centered in a larger PDF Media Size. The green border, known as the <b>TrimBox</b> is invisible, and does not print. Anything outside the green border does not appear when the book is finished.</p>
+<p>If you are required to float the Trim Size in a larger Media Size, here is the command in Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetMediaSize[<em>alignment</em>]{<em>width</em>}{<em>height</em>}</code></p>
+<p>If the optional <i>alignment</i> is set to <i>edge</i> then the Trim Size will be placed at the edge of the Media Size, rather than vertically and horizontally centered.</p>
+<p>Again: You usually will <i>not</i> set Media Size manually.</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.1.2 -->
-<h4 id="h4.1.3">4.1.3. Margins</h4>
+<h4 id="h4.1.3">4.1.3. Advanced: <code>\SetCropmarkGap{<em>length</em>}</code></h4>
<div class="d4" id="d4.1.3">
-<p class="noindent"><b>Margins</b> are required on all four edges of the page. They do not have to be the same width. Generally the margin at the spine edge (inside margin) is wider.</p>
-<p>In the case of fiction, where there are no marginal notes, it is typically the case that the inside margin is the widest. But this is not a rule for all books. All that is required is that each margin be "wide enough" for the printing process.</p>
-<p>Keep in mind that the print services are not used to seeing books with exotic margins (such as bottom margin twice the size of top margin). They may think that there is a mistake in your PDF, or in the print job, if you do that.</p>
-<p>The <i>novel</i> document class does not provide for marginal notes.</p>
-<p>Normally, your TeX document will be compiled to a PDF that is electronically at the exact Trim Size. And normally, print services want it to be that way. When you view your PDF, the text will shift from side to side as you move through the pages, due to the slightly increased margin at the inside edge.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/cropmarkgap.png" width="140" height="141" alt="media size larger than trim size"/> This command is only effective if you use the <i>cropmarks</i> class option, as described in <a href="#h2.4">section 2.4</a>. Note that user-provided cropmarks are <em>very unusual</em> in the print-on demand market. <i>Do not use them</i> unless your print service specifically requests them. The built-in cropmark capability is very elementary, and cannot be easily enhanced by adding other LaTeX packages.</p>
+<p>In the accompanying image with cropmarks, a corner of the Trim Size is at lower right. The invisible TrimBox has been drawn with a green line. The cropmark gap is G.</p>
+<p>Default gap is <i>0.125in</i>.</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.1.3 -->
+</div><!-- end 4.1 -->
-<h3 id="h4.2">4.2. Layout Commands</h3>
+<h3 id="h4.2">4.2. Fonts and Normal Font Size</h3>
<div class="d3" id="d4.2">
-<p class="noindent">Now that you understand how the terms are used, you are ready to use <i>novel</i> layout commands.</p>
-<p>Remember that everything is pre-configured, specifically for the purpose of fiction. You only need to write a layout command if you don't like the defaults.</p>
-<h4 id="h4.2.1">4.2.1. <code>\SetTrimSize{<em>width</em>}{<em>height</em>}</code></h4>
+<h4 id="h4.2.1">4.2.1. Parent (Main) Font and Size</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d4.2.1">
-<p class="noindent">Command <code>\SetTrimSize</code> sets the size of your book. Both values must be written, using units such as <i>in</i> or <i>mm</i>. If you do not use this command, the default Trim Size will be the widely-used 5.5in wide x 8.5in high.</p>
-<p>This setting is most crucial. Unless your book is very exceptional, its Trim Size will be one of several standard sizes available from the print service. Among those sizes, only one or two will be "standard" for your genre.</p>
-<p>In the USA, 5.5in x 8.5in is often used for softcover fiction. Some fiction, and most nonfiction, prefers the slightly larger 6in x 9in trim size. Both of these are known as "trade" sizes.</p>
-<p>If you ever need to <i>retroactively</i> change Trim Size, see Appendix F.</p>
-<p>Do not request a <em>mass-market paperback</em> size unless you really, truly, know what you are doing. Since you are not a major writer for a major publishing house, you don't know; so, don't do it.</p>
-</div>
+<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> class has its own way of specifying the main font. You do <i>not</i> write <code>\usepackage{fontname}</code> or <code>\RequirePackage{fontname}</code>. If you do that, then a warning or error will result, and in any case the font you get won't be the one you were expecting.</p>
+<p>Choose only Open Type or TrueType fonts, not the ancient Type 1 (PostScript) or Metafonts. The font you choose does not have to be part of any TeX package, because you do not need any <i>*.sty</i> file or TeX metrics. All of that is built into the font itself. This is thanks to <i>LuaLaTeX</i> and the built-in <i>fontspec</i> package.</p>
-<h4 id="h4.2.2">4.2.2. <code>\SetMargins{<em>top</em>}{<em>outside</em>}{<em>bottom</em>}{<em>inside</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d4.2.2">
-<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/margins.png" width="303" height="234" alt="margins"/> Mnemonic: "TOBI, or not TOBI, that is the question."</p>
-<p>When you choose your book's Trim Size, margins are pre-configured. In most cases, the top, outside, and bottom margins are 0.5", and the inside (spine) margin is 0.75" to allow 0.25" binding clearance. These values are acceptable to most American printers, unless your book is very thick. The largest Trim Sizes have slightly larger margins.</p>
-<p>Command <code>\SetMargins</code> lets you choose your own margins. If you use it, all four must be written, using units such as <i>in</i> or <i>mm</i>.</p>
-<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/whichgutter.png" width="276" height="219" alt="Which gutter?"/> If your book has headers and/or footers, they sit inside the rectangle bounded by the margins. That is, they do not sit inside the peripheral areas cleared by the margins.</p>
-<p>Be aware that there is a lot of confusion regarding the word "gutter." In the accompanying diagram, it might mean any of A, B, C, or D, depending on who is doing the talking and which software is in use. The <i>novel</i> class uses <em>inside margin</em>, also known as <em>spine margin</em>, to mean C.</p>
-<p>If you ever need to <i>retroactively</i> change margins, see Appendix F.</p>
-</div>
+<h5 id="h4.2.1.1">4.2.1.1. <code>\SetParentFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.2.1.1">
+<p>In <i>novel</i> you set a parent font (<i>parentfont</i>), which is the ancestor of several pre-defined font styles, including the main text font. In Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetParentFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code><p>
+<p>The command uses <i>fontspec</i> syntax, which is reviewed in an Appendix here, and described in full detail by the <i>fontspec</i> package documentation.</p>
+<p><b>Don't be intimidated.</b> If you don't use this command, then <i>novel</i> will attempt to use <i>Libertinus Serif</i> as the parent font family. It carries the SIL Open Font License, and was carefully chosen for its suitability in free-flowing text, such as a novel. It is a recent fork of the <i>Linux Libertine O</i> font family, which will be used as second choice default if <i>Libertinus Serif</i> is not installed.</p>
+<p>The last-choice default is <i>Latin Modern Roman</i>, which really is not suitable for novels; but surely your TeX installation has it.</p>
+<p>If you have the proper license, you can use a commercial font. For example:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetParentFont{Adobe Garamond Pro}</code></p>
+<p><b>See how easy that is?</b> By default, <i>novel</i> will apply TeX Ligatures and Kerning to the <i>parentfont</i> and all its descendants. Common Ligatures and OldStyle numbers will be added for the main <i>textfont</i>. This is ideal for fiction.</p>
-<h4 id="h4.2.3">4.2.3. <code>\SetFontSize{<em>length</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d4.2.3">
-<p class="noindent">In the <i>novel</i> document class, you do not set point size as a class option. Instead you use \SetFontSize in the Preamble.</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.2.1.1 -->
+
+<h5 id="h4.2.1.2">4.2.1.2. <code>\SetFontSize{<em>length</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.2.1.2">
+<p class="noindent">In the <i>novel</i> document class, you do not set point size as a class option. Instead you use <code>\SetFontSize</code> in the Preamble. It applies to the parent (main) font, and is used as the basis for scaling font sizes.</p>
<p>The size may be any units TeX understands, including decimal values. So, <i>12.8bp</i> and <i>13.1pt</i> are acceptable. This is because you will be using scalable, Open Type and TrueType fonts throughout your document. They do not need TeX metrics.<p>
<p>If you insist on using ancient TeX fonts, then you may need to specify a convenient integer font size such as 11pt or 12pt. But why? Forget those fonts! Welcome to the Twenty-First Century.</p>
-<p>The minimum normal font size is 8pt, and the maximum is 18bp. On a local basis, text may be larger or smaller than this.</p>
-</div>
+<p>The minimum normal font size is <i>8pt</i>, and the maximum is <i>18bp</i>. On a local basis, text may be larger or smaller than this.</p>
+<p>If you do not use this command, the default font size will be set to <i>11.4pt</i> more or less. That is, the size is calculated from other layout settings. When there is less available text area, the default size is <i>11pt</i>. For larger books, the default is <i>12pt</i>.</p>
+<p>Once you have set the Trim Size, margins, and parent font, set the font size for readability. Depending on whom you ask, each line of free-running text should average 60 to 66 characters (including spaces). If you use all of the <i>novel</i> default settings, including <i>Libertinus Serif</i> parent font, that's what you will get. But if you change anything, then do a test document to see what font size works best.</p>
+<p>If you use the <code>\Rework</code> commands (<a href="#hA">Appendix A</a>), then the font size will be tweaked, whether you use the default size or set it yourself.</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.2.1.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 4.2.1 -->
-<h4 id="h4.2.4">4.2.4. <code>\SetLinesPerPage{<em>integer</em>}</code></h4>
+<h4 id="h4.2.2">4.2.2. Descendant Fonts: textfont, chapterfont, subchfont, headfont</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d4.2.2">
+<p class="noindent">The descendant fonts are automatically set, as variations of the parent font:</p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/font-tree.png" width="600" height="177" title="font tree" alt="font tree"/></p>
+<p>For example, the main <i>textfont</i> uses the parent font family. It has TeX Ligatures and Kerning (inherited from the parent font), and also Common Ligatures and OldStyle numbers. The main <i>textfont</i> is not configured directly. Instead, configure the <i>parentfont</i>, then the <i>textfont</i> (and other descendants) will obey. For example, if you don't want OldStyle numbers:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetParentFont[<em>Numbers=Lining</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code></p>
+<p>Then, Lining numbers will be used for the <i>textfont</i> (and other descendants).<p>
+<p>If you don't like the defaults, you can address the other descendant fonts directly, in Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code">
+<code>\SetChapterFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code> % <em>see section <a href="#h5.1.3.1">5.1.3.1</a></em><br/>
+<code>\SetSubchFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code> % <em>see section <a href="#h5.1.3.1">5.1.3.1</a></em><br/>
+<code>\SetHeadFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code> % <em>see section <a href="#h4.3.4.2">4.3.4.2</a></em>
+</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.2.2 -->
+
+<h4 id="h4.2.3">4.2.3. Advanced: The Deco Font</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d4.2.3">
+<p class="noindent">Open Type font <i>NovelDeco.otf</i> is packaged with the <i>novel</i> class. It is a special-purpose font that provides characters for the <i>\decoglyph</i> and <i>\acronym</i> commands.</p>
+<p>Normally, you do not need to configure this font, as it is automatic. The only reason for changng it is if you are an advanced user, who wishes to use a substitute font with different decorations. However, you may <i>not</i> specify just any font! The substitute must be an edited version of <i>NovelDeco.otf</i>, with a different font name. If you don't know what that means, then don't do it.</p>
+<p class="code">
+<code>\SetDecoFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code> % <em>see section <a href="#h5.1.3.3">5.1.3.3</a></em>
+</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.2.3 -->
+
+<h4 id="h4.2.4">4.2.4. Advanced: Mono, Sans, and Math Fonts</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d4.2.4">
-<p class="noindent">Lines per page refers only to the textblock, and does <em>not</em> include header/footer. Lines are not stretched to fill short pages.</p>
-<p>By default, a suitable number of lines per page are set, based on other dimemsions. You can change the default with this command. Any non-integer will be rounded. There is no direct command to set the <em>leading</em>, also known as line-to-line spacing or <em>baselineskip</em>. Instead, it is calculated from the textblock height and number of lines.</p>
-<p>If the calculated leading is less than 1.2x the font size, an error will result. It is difficult for TeX to honor all layout settings with such a small leading, which would normally be unacceptable for fiction in any case. If the calculated leading is at least 1.2x the font size, but less than 1.25x the font size, then the log file will have an Alert message, suggesting that you should consider using fewer lines per page. If the leading exceeds 1.4x the font size, then the log will have an Alert, suggesting more lines per page. The Alert messages are friendly; you do not necessarily have to do anything.</p>
-</div>
+<p class="noindent">There are several pre-defined fonts that do not descend from the <i>parentfont</i>. In each case, an appropriate default font is selected. You will probably never need to use them; but TeX being what it is, default fonts are chosen "whether you like it or not."</p>
+<p>The default sans-serif font will be <i>Libertinus Sans</i> if available. Second choice is <i>Linux Biolinum O</i>. Third choice is <i>Latin Modern Sans</i>. To choose your own, use this command in Preamble, with <i>fontspec</i> syntax:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetSansFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code></p>
+<p>The default monospaced font will be <i>Libertinus Mono</i> if available. Second choice is <i>Linux Libertine Mono O</i>. Third choice is <i>Latin Modern Mono</i>. To choose your own, use this command in Preamble, with <i>fontspec</i> syntax:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetMonoFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code></p>
+<p>If you need a math font, then may I gently suggest that maybe <i>novel</i> is not the right document class for you? Nevertheless, the (hopefully never used) math font will be <i>Libertinus Math</i>, or <i>Asana-Math</i>, or <i>Latin Modern Math</i>. You can choose your own in Preamble, using the built-in <i>unicode-math</i> package notation:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetMathFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontname</em>}</code></p>
+</div><!-- end 4.2.4 -->
-<h4 id="h4.2.5">4.2.5. <code>\SetHeadFootStyle{<em>number</em>}</code></h4>
+<h4 id="h4.2.5">4.2.5. Advanced: Defining New Font Commands</h4>
<div class="d4" id="d4.2.5">
-<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/headfoot.png" width="276" height="219" title="head foot style 1" alt="head foot style 1"/> The use of this command is described in <a href="#h6.1.2">section 6.1.2</a>. It is mentioned here, because whether or not your book has headers and/or footers will affect the overall layout. The default is style 1, which has header but no footer (shown here).</p>
-<p>The pre-defined styles are comprehensive, for use in fiction. It is hard to imagine a header/footer style that is not identical to, or a variation from, one of those styles. But if you do wish to create your own style, you must use <code>\SetHeadFootStyle</code> to choose the closest available style, then use <i>fancyhdr</i> commands for your custom style. The reason is that <code>\SetHeadFootStyle</code> tells the layout engine how much space it needs to reserve.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h4.2.6">4.2.6. <code>\SetHeadJump{<em>number</em>}</code> and <code>\SetFootJump{<em>number</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d4.2.6">
-<p class="noindent">Puzzled by TeX terms such as <em>headsep</em> and <em>footskip</em>? Me too! That's why I rewrote the way that the positions of headers and footers are calculated. Now, you can use easy-to-understand commands that do what you think they ought to be doing.</p>
-<p class="floatright" style="text-indent:0px"><img src="html-resources/headjump1.png" width="158" height="125" alt="headjump 1"/><br/><img src="html-resources/footjump2.png" width="130" height="116" alt="footjump 2"/></p>
-<p>The head and/or foot "jump" is a multiple of the normal baseline skip. When the jumps are set to 1, the header (if used) will be where the textblock would be, if it had one more line on top. The footer will be where the textblock would be, if it had one more line at the bottom. Values of 2 would skip a line at top and bottom. In other words, integer jumps maintain the line grid.</p>
-<p>Actually, the header and/or footer do not need to be on line grid. The defaults are 1.5 for each, which balances the need to separate the header/footer from the text, with the need to avoid wasting vertical space.</p>
-<p>The maximum is 3, minimum 1. The two jumps do not need to be identical. If your layout does not have a header and/or footer, then the corresponding setting does not matter.</p>
-<p>Don't worry about <em>headheight</em>. Whether you like it or not, headers (if used) will have only one line, and footers (if used) will have only one line. The necessary heights are calculated automatically.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h4.2.7">4.2.7. Advanced: <code>\SetMediaSize[<em>alignment</em>]{<em>width</em>}{<em>height</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d4.2.7">
-<p class="noindent">Normally, the book Trim Size will also set the same size for the PDF pages. What you see is what you get.</p>
-<p>Some print services prefer that the Trim Size be floated in a standard paper size, such as US Letter or A4. That's not a technical necessity, but "the way things are done around here." See <a href="#h4.1.2">section 4.1.2</a> for details. If you must do that, use the <code>\SetMediaSize</code> command.</p>
-<p>The width and height must be specified with units, such as <i>in</i> or <i>mm</i>. If the optional <em>alignment</em> is not specified, then The Trim Size will be centered horizontally and vertically in the Media Size. That is the preferred method.</p>
-<p>If you write <i>edge</i> for the optional alignment, then the Trim Size will be off-center in the Media Size. Do not do this unless your print service specifically wants it that way. If you are making a hand-made book with a home printer, then this option might be convenient.</p>
-<p>Note that margins are measured relative to the Trim Size, not the Media Size. The extra white space between Trim Size and Media Size is just that: extra white space, unrelated to the margins of your book.</p>
-<p>For PDF/X compliance, an invisible PDF TrimBox is automatically calculated and written into the PDF file.</p>
-<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/mbcrectomar.png" width="202" height="264" alt="media size larger than trim size"/> The accompanying image shows how this works. Here is the code:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\documentclass[draft,shademargins]{novel}<br/>
-\SetTrimSize{5.5in}{8.5in}<br/>
-\SetMediaSize{8.5in}{11in}<br/>
-\SetMargins{0.5in}{0.5in}{0.5in}{0.75in}</code></p>
-<p>Trim Size 5.5"x8.5" is centered in Media Size 8.5"x11". The <i>shademargins</i> option was used, so that the page margins can be seen. Whether verso or recto, the Trim is centered in the Media. This image is a recto page, which has its slightly-larger inside margin at left of the text. For purposes of illustration, I have drawn the invisible TrimBox with a green line.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h4.2.8">4.2.8. Advanced: <code>\SetCropmarkGap{<em>length</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d4.2.8">
-<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/cropmarkgap.png" width="140" height="141" alt="media size larger than trim size"/> This command is only effective if you use the <i>cropmarks</i> class option, as described in <a href="#h2.4">section 2.4</a>. Note that user-provided cropmarks are <em>very unusual</em> in the print-on demand market. Do not use them unless your print service specifically requests them. The built-in cropmark capability is very elementary, and cannot be easily enhanced by adding other LaTeX packages.</p>
-<p>In the accompanying image with cropmarks, a corner of the Trim Size is at lower right. The invisible TrimBox has been drawn with a green line. The cropmark gap is G.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page04 -->
-<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page05" class="page">
-
-
-<h2 id="h5">5. Fonts</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="d5">
-<p class="noindent">This section describes how to choose fonts and font features, and how to apply fonts within your document. Local styling (such as italics) is described <a href="#h7">farther down</a> this page.</p>
-<p><b>EEEK!</b> If you are like me, you <em>first</em> try to do something the way you did it before, then when it fails, you <em>finally</em> read the instructions. So, before you came to this part, you tried these things, and none of them worked:</p>
+<p class="noindent">You can define new font commands in Preamble. The syntax depends on whether the new font is part of a family (where you might have bold and italic variants), or just a single file (no variants). If part of a family, use <code>\NewFontFamily</code>. If alone, use <code>\NewFontFace</code>.</p>
+<p>The <code>\NewFontFamily</code> command (or <code>\NewFontFace</code>) takes three arguments: First, the name you assign to the new font command is required. Second, font features are optional. Third, the font name is required. The <i>fontspec</i> syntax is used:</p>
<p class="code"><code>
-\usepackage{somefont} % FAILS!<br/>
-\renewcommand\rmdefault{smf} \normalfont % FAILS!<br/>
-\setmainfont{Some Font} % FAILS!
+\NewFontFamily<em>\pickaname</em>[<em>features</em>]{<em>fontfamily</em>}<br/>
+\NewFontFace<em>\pickaname</em>[<em>features</em>]{<em>singlefont</em>}
</code></p>
-<p><b>DON'T PANIC.</b> In <i>novel</i>, the essential fonts are specified with different code. Fortunately, they are all pre-configured. If you accept the carefully-chosen defaults, then you do not need to worry about fonts. You do not even need to specify the font families. Sit back and relax.</p>
-<p>You can do something like this, if you have the font license. Then let <i>novel</i> do the rest:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetParentFont{Adobe Garamond Pro} % WORKS!</code></p>
-<p><b>It's that simple.</b> But TeX being what it is, there are complicated ways to customize things. The rest of this part shows you how to do it. You will be using Open Type fonts, or perhaps TrueType fonts. Forget the old Type 1 fonts.</p>
-
-<h3 id="h5.1">5.1. The Parent Font and Descendants</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d5.1">
-<p class="noindent">In <i>novel</i>, you do not directly set the default font, or the main font, or the roman font, or whatever. Instead, you set the parent font. The command:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetParentFont[optional,features]{Font Family}</code></p>
-<p>The parent font, or <em>parentfont</em>, is the ancestor of several other fonts, wich will use the same font family unless you manually set them to something else:</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/font-tree.png" width="600" height="150" alt="parent and descendant fonts"/></p>
-<p>The <em>parentfont</em> has TeX ligatures and kerning, applied by default. All of the descendant fonts will also have TeX ligatures and kerning. (Note: TeX ligatures allow you to type `` to get “ and so forth.)</p>
-<p>If you specify any optional features for the <em>parentfont</em>, they will automatically be applied to descendants: <em>textfont</em>, <em>chapterfont</em>, <em>subchfont</em>, and <em>headfont</em>.</p>
-<p>If you do not set the <em>parentfont</em> yourself, then the following will be used as default, in order of priority: <em>Libertinus Serif</em>, <em>Linux Libertine O</em>, <em>Latin Modern Roman</em>.
-<p>The <em>Libertinus Serif</em> fonts are well-suited to fiction. If in doubt, use them. They can be downloaded as TeX <i>libertinus</i> package, but do not write <code>\usepackage{libertinus}</code> in your Preamble. Those fonts are a more up-to-date fork of the <em>Linux Libertine O</em> fonts, which are in the <i>libertine</i> package.</p>
-<p>Alas, even though <em>Latin Modern Roman</em> is a fine font, its style and weight are not well-suited to fiction; the only reason they are a last-choice default, is because just about every TeX system has them.</p>
-
-<h4 id="h5.1.1">5.1.1. Where Fonts Are Used</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.1.1">
-<p class="noindent">The <em>parentfont</em> is not directly used, anywhere in your document. Instead, its descendants are specialized for use in different situations. Here is a typical page spread, using some of the pre-configured choices for chapters and headings:</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/fonts-in-use.png" width="532" height="408" alt="fonts in use"/></p>
-<p>If you use the <i>novel</i> pre-configured style commands, then the correct font will automatically be applied. That is the recommended, no-brainer method. If instead you choose to write your own custom styles, then you will also need to specify the fonts; but this allows you more TeX coding flexibility.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.1.2">5.1.2. The Text Font</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.1.2">
-<p class="noindent"><p>The text font, or <em>textfont</em>, is the default main font used used for ordinary, flowing text. It uses the <em>parentfont</em>, with added features: common ligatures, and oldstyle numbers. Thus, you do not set or customize the <i>textfont</i> by itself.</p>
-<p>Common ligatures (the Open Type <em>liga</em> feature) are such things as replacing f<span style="position:relative; left:2px">f</span> with the single character ff. Oldstyle numbers (<i>onum</i>) are designed to blend with surrounding text. Not every font has these features; if they are missing, then whatever the font actually has, is used instead.</p>
-<p>Normally, you do not need to call the <em>textfont</em> explicity, because it is the default for ordinary text. But in the event that you have a small passage in <em>textfont</em>, within a passage in some other font, you can do this:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\textfont <em>text</em>}</code></p>
-<p>Note that <code>{\textfont <em>text</em>}</code> and <code>{\rmfamily <em>text</em>}</code> mean the same thing.</p>
-<p>Local font changes are described in sections <a href="#h7.2.6">7.2.6</a> and <a href="#h7.2.7">7.2.7</a>.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.1.3">5.1.3. The Chapter Title Font</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.1.3">
-<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> command <code>\ChapterTitle{<em>text</em>}</code> automatically styles its text in the <em>chapterfont</em> by default.</p>
-<p>The <i>chapterfont</i> inherits from the <i>parentfont</i>. Then, by default it is set to a larger font size (Scale=1.6), and uses Lining numbers if available (Open Type feature <i>lnum</i>).</p>
-<p>You may customize the <em>chapterfont</em>:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetChapterFont[optional,features]{Font Family} % Note command case!</code></p>
-<p>If you write chapter titles by means other than the <code>\ChapterTitle</code> command, then whether or not you use <i>chapterfont</i> is your choice.</p>
-<p>Outside of <code>\ChapterTitle</code> (where <i>chapterfont</i> is automatic), you may use this font anywhere in your document:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\chapterfont <em>text</em>}</code></p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.1.4">5.1.4. The Chapter Subtitle Font</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.1.4">
-<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> commands <code>\ChapterSubtitle{<em>text</em>}</code> and <code>\QuickChapter{<em>text</em>}</code> automatically style their text in the <em>subchfont</em> by default.</p>
-<p>The <i>subchfont</i> inherits from the <i>parentfont</i>. Then, by default it is set to a slightly larger font size (Scale=1.2), and uses Lining numbers if available (Open Type feature <i>lnum</i>).</p>
-<p>You may customize the <em>subchfont</em>:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetSubchFont[optional,features]{Font Family} % Note command case!</code></p>
-<p>If you write chapter subtitles by means other than the <code>\ChapterSubtitle</code> command, then whether or not you use <i>subchfont</i> is your choice. Same applies regarding <code>\QuickChapter</code>.</p>
-<p>Outside of <code>\ChapterSubtitle</code> and <code>\QuickChapter</code> (where <i>subchfont</i> is automatic), you may use this font anywhere in your document:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\subchfont <em>text</em>}</code></p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.1.5">5.1.5. The Header/Footer Font</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.1.5">
-<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> pre-configured header/footer layouts automatically style their text in the <em>headfont</em> by default.
-<p>The <i>headfont</i> inherits from the <i>parentfont</i>. Then, by default it is set to a slightly smaller font size (Scale=0.92), and uses Lining numbers if available (Open Type feature <i>lnum</i>).</p>
-<p>You may customize the <em>headfont</em>:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetHeadFont[optional,features]{Font Family} % Note command case!</code></p>
-<p>If you use <i>fancyhdr</i> syntax to write your own header/footer content, then whether or not you use <i>headfont</i> is your choice.</p>
-<p>If you write chapter titles by means other than the <code>\ChapterTitle</code> command, then whether or not you use <i>chapterfont</i> is your choice.</p>
-<p>Outside of headers and footers (where <i>headfont</i> is automatic), you may use this font anywhere in your document:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\headfont <em>text</em>}</code></p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h5.2">5.2. Other Pre-Defined Fonts</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d5.2">
-<p class="noindent">There are also a few pre-defined font commands that are "unrelated to" the <em>parentfont</em>.</p>
-
-<h4 id="h5.2.1">5.2.1. Sans and Mono Fonts</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.2.1">
-<p class="noindent">You probably do not need a sans-serif or monospaced font in a work of fiction. The most prominent exception might be headers/footers, where the use of a light sans-serif font is fashionable. But in that case, <a href="#h5.1.5">set</a> the <em>headfont</em> to the desired sans-serif font, instead of inheriting from <em>parentfont</em>.</p>
-<p>The <i>novel</i> class does not have its own commands for setting or using sans-serif or monospaced fonts. If you wish, you may use ordinary <i>fontspec</i> syntax to set them:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>
-\setsansfont[optional,features]{Font Family}<br/>
-\setmonofont[optional,features]{Font Family}
-</code></p>
-<p>Then, you may use them with ordinary LaTeX commands:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>
-{\sffamily <em>sans-serif text</em>}<br/>
-{\ttfamily <em>monospaced text</em>}
-</code></p>
-<p>If you do not set these fonts, then the defaults are: <em>Libertinus Sans</em>, or <em>Linux Biolinum O</em>, or <em>Latin Modern Sans</em> for the sans-serif font; <em>Libertinus Mono</em>, or <em>Linux Libertine Mono O</em>, or <em>Latin Modern Mono</em> for the monospaced font.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.2.2">5.2.2. Math Font: Forget It!</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.2.2">
-<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> class is not set up to do math. Seriously.</p>
-<p>Nevertheless, TeX being what it is, there is a behind-the-secene choice of a math font, which (hopefully) your document will never use. The code automatically looks for <em>Libertinus Math,</em> or <em>Asana-Math</em>, or <em>Latin Modern Math</em>.</p>
-<p>Otherwise, there is no special command for choosing a math font, and no special command for using it. Proof left to student.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.2.3">5.2.3. The Deco Font</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.2.3">
-<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> class ships with its own custom font, <em>NovelDeco.otf</em>. This Open Type font is specifically designed to provide a number of decorative glyphs, and some other characters. It is <em>not</em> a general-purpose font, and can <em>not</em> be replaced by any other font, except by a modified version of <em>NovelDeco</em>.</p>
-<p>The <em>decofont</em> is automatically configured. You do not need to set it. However, if you use a font editor to create a modified version, then your modification must have a different font name (to avoid confusion with the original). In such a rare case, you may point to your modified font like this:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetDecoFont[optional,features]{YourDecoFont}</code></p>
-<p>The <em>decofont</em> is automatically called by other commands, such as <code>\decoglyph</code> and <code>\acronym</code>. Normally you do not request <em>decofont</em> directly. But if you wish to do so:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\decofont <em>text</em>}</code></p>
-<p>The decorative glyphs in this font (not including its ordinary characters) are shown in file <i>NovelDeco-glyphs.pdf</i>, which can be found in the documentation <i>extras</i> folder.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h5.3">5.3. Defining New Fonts</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d5.3">
-<p class="noindent">You can define new font commands. The syntax depends on whether the new font is part of a family (where you might have bold and italic variants), or just a single file (no variants). If part of a family, use <code>\NewFontFamily</code>. If alone, use <code>\NewFontFace</code>.</p>
-<p>The <code>\NewFontFamily</code> command (or <code>\NewFontFace</code>) takes three arguments: First, the name you assign to the new font command is required. Second, font features are optional. Third, the font name is required (this is tricky; see <a href="#h5.4">section 5.4</a>).</p>
-<p class="code"><code>
-\NewFontFamily<em>\pickaname</em>[<em>optional,features</em>]{<em>Font Family</em>}<br/>
-\NewFontFace<em>\pickaname</em>[<em>optional,features</em>]{<em>Individual Font File</em>}
-</code></p>
<p>Note that if you define a font <em>family</em> when you should have just defined a font <em>face</em>, there will be complaints in the log file, because the font loaded cannot find the (nonexistent) other members of the family. But the document will compile. On the other hand, if you define a font <em>face</em> when you should have defined a font <em>family</em>, then commands for bold or italic will have no effect, since the other family members were not loaded. Again, the document will compile.</p>
<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Example:</b> Suppose your work is science fiction, and one if its characters is a talking robot. You wish to depict its utterances in a robotic-looking font, which will be called using a new <code>\robovoice</code> command. You shop around, and find that the <em>Orbitron</em> font suits your purpose, except that it is too large compared to your <em>textfont</em>. So, you scale it.</p>
<p>In the Preamble, you define the new font command:</p>
@@ -1182,231 +1081,60 @@
Nonexistent Publications • Portland, Oregon\par<br/>
\end{center}
</code></p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 4.2.5 -->
+</div><!-- end 4.2 -->
-<h3 id="h5.4">5.4. Font Customization Syntax</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d5.4">
-<p class="noindent">You will be using <i>fontspec</i> syntax to select your own fonts. Much of what follows is a digested portion of the full <i>fontspec</i> package documentation. There are many more features, and ways to use them, than will be described below.</p>
+<h3 id="h4.3">4.3. Interior Page Layout</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d4.3">
+<p class="noindent">Everything is pre-configured, specifically for the purpose of fiction. You only need to write a layout command if you don't like the defaults.</p>
-<h4 id="h5.4.1">5.4.1. Font (Family) Name vs. Font File Name</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.4.1">
-<p class="noindent">A <em>font file</em> is an individual file, with its own <em>file name</em>, including file extension. For example, libertinusserif-regular.otf and libertinusserif-italic.otf are two different font files. This much is obvious.</p>
-<p>A <em>font family name</em>, often merely called <em>font name</em>, refers to one or more font files that are variations of the same basic font. Some fonts are so unique that the family consists of just one file. For example, the <i>NovelDeco</i> font family consists of the one file <i>NovelDeco.otf</i>. Typically, a font family has four files, consisting of Regular, Italic, Bold, and BoldItalic variants. Even though there are four font files, there is a single font family name.</p>
-<p>Many font families have more than four files, including Semibold and Light weights, and Condensed tracking. It is up to the font designer to decide whether a Condensed variation of the "Bubble Turble" font should be treated as a member of the "Burble Turble" family, or as a separate "Burble Turble Condensed" family.</p>
-<p>The font (family) name can be learned by opening font files in your system font viewer. Currently, the Windows 10 font viewer uses "Font name" and the Ubuntu font viewer puts the font name in more prominent type. A font (family) name may contain more than one word, with or without spaces, and may contain a general classification such as <em>serif</em>, <em>sans</em>, or <em>mono</em>, because those are actually different families. But it will not contain words such as <em>regular</em>, <em>medium</em>, <em>semibold</em>, <em>bold</em>, or <em>italic</em>; those are for individual members of the same family. Within TeX, some of the older PostScript fonts have been re-worked as newer TrueType and Open Type fonts. The family names are slightly different, so pay attention.</p>
-<p class="centerimg">
-<img src="html-resources/win10libser.png" width="268" height="184" alt="Windows 10 font viewer"/>
-<img src="html-resources/ublibser.png" width="431" height="176" alt="Ubuntu font viewer"/>
-</p>
-</div>
+<h4 id="h4.3.1">4.3.1. Margins</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d4.3.1">
+<p class="noindent"><b>Margins</b> are required on all four edges of the page. They do not have to be the same width. Generally the margin at the inside edge (spine margin) is wider. The <i>novel</i> class does not provide for marginal notes.</p>
+<p>In the case of fiction, it is usually the case that the inside margin is the widest. But this is not a rule for all books. All that is required is that each margin be "wide enough" for the printing process.</p>
+<p>Keep in mind that print services are not used to seeing books with exotic margins (such as bottom margin twice the size of top margin). They may think that there is a mistake in your PDF, or in the print job, if you do that.</p>
+<p>Normally, your TeX document will be compiled to a PDF that is electronically at the exact Trim Size. And normally, print services want it to be that way. When you view your PDF, the text will shift from side to side as you move through the pages, due to the slightly increased margin at the inside edge.</p>
+<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/margins-trim-media.png" width="202" height="264" title="Trim Size floated in larger Media Size" alt="Trim Size floated in larger Media Size"/>Margins are always relative to the Trim Size. If you are using a larger Media Size, the area outside the TrimBox is <i>not</i> counted among the margins; it is simply wasted area. This is illustrated at right, where a smaller Trim Size is floated in a marger Media Size. The margins are shown in gray.</p>
+<p>Here is how margins are set in Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetMargins{<em>top</em>}{<em>outside</em>}{<em>bottom</em>}{<em>inside</em>}</code></p>
+<p>Mnemonic for order of margins: "TOBI, or not TOBI, that is the question."</p>
+<p>Each of the settings must have dimension, such as <i>in</i> or <i>mm</i>.</p>
+<p>If you do not use this command, then margins are pre-configured. The minimum pre-configured margins are 0.5in at top, outside, and bootm, and 0.75in at inside. This meets the requirements of nearly any printing technology, unless your book is extremely thick. If your Trim Size is among the larger ones, then the pre-configured margins are larger than these minimums.</p>
+<p>If your pages have header/footer, they sit inside the rectnagle bounded by the four margins. That is, they do <i>not</i> sit inside the marginal areas.</p>
+<p>If you ever need to <i>retroactively</i> change margins, see <a href="#hA">Appendix A</a>.</p>
-<h4 id="h5.4.2">5.4.2. Set/New by Font Name vs. File Name</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.4.2">
-<p class="noindent">When you set an existing font, or create a new font command, you can use either the font (family) name, or the specific font file name. However, there may be a big difference in results!</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10px"><b>By family name:</b></p>
-<p><img class="floatright" style="padding-top:12px" src="html-resources/fontbyfamily.png" width="338" height="42" alt="font family defined"/> When you use the <em>font family name</em>, you configure all of the Regular, Italic, Bold, and BoldItalic variants. The usual TeX commands will be applied:</p>
-<p>Preamble:</p>
-<p class="code" style="clear:both"><code>\NewFontFamily\rway{Raleway}</code></p>
-<p>Document Body:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\rway I came, \textbf{I saw}, \emph{I conquered}, \textsc{I left}.}</code></p>
-<p style="margin-top:10px"><b>By file name:</b></p>
-<p><img class="floatright" style="padding-top:12px" src="html-resources/fontbyfilenamei.png" width="335" height="44" alt="font file defined"/> However, if you specify a single <em>font file name</em>, then <em>only</em> that font file will be used, regardless of requests for bold or italic. Small caps will be honored, if the specific file has them:</p>
-<p>Preamble:</p>
-<p class="code" style="clear:both"><code>\NewFontFamily\rwayi{Raleway-Regular-Italic.otf}</code></p>
-<p>Document Body:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\rwayi I came, \textbf{I saw}, \emph{I conquered}, \textsc{I left}.}</code></p>
-<p style="margin-top:10px"><b>File Name Combinations:</b></p>
-<p><img class="floatright" style="padding-top:12px" src="html-resources/frankenfont.png" width="312" height="41" alt="frankenfont"/> What you write is what you get. You can customize a font family by individually selecting its members. Here is the syntax.</p>
-<p>Preamble:</p>
-<p class="code" style="clear:both"><code>\NewFontFamily\frankenfont[% note the % at linebreaks<br/>
- ItalicFont=BaskervilleF-Italic.otf,%<br/>
- BoldFont=libertinusserif-semibold.otf,%<br/>
- BoldItalicFont=texgyrepagella-bolditalic.otf,%<br/>
-]{Raleway-Medium.otf}</code></p>
-<p>Document Body:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\frankenfont I came, \textbf{I saw}, \emph{I conquered}, \textsc{I left}.}</code></p>
-<p style="margin-top:10px"><b>Semibold, Light, etc.:</b> The above syntax is especially useful when you wish to specify semibold (if available), rather than bold. It is also a way to select something such as light versions:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\NewFontFamily\rwlight[% note the % at linebreaks<br/>
- ItalicFont=Raleway-Light-Italic.otf,%<br/>
- BoldFont=Raleway-Medium.otf,%<br/>
- BoldItalicFont=Raleway-Medium-Italic.otf,%<br/>
-]{Raleway-Light.otf}</code></p>
-<p>Note that the font file in braces is the one used as the "regular" font, in this definition.</p>
-</div>
+<h5 id="h4.3.1.1">4.3.1.1. Gutter? Which Gutter?</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.1.1">
+<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/whichgutter.png" width="276" height="219" title="Which gutter?" alt="Which gutter?"/>Be aware that there is a lot of confusion regarding the word "gutter." In the accompanying diagram, it might mean any of A, B, C, or D, depending on who is doing the talking and which software is in use.</p>
+<p>The <i>novel</i> class uses <em>inside margin</em>, also known as <em>spine margin</em>, to mean <i>C</i>. There is no setting for "gutter" as such.</p>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.1.1 -->
+</div><!-- end 4.3.1 -->
-<h4 id="h5.4.3">5.4.3 Open Type Features</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.4.3">
-<p class="noindent">Features are variations, contained within a single font file. In the bad old days, when you wanted true small caps, you had to load a separate font file that had them (and did not have ordinary lowercase letters). Now, if an Open Type font file has the <i>smcp</i> feature (most do), you obtain the small caps from within the same file, by asking for them. Requests for the feature may be made on-the-fly, or pre-loaded for global use.</p>
-<p>Here are several of the most frequently-used features, relevant to fiction writing. There are many more, and most fonts have only a few of them. Even when a font has a feature, it may be limited to some portion of the characters. For example, it is common for small caps to be available only for Latin-1 letters, even though the font also contains Greek and Cyrillic. To put this another way: The availability of a feature does not tell you its breadth of coverage. Unless the font has documentation showing coverage of its features, the only way to find out is to create and print a test page.</p>
-<table class="preconf">
-<caption>
-Some Frequently-Used Open Type Features
-</caption>
-<thead>
-<tr>
-<th>Description</th>
-<th>Open Type code </th>
-<th>fontspec code</th>
-</tr>
-</thead>
-<tbody>
-<tr>
-<td><p>kerning</p></td>
-<td><p>kern</p></td>
-<td><p>Kerning=On<br/><em>enabled by default</em></p></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td><p>common ligatures</p></td>
-<td><p>liga</p></td>
-<td><p>Ligatures=Common<br/><em>enabled: textfont, sansfont</em></p></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td><p>Tex ligatures</p></td>
-<td><p>tlig</p></td>
-<td><p>Ligatures=TeX<br/><em>enabled by default</em></p></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td><p>lowercase letters to small caps</p></td>
-<td><p>smcp</p></td>
-<td><p>Letters=SmallCaps</p></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td><p>uppercase letters to small caps</p></td>
-<td><p>c2sc</p></td>
-<td><p>Letters=UppercaseSmallCaps</p></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td><p>lining numerals</p></td>
-<td><p>lnum</p></td>
-<td><p>Numbers=Lining</p></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td><p>oldstyle numerals</p></td>
-<td><p>onum</p></td>
-<td><p>Numbers=OldStyle<br/><em>enabled: textfont, sansfont</em></p></td>
-</tr>
-</tbody>
-</table>
-<p>• Kerning is the automatic adjustment of spacing between letters, so that they fit together nicely. The values are read from tables within the font.</p>
-<p>• Common ligatures are substitutions, such as a combined <i>ff</i> character for two consecutive <i>f</i> characters. It is up to the font designer to determine which ligatures, if any, are common.</p>
-<p>• TeX ligatures (such as replacing `` with “ and --- with —) are not actually an Open Type feature, but they are treated that way by the software. All of these are enabled by default. The <i>fontspec</i> manual explains how to disable them, if necessary.</p>
-<p>• The SmallCaps feature applies only to lowercase letters; ordinary capitals remain ordinary capitals. UppercaseSmallCaps deals only with converting ordinary capitals to small caps. If you want both, use both. In most fonts that have them, small caps are slightly taller than lowercase, and slightly more widely spaced. What distinguishes real small caps from fake ones (obtained by scaling ordinary capitals) is that the weight and spacing are more compatible with surrounding text.</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/smallcapsrealfake.png" width="478" height="43" alt="real vs fake small caps"/></p>
-<p>• Lining numerals are the ones most familiar to you, from math or accounting. They sit on the baseline and have the height of capital letters. That's just right for doing calculations, and is acceptable for things such as page numbers and chapter numbers.</p>
-<p>• When lining numerals are mingled with flowing text, they may stand out too much. OldStyle numerals are more like flowing text: Most of the numerals are at lowercase height, with ascenders and descenders. Compare the first number as OldStyle, the second as Lining:</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/jollybeers.png" width="499" height="52" alt="oldstyle vs lining numerals"/></p>
-<p>Most fonts use Lining numerals as their default. A few default to OldStyle numerals. Thus, you should explicitly call for the kind of numerals you wish to use.</p>
-<p>• True OldStyle numerals have a flat top on <em>one</em>, and a very round <em>zero</em>: <img src="html-resources/10trueold.png" width="37" height="13" alt="true oldstyle 10"/> This may be a bit distracting. Some fonts use a transitional form, where the one has a tilted top (like big 1) and the zero is not so round: <img src="html-resources/10transold.png" width="37" height="13" alt="transitional oldstyle 10"/> Others offer you a choice, via an Open Type "style set." See the <i>fontspec</i> manual for how to code style sets.</p>
-<p>• There are many more Open Type features, most of which are not useful in ordinary fiction writing. Fonts rarely have more than a few features. Some features (such as the ones shown above) have a specific meaning. Other features, such as "style sets", have whatever meaning the font designer assigns them; Thus the <i>ss03</i> feature of one font may do something very different from <i>ss03</i> in a different font.</p>
-</div>
+<h4 id="h4.3.2">4.3.2. Lines Per Page</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d4.3.2">
+<p class="noindent">Lines per page refers only to the textblock, and does <em>not</em> include header/footer. Lines are not stretched to fill short pages.</p>
+<p>By default, a suitable number of lines per page are set, based on other dimemsions. You can change the default with this command, in Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetLinesPerPage{<em>integer</em>}</code></p>
+<p> Any non-integer will be rounded. There is no direct command to set the <em>leading</em>, also known as line-to-line spacing or <em>baselineskip</em>. Instead, it is calculated from the textblock height and number of lines.</p>
+<p>If the calculated leading is less than <i>1.2x</i> the font size, an error will result. It is difficult for TeX to honor all layout settings with such a small leading, which would normally be unacceptable for fiction in any case. If the calculated leading is at least <i>1.2x</i> the font size, but less than <i>1.25x</i> the font size, then the log file will have an Alert message, suggesting that you should consider using fewer lines per page. If the leading exceeds <i>1.4x</i> the font size, then the log will have an Alert, suggesting more lines per page. The Alert messages are friendly; you do not necessarily have to do anything.</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.2 -->
-<h4 id="h5.4.4">5.4.4. Scale as Pseudo-Feature</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.4.4">
-<p class="noindent">Although it is not an Open Type feature, <i>Scale=number</i> may be written like a feature. <i>Scale</i> globally adjusts the size of the font, relative to what it would otherwise be. If a local font size command is also applied, then the result is the compounded value.</p>
-<p>If the font will be mingled with other fonts in the same place, Scale can tweak a font so that it does not stand out. If Scale does not exceed 1, then the baselineskip will not be affected. Over 1 risks spreading lines to accomodate the extra size; this should not be done for fonts that will appear in the flowing main text. But over 1 is acceptable for display fonts that do not wrap lines and do not mingle with main text.</p>
-<p>Example: <em>Orbitron</em> is a special-purpose font with a mechanical or futuristic look. Its characters are much larger and heavier than would be found in book fonts. If I wish to mingle Orbitron with ordinary text, I might load the font like this:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\NewFontFace\orbitron[Scale=0.6]{Orbitron} % Preamble</code></p>
-<p>Then in the document body, I could use it like this:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>The message was brief: {\orbitron DIE, EARTHLING.} Captain Withens smiled as he oiled his ray-gun. But ray-guns don't use oil.\par</code></p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/charscaletext.png" width="522" height="63" alt="charscale text"/>
-<p>Scale is more often used for fonts that are pre-defined to have a special meaning and location, such as chapter titles or page headers. There, the font is not mingled with ordinary text, and it is OK to use a larger Scale. Then, it is not necessary to use local font scaling commands each time the font is used.</p>
-</div>
+<h4 id="h4.3.3">4.3.3. Global Header/Footer Styles</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d4.3.3">
+<p class="noindent">Global choice of header/footer style is made in Preamble. Although some individual pages may have no visible header or footer, in reality the header/footer is "still there" in terms of occupying space, but has no content.</p>
+<p>There are six pre-configured header/footer styles, numbered <i>1</i> through <i>6</i>. These address every style I have seen in fiction. When you choose one of these styles, it reserves space for a header (if any) above the main text, and space for a footer (if any) below the main text. You may <i>not</i> write multi-line headers or footers.</p>
+<p>The default style is <i>1</i>, which has header, but no footer. Page numbers appear at the outside. Text (such as author or title) appears centered.</p>
+<p>Style <i>0</i> has no header or footer. This is not used in fiction, but it is available.</p>
+<p>Throughout the body of your document, you can use local commands to change the content of headers and footers, or blank them. But you may not change the overall header/footer style.</p>
-<h4 id="h5.4.5">5.4.5 Color and Opacity</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.4.5">
-<p class="noindent">Even though the <i>fontspec</i> syntax allows you to set <i>Color</i> and <i>Opacity</i> as pseudo-features when you define a font, <em>the novel class blocks these features.</em> If you attempt to set them as features in a font definition, an error will result. The same applies if you attempt to add them, using <code>\addfontfeature</code>. However, you can still make use of grayscale using ordinary, local color commands.</p>
-<p>When you use the <i>graytext</i> class option, you may write text in grayscale, using commands from the included <i>xcolor</i> package. You should only do this for text that is in special locations. For example, if you begin each chapter with a number that is very large, you might wish to make that number gray, so that it does not overpower the main text.</p>
-<p>To avoid possible conflicts, the color specification should be chosen from a limited list of names. In order from dark to light: black, blue, violet, darkgray, purple, red, teal, olive, magenta, gray, brown, green, orange, cyan, lightgray, lime, pink, yellow, white. They will all be rendered in <em>shades of gray</em> (of course, black and white will be themselves). You may also choose from this more convenient list: black, gray1, gray2, gray3, gray4, gray5, gray6, gray7, gray8, gray9, white.</p>
-<p>If <i>graytext</i> is not chosen as class option, then any color (even white) will be rendered as black.</p>
-<p>• Placing light text over a dark background may produce unexpected results in print, even if it looks good in PDF. If you need this effect, it is better to build the text into the background, as a single image.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.4.6">5.4.6. <code>\CreateFontFeature{<em>code</em>}{<em>substitutions</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.4.6">
-<p class="noindent">Once in a while, a font has a glyph that you would like to use, but it is not included in any of the font's Open Type feature sets. So, how to you grab that particular glyph? For example: One well-known font has a glyph named <em>emdash.alt</em>, which is not as long as the font's ordinary <em>emdash</em> glyph, and looks better in text. Unfortunately, <em>emdash.alt</em> is not in any of the font's style sets. Without some trickery, only a program such as InDesign can grab that glyph.</p>
-<p>Thanks to <i>fontspec</i>, <i>novel</i> has the necessary trickery. Command <code>\CreateFontFeature</code> creates a fake Open Type feature code, and assigns your list of substitutions to that code. Use comma-separated entries if there are multiple substitutions. For the case in question:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\CreateFontFeature{myem}{emdash=emdash.alt}</code></p>
-<p>The code <i>myem</i> was randomly chosen as something that is not already defined among Open Type feature codes. Once specified, the fake feature may be used in any font definition, such as this:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetParentFont[RawFeature=+myem]{Adobe Garamond Pro}</code></p>
-<p>Of course, the fake feature has no effect if the font does not have the substitution character.</p>
-<p>This technique may be used for more complicated features, but that is beyond the scope of this documentation. See the <i>fontspec</i> manual if you need to do more.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.4.7">5.4.7. Local Modifications to Open Type Features</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.4.7">
-<p class="noindent">If you specify a particular Open Type feature, it will be generally used for that font command. So if you define a new font command with <i>Letters=SmallCaps</i> as a feature (and if the font actually has them), then small caps will be used for that font, whether or not you locally request them with a command such as <code>\textsc</code>.</p>
-<p>Often, you can add (or sometimes remove) features on a local basis. For example, suppose that you defined the font without using its <i>ss03</i> style set. You can locally add that feature to some text, using a command that looks like this:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>{\addfontfeature{<em>which feature</em>} <em>applied to this text</em>}</code></p>
-<p>The above code assumes that you are already using the font in that location. You cannot apply <i>ss03</i> from one font to an entirely different font!</p>
-<p>See the <i>fontspec</i> documentation for details of <code>\addfontfeature</code>.</p>
-<p>As an alternative to changing features locally, you can define different font commands to call the same underlying font, but with different features.</p>
-<p>Two ways to accomplish the same thing:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>
-\NewFontFamily\baskf{BaskervilleF}<br/>
-\NewFontFamily\baskftab[Numbers=Monospaced]{BaskervilleF} % tnum feature<br/>
-\begin{document}<br/>
-Some text {\baskftab hello 123} is here.<br/>
-Some text {\baskf\addfontfeature{Numbers=Monospaced} hello 123} is here.
-</code></p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h5.5">5.5 Superscripts, Subscripts</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d5.5">
-<p class="noindent">In <i>novel</i>, superscripts and subscripts are called "markers." Most book-quality Open Type fonts have markers in style sets (<i>sups</i>, <i>sinf</i>, <i>subs</i>).</p>
-<p>In professional fonts, marker glyph weights are adjusted for consistent appearance compared to ordinary glyphs. However, many free fonts do not adjust marker glyph weights, so the markers may appear too small, or too light. You may choose whether to use a font's own markers, or allow <i>novel</i> to generate markers, depending on whichever you think looks better.</p>
-<p>• <i>real</i> markers attempt to use the Open Type feature <i>sups</i> for superscripts, and the feature <i>sinf</i> (preferred) or <i>subs</i> (alternate) for subscripts. If the requested feature is not available for the font, then it will be automatically faked, by scaling/raising/lowering ordinary characters from the basefont (lining numerals will be used).</p>
-<p>• <i>fake</i> markers ignore whether the Open Type features are available, and simply fakes them.</p>
-
-<h4 id="h5.5.1">5.5.1 <code>\SetMarkers[<em>real,fake</em>]{<em>asterisk, dagger, number</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.5.1">
-<p>This command may only be used in the Preamble. It globally sets the kind of marker to be used. Default is <i>real</i> and <i>asterisk</i>.</p>
-<p>The optional argument applies real or fake markers, as described above.</p>
-<p>The required argument applies only to markers created by the <code>\footnote</code> command. It does not apply to endnotes, or to manually placed superscripts and subscripts.</p>
-<p>• <i>asterisk</i> (default) uses symbolic footnote markers. The symbols rotate in order * † ‡ § ** †† ‡‡ §§ until reset.</p>
-<p>• <i>dagger</i> uses symbolic footnote markers, but without asterisks. The symbols rotate in order † ‡ § †† ‡‡ §§ until reset.</p>
-<p>• <i>number</i> uses numerical footnote markers. Due to possible conflict, the log file will have a "Big Bad Warning" if you use a numerical footnote marker in a document that also has endnotes, since endnotes always have numerical markers.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h5.5.2">5.5.2 <code>\realmarker</code>, <code>\fakemarker</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d5.5.2">
-<p class="noindent">Within the body of the document, you may use <code>\realmarker</code> and <code>\fakemarker</code> to change your preference. The choice remains in effect until you change it again.</p>
-<p>The option real/fake applies wherever superscripts or subscripts are used, not just for footnotes or endnotes.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page05 -->
-<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page06" class="page">
-
-
-<h2 id="h6">6. Headers and Footers</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="d6">
-<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> class has a default header style. If you like it, then you do not have to use any of the configuration commands. So, before studying these commands, do a test document that uses the defaults.</p>
-<p>You may choose among several pre-configured header/footer styles. Then, you may change the appearance, content, and position. If none of it works for you, then you may define your own headers/footers using <i>fancyhdr</i> syntax. However, just about every style used in fictional works can be obtained using the pre-configured styles and adjustments.</p>
-<p>Individual pages, such as title, copyright, and new chapters, can have the header/footer style changed locally, on a per-page basis.</p>
-
-<h3 id="h6.1">6.1. Global Header/Footer Settings, only in Preamble.</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d6.1">
-<p class="noindent">These commands determine whether your book will have headers and/or footers, and set the default style that is used for nearly all pages of the text. Per-page exceptions, such as for blank pages, title, copyright, and new chapters, are performed using the local settings commands.</p>
-
-<h4 id="h6.1.1">6.1.1. <code>\SetHeadJump{<em>number</em>}</code>, <code>\SetFootJump{<em>number</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.1.1">
-<p class="noindent">These two commands control the separation between the header/footer and the main text. Since they pertain to page layout, rather than style, their usage is described above, in layout <a href="#h4.2.6">section 4.2.6</a>.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h6.1.2">6.1.2. <code>\SetHeadFootStyle{<em>number</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.1.2">
-<p class="noindent">Command <code>\SetHeadFootStyle{<em>number</em>}</code> chooses among several pre-configured header/footer styles, numbered 1 through 6. The default is style 1. The internals of the configuration can then be changed using a variety of commands.</p>
-<p>Some styles support an optional "emblem", which applies a decoration near the page number.</p>
-<p>Style 0 means neither header nor footer. Not practical for fiction, but it exists.</p>
+<h5 id="h4.3.3.1">4.3.3.1. List of Header/Footer Style Choices</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.3.1">
<p> </p>
<img class="floatright" src="html-resources/headfoot1.png" width="276" height="219" alt="style 1" title="style 1"/>
-<p style="padding-left:16px">
-<b><code>\SetHeadFootStyle{1}</code></b></p>
-<p>Only Header.<br/>
+<p class="overhang">
+<code><b>\SetHeadFootStyle{1}</b></code><br/>
+Only Header.<br/>
Page number at outside (left verso, right recto).<br/>
Optional emblem adjacent to page number.<br/>
Text centered. Default author verso, title recto.<br/>
@@ -1413,23 +1141,23 @@
<em>This is the default for the novel document class.</em></p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
<img class="floatright" src="html-resources/headfoot2.png" width="276" height="219" alt="style 2" title="style 2"/>
-<p style="padding-left:16px">
-<b><code>\SetHeadFootStyle{2}</code></b></p>
-<p>Only Footer.<br/>
+<p class="overhang">
+<code><b>\SetHeadFootStyle{2}</b></code><br/>
+Only Footer.<br/>
Page number at outside (left verso, right recto).<br/>
Optional emblem adjacent to page number.</p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
<img class="floatright" src="html-resources/headfoot3.png" width="276" height="219" alt="style 3" title="style 3"/>
-<p style="padding-left:16px">
-<b><code>\SetHeadFootStyle{3}</code></b></p>
-<p>Only Footer.<br/>
+<p class="overhang">
+<code><b>\SetHeadFootStyle{3}</b></code><br/>
+Only Footer.<br/>
Page number centered.<br/>
Disregards emblem, if coded.</p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
<img class="floatright" src="html-resources/headfoot4.png" width="276" height="219" alt="style 4" title="style 4"/>
-<p style="padding-left:16px">
-<b><code>\SetHeadFootStyle{4}</code></b></p>
-<p>Only Header.<br/>
+<p class="overhang">
+<code><b>\SetHeadFootStyle{4}</b></code><br/>
+Only Header.<br/>
Page number at outside (left verso, right recto).<br/>
Optional emblem adjacent to page number.<br/>
Text towards outside, instead of centered.<br/>
@@ -1437,9 +1165,9 @@
Default author verso, title recto.</p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
<img class="floatright" src="html-resources/headfoot5.png" width="276" height="219" alt="style 5" title="style 5"/>
-<p style="padding-left:16px">
-<b><code>\SetHeadFootStyle{5}</code></b></p>
-<p>Header and Footer.<br/>
+<p class="overhang">
+<code><b>\SetHeadFootStyle{5}</b></code><br/>
+Header and Footer.<br/>
Page number centered in footer.<br/>
Disregards emblem, if coded.<br/>
Text centered in header.<br/>
@@ -1446,31 +1174,91 @@
Default author verso, title recto.</p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
<img class="floatright" src="html-resources/headfoot6.png" width="276" height="219" alt="style 6" title="style 6"/>
-<p style="padding-left:16px">
-<b><code>\SetHeadFootStyle{6}</code></b></p>
-<p>Only Header.<br/>
+<p class="overhang">
+<code><b>\SetHeadFootStyle{6}</b></code><br/>
+Only Header.<br/>
Page number at outside (left verso, right recto).<br/>
Optional emblem adjacent to page number.<br/>
Text towards inside, instead of centered.<br/>
Default author verso, title recto.</p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.3.1 -->
-<h5 id="h6.1.2.1">Custom Style</h5>
-<div class="d5" id="d6.1.2.1">
-<p class="noindent">Before you think about writing custom header/footer styles, be sure to try the pre-configured choices. I have looked through a lot of fiction of all kinds. The pre-configured choices include every style I have seen, with the exception of the most highly decorative.</p>
-<p>If none of the above are satisfactory, then you can write your own headers and footers using the syntax of the <code>fancyhdr</code> package.</p>
-<p>• In the Preamble, use one of the above <code>\SetHeadFootStyle{<em>integer</em>}</code> to pick a starting point, in terms of whether or not there is a header and/or footer. <em>This is required, so that the layout engine knows how to calculate space.</em> After that, write the <i>fancyhdr</i> code for your custom header/footer in the Preamble. It will over-ride the numerical style in terms of appearance, but occupy the same space.</p>
+<h5 id="h4.3.3.2">4.3.3.2. Custom Header/Footer Style</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.3.2">
+<p class="noindent">Before you think about writing a custom header/footer style, be sure to try the above pre-configured choices. I have looked through a lot of fiction of all kinds. The pre-configured choices include every style I have seen, with the exception of the most highly decorative.</p>
+<p>If none of the above are satisfactory, then you can write your own headers and footers using the syntax of the <i>fancyhdr</i> package.</p>
+<p>• In the Preamble, you must use one of the above <code>\SetHeadFootStyle</code> choices to pick a starting point, in terms of whether or not there is a header and/or footer. <em>This is required, so that the layout engine knows how to calculate space.</em> After that, write the <i>fancyhdr</i> code for your custom header/footer in the Preamble. It will over-ride the numerical style in terms of appearance, but occupy the same space.</p>
<p>• You cannot use a header or footer with more than one line. No exceptions.</p>
<p>• See the file <i>novel-HeadFootStyles.sty</i> for how it is done in the pre-configured styles. In the file, the relevant portion follows <em>Look here for the pre-defined styles, for use as models.</em></p>
<p>• Particularly note that your own style will not automatically use the <i>headfont</i>, or add extra space between letters, unless you include the necessary code in your own definition. Do not use the <code>\textls</code> command.</p>
<p>• No cheating! If you choose a numerical style that does not have a header, then do not attempt to write a custom style that includes a header. Same with footer. Also, if you you choose a numerical style with both header and footer, then you cannot only customize one of them; you must customize both.</p>
-</div></div><!-- end class="d4" -->
+</div><!-- end 4.3.3.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 4.3.3 -->
-<h4 id="h6.1.3">6.1.3. <code>\SetEmblems{<em>verso</em>}{<em>recto</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.1.3">
-<p class="noindent">If the style supports it, you may place an "emblem" that appears at a fixed distance (2.5em} from the outer margin. Thus, it will appear to the right of the page number on verso pages, and to the left of the page number on recto pages. In the case of style 4, there will be a clearance of 1em between the emblem and the header text.</p>
-<p>The font used for emblems will be the same as the headfont, unless you code the emblem to use a different font (perhaps one you specified with the <code>\NewFontFace</code> command), or unless you use one of the built-in <code>\decoglyph</code> codes.</p>
-<p>An emblem is a minor decoration that should not distract the eye from the main text.</p>
+<h4 id="h4.3.4">4.3.4. Tweaking the Global Header/Footer Style</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d4.3.4">
+<p class="noindent">You may customize the appearance, and to some extent the content, of the various parts of the header and footer. These are global settings, in Preamble.</p>
+
+<h5 id="h4.3.4.1">4.3.4.1 <code>\SetHeadJump{<em>number</em>}</code>, <code>\SetFootJump{<em>number</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.4.1">
+<p class="noindent">These two commands control the separation between the header/footer and the main text. If your style does not have a header and/or footer, then the corresponding setting does not matter.</p>
+<p>When you change the "jump," the header or footer remains in the same place. However, the inter-line spacing (baseline skip) of the main text is tweaked to fit, while maintaining the same number of lines per page.</p>
+<p>Note that <i>novel</i> does not use arcane settings such as <i>headsep</i>, <i>footskip</i>, or <i>headheight</i>.</p>
+<p class="floatright" style="text-indent:0px"><img src="html-resources/headjump1.png" width="158" height="125" alt="headjump 1"/><br/><img src="html-resources/footjump2.png" width="130" height="116" alt="footjump 2"/></p>
+<p>The head and/or foot "jump" is a multiple of the normal baseline skip. When the jumps are set to <i>1</i>, the header (if used) will be where the textblock would be, if it had one more line on top. The footer will be where the textblock would be, if it had one more line at the bottom. Values of <i>2</i> would skip a line at top and bottom. In other words, integer jumps maintain the line grid.</p>
+<p>Actually, the header and/or footer do not need to be on line grid. The defaults are <i>1.5</i> for each, which balances the need to separate the header/footer from the text, with the need to avoid wasting vertical space.</p>
+<p>The maximum is <i>3</i>, minimum <i>1</i>. The two jumps do not need to be identical.</p>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.4.1 -->
+
+<h5 id="h4.3.4.2">4.3.4.2. <code>\SetHeadFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>font</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.4.2">
+<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> pre-configured header/footer styles automatically use the <em>headfont</em>.<p>
+<p>If you would like to use something else as <i>headfont</i>, use <code>\SetHeadFont</code> to define it by its font name and Open Type features.</p>
+<p>In the simplest case, you merely pick an Open Type (or TrueType) font, and <i>novel</i> automatically adds the default Open Type features, including Small Caps:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetHeadFont{Roboto}</code></p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/headfont-roboto.png" width="419" height="81" title="Roboto headfont" alt="Roboto headfont"/></p>
+<p>The above is not best if your style has header text, because the <i>headfont</i> is too pronounced, compared to the main text. A more complex choice uses <i>fontspec</i> syntax to customize the Open Type Features:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetHeadFont[Scale=0.75,Numbers=Lining,%<br/>
+Letters=SmallCaps,%<br/>
+Letters=UppercaseSmallCaps,%<br/>
+ItalicFont=Montserrat-ExtraLightItalic.otf]%<br/>
+{Montserrat-ExtraLight.otf}</code></p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/headfont-montserrat-el.png" width="419" height="81" title="Montserrat EL headfont" alt="Montserrat EL headfont"/></p>
+<p>Unless you change it, the <i>headfont</i> is the same as the parent (main) font. However, it is scaled to slightly smaller size, uses lining numbers (if available), and small caps (if available). This is a general-purpose style, widely used in fiction. It may not be the most artistic, but it is unlikely to cause visual distraction:</p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/headfont-default.png" width="419" height="81" title="default headfont" alt="default headfont"/></p>
+<p>If you do <i>not</i> want SmallCaps to be automatically added, use <code>Letters=ResetAll</code> as a feature.</p>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.4.2 -->
+
+<h5 id="h4.3.4.3">4.3.4.3. <code>\SetLooseHead{<em>number</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.4.3">
+<p class="noindent">This command applies to both headers and footers, but its effect is most noticeable when the style has header text.</p>
+<p>For best appearance of header text, its characters should be adjusted with a little extra space (tracking) between them, so that they are more easily distinguished from the main text. This is especially true if you are using small caps.</p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/looseheads.png" width="400" height="76" alt="loosehead 50 and 100"/></p>
+<p>The argument of <code>\SetLooseHead</code> is a number from <i>0</i> to <i>200</i>. At <i>0</i> there is no extra space between the letters. Values from <i>50</i> (default) to <i>100</i> are most useful.</p>
+<p>Page number tracking will be clamped at a maximum of <i>50</i>, even when a larger (looser) tracking is applied to text.</p>
+<p>• Do not use the <code>\textls</code> command. It is disabled in <i>novel</i>.</p>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.4.3 -->
+
+<h5 id="h4.3.4.4">4.3.4.4. <code>\SetPageNumberStyle{<em>code using \thepage</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.4.4">
+<p class="noindent">By default, the page number is simply <code>\thepage</code>, styled using <i>headfont</i>. In most cases, leave it that way. But if you wish to change how the page number is displayed, you can use this command to style it. Examples:</p>
+<p class="code" style="text-indent:0px"><code>\SetPageNumberStyle{\textit{\thepage}} % Page number in italics.<br/>
+\SetPageNumberStyle{-- \thepage{} --} % En-dashes, style 3 or 5.</code></p>
+<p>The <i>headfont</i> is applied automatically, unless you over-ride it in your code. For example, suppose the <i>headfont</i> is based on the parent (main) font, which is the default style. You would like the page numbers (but not anything else in header/footer) to be in a different font, which you have defined in Preamble as <i>yourpnfont</i> using <code>\NewFontFamily</code> or <code>\NewFontFace</code>. Then you could write:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetPageNumberStyle{{\yourpnfont\thepage}}</code></p>
+<p>Avoid over-doing it. If you are tempted to use a macro that counts page numbers backwards, or writes them upside-down, be aware that your print service will likely reject it. Anyway, it has already been done in fiction.</p>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.4.4 -->
+
+<h5 id="h4.3.4.5">4.3.4.5. <code>\SetEmblems{<em>verso</em>}{<em>recto</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.4.5">
+<p class="noindent">If the style supports it, you may place an "emblem" that appears at a fixed distance (2.5em) from the outer margin. Thus, it will appear to the right of the page number on verso pages, and to the left of the page number on recto pages. In the case of style <i>4</i>, there will be a clearance of 1em between the emblem and the header text.</p>
+<p>The font used for emblems will be the same as the <i>headfont</i>, unless you specifically code the emblem to use a different font, or unless you use one of the built-in <code>\decoglyph</code> codes.</p>
+<p>Emblems are minor decorations that should not distract the eye from the main text. If the style supports emblems but you do not set them, then no emblems are placed.</p>
<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/emblembar.png" width="380" height="104" alt="simple emblems using vertical bar"/>• Most books do not use emblems. When they do, it is typically a vertical bar, or a bullet, like this:</p>
<p class="code"><code>\SetHeadFootStyle{4}</code></p>
<p class="code"><code>\SetEmblems{|}{|}</code></p>
@@ -1479,6 +1267,7 @@
<p>The header emblems shown at right were produced using the code below. Dingbats from the NovelDeco font were specified, adjusted for size and position.</p>
<p style="clear:both" class="code"><code>\SetEmblems{\charscale{1.1}{\raisebox{-0.05em}{\decoglyph{l9825}}}}%</code></p>
<p class="code"><code>{\charscale{1.1}{\raisebox{-0.05em}{\decoglyph{l9826}}}}</code></p>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
<p>• You may also use images, or combined images and text. If you use images, they must be at the exact resolution required by your print service (usually 300dpi for gray, 600dpi for b/w), and at exact size without scaling. The <code>\InlineImage</code> command must be used. See <i>novel's</i> image documentation details. You may find that a vertical offset of <code>\nfs</code> (normal font size) is useful, as this will place the top of the emblem image at the top margin.</p>
<p class="code" style="text-indent:0px"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/emblemimg.png" width="295" height="77" alt="emblem image"/>
<code>\SetHeadFootStyle{4}<br/>
@@ -1485,126 +1274,314 @@
\SetEmblems{\InlineImage[0pt,b]{spy.png}}%<br/>
{\InlineImage[0pt,b]{spy.png}}
</code></p>
-<p>• At the small size of an emblem, it is difficult to use detailed artwork. A black/white image at 600dpi will print similarly to a font dingbat. Grayscale at 300dpi will probably not be satisfactory unless the emblem is a single shade of gray. For the above example, a character from the <i>Fontawesome</i> font was converted to a png image at mid-gray. It is less distracting than a black character from the font, but hard to discern. Note that there is no "gray ink" for directly writing text in gray.</p>
+<p>• At the small size of an emblem, it is difficult to use detailed artwork. A black/white image at 600dpi will print similarly to a font dingbat. Grayscale at 300dpi will probably not be satisfactory unless the emblem is a single shade of gray. For the above example, a character from the <i>Fontawesome</i> font was converted to a png image at mid-gray. It is less distracting than a black character from the font, but hard to discern. Note that "gray ink" will not be used for your book.</p>
<p>• Ask your print service whether the presence of a small image in each page header will affect production costs. Probably not, but if there is a different per-page charge when pages have an image... Oops!</p>
<p>• The layout calculation does not care whether emblems intrude into the margins. You will have to inspect your PDF to determine whether a header emblem is too tall, or a footer emblem too deep, for the allowed top and bottom margin clearance. Class option <i>shademargins</i> (in draft mode only) is helpful.</p>
-</div>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.4.5 -->
-<h4 id="h6.1.4">6.1.4. <code>\SetPageNumberStyle{<em>code using \thepage</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.1.4">
-<p class="noindent">By default, the page number is simply <code>\thepage</code>. In most cases, leave it that way. But if you wish to change how the page number is displayed, you can use this command to style how <code>\thepage</code> is displayed. Examples:</p>
-<p class="code" style="text-indent:0px"><code>\SetPageNumberStyle{\emph{thepage}} % Page number in italics.<br/>
-\SetPageNumberStyle{-- \thepage --} % En-dash on each side of number, for head/foot style 3 or 5.</code></p>
-<p>The <i>headfont</i> is applied automatically, unless you over-ride it in your code.</p>
-<p>You could also get more involved, using a different font or size. Avoid over-doing it. If you are tempted to use a macro that counts page numbers backwards, be aware that your print service will likely reject it. Anyway, it has already been done in fiction.</p>
-</div>
+<h5 id="h4.3.4.6">4.3.4.6. Setting and Changing Header Text</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.4.6">
+<p class="noindent">If you are using head/foot style <i>1</i>, <i>4</i>, <i>5</i>, or <i>6</i>, it has text in the header. By default, that text is the author on verso pages, the title on recto pages. That is an accepted design for fiction, but it is not always the appropriate thing to do.</p>
+<p>For example, in exotic cases you may use something such as <code>\SetTitle{ISBN9780123456789TEXTBLOCK}</code>, instead of the book's actual title, if required fr the printer's database. Obviously you do not want that to appear in page headings!</p>
+<p>This is solved using these commands:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetVersoHeadText{<em>text</em>}</code><br/>
+<code>\SetRectoHeadText{<em>text</em>}</code></p>
+<p>Unlike other settings, these commands can be used <i>both</i> in Preamble <i>and</i> in the document body. Whatever you set will take effect immediately (for pages that have header text) and remain in effect until changed by repeating these commands. For example, you might want to do that for a collection of short stories, or if your book has a Preface.</p>
+<p>You may use ordinary LaTeX styling commands for the text:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetRectoHeadText{The \emph{Bad Boy} Chronicles}</code></p>
+<p>You may also do more complicated things, such as setting certain words in a font other than the <i>headfont</i>. This is not advised, because you do not want to distract the reader from the main text; but it can be done.</p>
+<p>• Avoid bold. Avoid underline. Really. Don't do it. No, no, no!</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.4.6 -->
+</div><!-- end 4.3.4 -->
-<h4 id="h6.1.5">6.1.5. <code>\SetHeadFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>font</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.1.5">
-<p class="noindent">This setting is described in <a href="#h5.1.5">section 5.1.5</a>.</p>
-</div>
+<h4 id="h4.3.5">4.3.5. Header/Footer Exceptional Pages</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d4.3.5">
+<p class="noindent">There are a number of cases where a specific page must have a header/footer style that appears to differ from the global style. The key words are "appears to differ." The global header/footer is always there, in terms of vertical space. But either or both may be blank, or have unusual content, on certain pages.</p>
-<h4 id="h6.1.6">6.1.6. <code>\SetLooseHead{<em>number</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.1.6">
-<p class="noindent">This command applies to both headers and footers.</p>
-<p>If you are using a style that has header text, then for best appearance the characters should appear with a little extra space between them, so that they are more easily distinguished from the main text. This is especially true if you are using small caps. The name for such adjustment is "tracking."</p>
-<p>Note: Do not use the <code>\textls</code> command. It is disabled in this class.</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/looseheads.png" width="400" height="76" alt="loosehead 50 and 100"/></p>
-<p>The argument of <code>\SetLooseHead</code> is a number from 0 to 1000. At 0 there is no extra space between the letters. Values from 50 (default) to 200 are most useful. Higher values are unusual.</p>
-<p>Page number tracking will be clamped at a maximum of 50, even when a larger (looser) tracking is applied to text.</p>
-<p>The looseness applies to inter-letter spacing, but not to inter-word spacing. To increase inter-word spacing, use extra code such as <code>\,</code> (backslash comma, which is a LaTeX thin space) as needed.</p>
-</div>
+<h5 id="h4.3.5.1">4.3.5.1. <code>\thispagestyle{<em>choice</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.5.1">
+<p>Command <code>\thispagestyle</code> is used in the document body, not Preamble. It changes the appearance of header/footer, only for the page on which the command appears. Ideally the command is used immediately after <code>\clearpage</code> or <code>\cleartorecto</code>, so that the applicable page is certain.</p>
+<p>However, the command will be effective if used anywhere on a page, as long as you are certain <i>which</i> page is current. So, if you know that a particular section is exactly two pages long, you can use <code>\thispagestyle</code> at the beginning and end of the section, so that it applies to both pages.</p>
+<p>The choice of page style is <i>not</i> one of the numbered global head/foot styles. Instead, choose from the following list. These are more versatile than the choices available in other TeX document classes. They are: <i>fancy</i>, <i>empty</i>, <i>footer</i>, <i>forcenumber</i>, <i>dropfoliobeneath</i>, and <i>dropfolioinside</i>.</p>
+<p class="overhang"><code><b>\thispagestyle{fancy}</b></code><br/>
+This applies the default (fancy) page style, so it is not normally needed. Only use this command to over-ride some other <code>\thispagestyle</code> command, or to over-ride the <code>\SetChapterStartStyle</code> setting.</p>
+<p class="overhang"><code><b>\thispagestyle{empty}</b></code><br/>
+Header and footer are both blank.</p>
+<p class="overhang"><code><b>\thispagestyle{footer}</b></code><br/>
+Ignored if the style has no footer. If it does, then the usual footer appears. Note that this does <i>not</i> cause a page number to appear, when the style has no footer. Header, if any, is blank.</p>
+<p class="overhang"><code><b>\thispagestyle{forcenumber}</b></code><br/>
+If the style has a footer, then it appears as usual, and the header (if any) is blank. If the style has a header but no footer, then the outside portion of the header (which is presumed to contain the page number and emblem) appears, but the text portion of the header is blank.<br/>
+• The <i>forcenumber</i> choice is non-standard. Use it only if you must have a page number, and no other choice is suitable.</p>
+<p class="overhang"><code><b>\thispagestyle{dropfoliobeneath}</b></code><br/>
+In this context, "folio" means page number. The header (if any) is blank. If there is a footer, then it appears as usual. But if there is no footer, this command creates a one-page fake footer, which contains the centered page number. The fake footer is located where the next line of text would be, if the textblock were one line longer than its actual value.<br/>
+• For the fake footer to be acceptable in print, the bottom margin must be wider than the minimum amount required by your print service. For example, suppose that the minimum bottom margin is 0.5in, but you set the bottom margin to 0.75in. That gives you 0.25in wiggle room, into which the fake footer will probably fit, because typical baselineskip is 0.2in to 0.25in.<br/>
+• The document class does not know whether or not you have extra space available in the bottom margin. It is your responsibility to know.</p>
+<p class="overhang"> <code><b>\thispagestyle{dropfolioinside}</b></code><br/>
+In this context, "folio" means page number. The header (if any) is blank. If there is a footer, then it appears as usual. But if there is no footer, this commands temporarily reduces the number of lines per page by one. At the bottom, where the last line of text would normally be, the page number is centered. Thus, there is no intrusion into the bottom margin.<br/>
+• This command may only be used following <code>\clearpage</code>. Thus, it may be used at the start of new chapters, or on pages that do not flow from a previous page. If you use it elsewhere, the print will have incorrect layout, but there will be no error or warning, since the compiler is not sure what you are trying to do.<br/>
+• If used on a page with <i>ChapterStart</i> environment, you must place <code>\thispagestyle{dropfolioinside}</code> <em>before</em> <code>\begin{ChapterStart}</code>. Reason: The <i>ChapterStart</i> block has a disposable blank line at its top, which is removed when <i>dropfolioinside</i> is used (instead of removing a line from the following text block).<br/>
+• With this style, the specified height of <i>ChapterStart</i> must be <i>4</i> or more. This command will reduce it to 3 or more.</p>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.5.1 -->
-<h4 id="h6.1.7">6.1.7. <code>\SetChapterStart{<em>choice</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.1.7">
-<p class="noindent">This command is only applied if you begin new chapters with the <a href="#h11.1">ChapterStart</a> environment. You may pick one of the <code>\thispagestyle</code> choices, described in the <a href="#h6.2.2">section 6.2.2</a>. For example:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetChapterStart{dropfolioinside}</code></p>
-<p>Then, that choice will be applied to each page that uses ChapterStart, without you having to write <code>\thispagestyle</code> each time.</p>
-<p>The default is <i>footer</i>. This allows a ChapterStart page to show its footer (only if it has one), but not header.</p>
-<p>If you use this command, you may still over-ride it on a particular page, by using <code>\thispagestyle{<em>choice</em>}</code> <em>before</em> <code>\begin{ChapterStart}</code>.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h5 id="h4.3.5.2">4.3.5.2. <code>\SetChapterStartStyle{<em>choice</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d4.3.5.2">
+<p class="noindent">The first page of each chapter, or of a section that is styled like a chapter, is usually an exception to the global page style.</p>
+<p>If you use the <i>ChapterStart</i> environment to begin them, <code>\SetChapterStartStyle</code> sets the style that will be applied at the starting page. This global setting is in Preamble, but may be over-ridden locally.</p>
+<p>The choices are the same as available for <code>\thispagestyle</code>. Default is <i>footer</i>.</p>
+</div><!-- end 4.3.5.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 4.3.5 -->
+</div><!-- end 4.3 -->
-<h3 id="h6.2">6.2. Local Header/Footer Settings, in Document Body</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d6.2">
-<p class="noindent">These commands are used when a page header/footer style is an exception to the general rule. Examples are blank pages, titles, copyright, and new chapters. You can also dynamically change the header text.</p>
-<h4 id="h6.2.1">6.2.1. <code>\SetVersoHeadText{<em>text</em>}</code><code>\SetRectoHeadText{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.2.1">
-<p class="noindent">If you are using <a href="#h6.1.2">head/foot style</a> 1, 4, 5, or 6, the header text can be dynamically changed from page to page. This feature is useful if you wish to include chapter titles in the header, since they change throughout the book. It is also useful if your work is a collection of stories with different titles, perhaps by different authors. But before you use this feature, speak with your print service! Many print-on-demand services will insist that the content of headers must not vary from place to place, because different headers may be confused with portions of different books, during the assembly process.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetVersoHeadText{New Verso Head}</code><br/><code>\SetRectoHeadText{New Recto Head}</code></p>
-<p>These two commands may be used at any time, in the Preamble or document body. When a command is used, it stores its argument in <code>\versoheadtext</code> or <code>\rectoheadtext</code>. In turn, the current value of <code>\versoheadtext</code> or <code>\rectoheadtext</code> is immediately used for the header, and will remain in effect until changed again by <code>\SetVersoHeadText</code> or <code>\SetRectoHeadText</code>.<p>
-<p>If you do not use these commands in the Preamble, then at the beginning of the document body they will be automatically set to the author (verso) and the title (recto). However, you may find that the inter-word space is closer than you would like.<p>
-<p>For improved inter-word space, use <code>\,</code> (backslash comma, the LaTeX thin space) in addition to ordinary space. You may use as many as you need.</p>
-<p>You may use ordinary LaTeX styling commands for the text:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetRectoHeadText{The \,\emph{Bad \,Boy} \,Chronicles}</code></p>
-<p>The most popular styling uses lowercase to small caps:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetRectoHeadText{\smcp{The \,Danton \,Code}}</code></p>
-<p>• Avoid bold. Avoid underline. Really. Don't do it. No, no, no!</p>
-<p>• From <i>novel</i> version 1.32, you are no longer required to use tilde instead of space.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 4 -->
+</div><!-- end page04 -->
+<!-- ************************************************************ -->
+<div id="page05" class="page">
-<h4 id="h6.2.2">6.2.2. <code>\thispagestyle{<em>choice</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d6.2.2">
-<p class="noindent">When you choose a <a href="#h6.1.2">head/foot style</a> with header, then space is allocated above the text block, where the header will be placed. That space will be allocated whether or not the header is full or empty. The same applies to the footer. This allocation is global, and cannot be changed in your document body. All standard books work this way, not just with TeX.</p>
-<p>However, on a per-page basis you can change whether or not a header or footer has visible content. This is routinely done for blank pages, title page, copyright page, and some others. It is also the norm for pages that begin a new chapter.</p>
-<p>• The word "folio" has several meanings: It may refer to a particular paper size, or to a folded piece of paper at any size, or simply to a page number. Below, "folio" means page number.</p>
-<p>• When you use the <code>\thispagestyle</code> command, your choice is applied only to the one page on which the command is written (usally does not have to be at the top of the page). But if the page uses the <a href="#h11.1">ChapterStart</a> environment, and you use <code>\thispagestyle</code>, then you <em>must</em> place <code>\thispagestyle</code> <em>before</em> <code>\begin{ChapterStart}</code>.</p>
-<p>• The following choices are allowed: <i>fancy</i>, <i>empty</i>, <i>footer</i>, <i>forcenumber</i>, <i>dropfoliobeneath</i>, and <i>dropfolioinside</i>.</p>
-<p>For compatibility reasons, <i>plain</i> and <i>fancyplain</i> are also allowed, and have the same effect as <i>footer</i>.</p>
-<p> <b><code>\thispagestyle{fancy}</code></b></p>
-<p>This applies the default (fancy) page style, so it is not normally needed. Only use this command to over-ride some other \thispagestyle command, or to over-ride the <code>\SetChapterStart</code> setting.</p>
-<p> <b><code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code></b></p>
-<p>Header and footer are both blank.</p>
-<p> <b><code>\thispagestyle{footer}</code></b></p>
-<p>Ignored if the style has no footer. If it does, then the usual footer appears. Header, if any, is blank.</p>
-<p>This command is an alias for <i>fancyplain</i>. It is like the <i>plain</i> style, except that the footer (which is presumed to contain the page number) is fully styled. But unlike <i>plain</i>, the <i>footer</i> style does <em>not</em> cause a page number to appear when no footer exists. If that is what you need, then use either style <i>dropfoliobeneath</i> or <i>dropfolioinside</i>, depending on whether you have extra room in the bottom margin.</p>
-<p> <b><code>\thispagestyle{forcenumber}</code></b></p>
-<p>If the style has a footer, then it appears as usual, and the header (if any) is blank. If the style has a header but no footer, then the outside portion of the header (which is presumed to contain the page number and emblem) appears, but the text portion of the header is blank.</p>
-<p>The <i>forcenumber</i> choice is non-standard. Use it only if you must have a page number, and no other choice is suitable.</p>
-<p> <b><code>\thispagestyle{dropfoliobeneath}</code></b></p>
-<p>The header (if any) is blank. If there is a footer, then it appears as usual. But if there is no footer, this command creates a one-page fake footer, which contains the centered page number. The fake footer is located where the next line of text would be, if the textblock were one line longer than its actual value.</p>
-<p>• For the fake footer to be acceptable in print, the bottom margin must be wider than the minimum amount required by your print service. For example, suppose that the minimum bottom margin is 0.5in, but you set the bottom margin to 0.75in. That gives you 0.25in wiggle room, into which the fake footer will probably fit, because typical baselineskip is 0.2in to 0.25in.</p>
-<p>• The document class does not know whether or not you have extra space available in the bottom margin. It is your responsibility to know.</p>
-<p> <b><code>\thispagestyle{dropfolioinside}</code></b></p>
-<p>The header (if any) is blank. If there is a footer, then it appears as usual. But if there is no footer, this commands temporarily reduces the number of lines per page by one line. At the bottom, where the last line of text would normally be, the page number is centered. Thus, there is no intrusion into the bottom margin.</p>
-<p>This command may only be used following the <code>\clearpage</code> command. Thus, it may be used at the start of new chapters, or on pages (such as copyright page) that do not flow from a previous page. If you use it elsewhere, the print will have incorrect layout, but there will be no error or warning, since the compiler is not sure what you are trying to do.</p>
-<p>If used on a page with ChapterStart environment, you must place <code>\thispagestyle{dropfolioinside}</code> <em>before</em> <code>\begin{ChapterStart}</code>. The <i>ChapterStart</i> block has a disposable blank line at its top, which is removed when <i>dropfolioinside</i> is used (instead of removing a line from the following text block).</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h2 id="h5">5. Chapters and Chapter-Like Sections</h2>
+<div class="d2" id="d5">
+<p class="noindent">This section describes how chapters are designed. The <i>novel</i> class has commands specifically for this purpose. Do not use the ordinary TeX <code>\chapter</code> command, or any other TeX partitioning such as <code>\section</code>.</p>
+<p>This also applies to content that is styled like a chapter, regardless of what it is called or where it appears. For example, if your book's front matter has a Preface, it is probably styled like a chapter. Something such as Acknowledgements might or might not be styled like a chapter, depending on length. Advice can be found in this documentation, in the part regarding Book Design.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page06 -->
+<h3 id="h5.1">5.1. Starting a Chapter</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d5.1">
+<p class="noindent">Unlike most other TeX document classes, <i>novel</i> does <i>not</i> honor the <code>\chapter</code> command. And, <i>novel</i> does <i>not</i> automatically start chapters on a new page.</p>
+
+<h4 id="h5.1.1">5.1.1. <code>\clearpage</code> or <code>\cleartorecto</code></h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d5.1.1">
+<p class="noindent">Unless your chapters run continuously without page break, begin a new chapter using <code>\clearpage</code> or <code>\cleartorecto</code>. The first of these provides a new page, which will be verso or recto, without skipping a page. The second forces the chapter to begin on a recto page, if necessary inserting a blank verso.</p>
+<p>Note that the common modern practice in fiction is to allow new chapters to begin either verso or recto, once you get past Chapter One. The only recent book I've read (from a major publisher), where chapters always started recto, had about 20 blank pages throughout the story. I believe the reason was to pad the book, so that it looked bigger. If you are using an American P.O.D. service, such padding might knock about $0.10 (estimated) from your profit, for each copy sold. So it's up to you to think about the tradeoffs between style, profit per book, and expected sales.</p>
+<p>Prologue (if any), Chapter One, Epilogue (if any), and other special sections always begin recto.</p>
+<p>Don't worry about using <code>\clearpage</code> or <code>\cleartorecto</code> twice. The compiler is smart enough to understand that you only meant to do it once, as long as there is no other code in between.</p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h5.1.2">5.1.2. ChapterStart Environment</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d5.1.2">
+<p class="noindent">The ChapterStart environment creates a block of white space, with a fixed height (number of normal lines). If you do not place much inside it, or even if you place nothing inside it, the space is the same.</p>
+<p>If you place too much inside it, the space does not grow. Instead, the excess material overflows the bottom of the environment. There, the excess will underlie the main text. This is usually undesirable, but can sometimes be used for special effects.</p>
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.2.1">5.1.2.1. <code>\SetChapterStartStyle{<em>choice</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.2.1">
+<p class="noindent">This command may be used in Preamble. Its default setting is <i>footer</i>.</p>
+<p>In most cases, a <i>ChapterStart</i> page has a head/foot style that differs from the global default. Instead of writing <code>\thispagestyle</code> commands for every chapter, use <code>\SetChapterStartStyle</code> to pick a style that will be applied wherever <i>ChapterStart</i> is used. The available choices are: fancy, footer, empty, dropfoliobeneath, dropfolioinside, forcenumber.</p>
+<p>Regardless of the global header/footer style, and regardless of this setting, you can over-ride the style on a per-chapter basis, via an optional argument at the beginning of the <i>ChapterStart</i> environment.</p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.2.1 -->
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.2.2">5.1.2.2. <code>\SetChapterStartHeight{<em>lines</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.2.2">
+<p class="noindent">This command may be used in Preamble. Its default setting is <i>10</i>.</p>
+<p>This command sets the default height of the <i>ChapterStart</i> environment, measured as an integer number of normal lines. The smallest value is <i>3</i>. However, if the chapter also uses <i>dropfolioinside</i>, then the smallest value is <i>4</i>, because one line is lost when processing the <i>dropfolioinside</i> command.</p>
+<p>Regardless of this setting, you can over-ride the height on a per-chapter basis, via an optional argument at the beginning of the <i>ChapterStart</i> environment.</p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.2.2 -->
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.2.3">5.1.2.3. <code>\begin{ChapterStart}[<em>lines</em>][<em>style</em>]</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.2.3">
+<p class="noindent">The <i>ChapterStart</i> environment takes up to two optional arguments.</p>
+<p>The first optional argument over-rides the default height of <i>ChapterStart</i>, for just this chapter. Its smallest value is <i>3</i>, except that its smalles value is <i>4</i> when <i>dropfolioinside</i> is used.</p>
+<p>The second optional argument over-rides the header/footer style, for just this chapter. If you use the second optional argument, it must be one of the allowed choices for <code>\thispagestyle</code>, namely: fancy, footer, empty, dropfoliobeneath, dropfolioinside, forcenumber.</p>
+<p>To use the second argument without the first, place an asterisk: <code>[*][<em>style</em>]</code></p>
+<p>Whatever you place within <i>ChapterStart</i> will probably be higher on the page than you would like. To move it down, use the <code>\vspace*{<em>length</em>}</code> command (with asterisk) immediately after the environment begins.</p>
+<p>As with all environments, this one must be closed using <code>\end{ChapterStart}</code>.</p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.2.3 -->
+</div><!-- end 5.1.2 -->
+
+<h4 id="h5.1.3">5.1.3. Chapter Title, Subtitle, Deco, Epigraph</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d5.1.3">
+<p class="noindent">You can put anything you like within <i>ChapterStart</i>, including ordinary text and even images. All <i>ChapterStart</i> does is reserve a fixed space. However, there are special commands that make it easy to place a chapter title, chapter subtitle, and decorative element.</p>
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.3.1">5.1.3.1. <code>\SetChapterFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>font</em>}</code><br/>
+<span class="dbloc">5.1.3.1 </span><code>\SetSubchFont[<em>features</em>]{<em>font</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.3.1">
+<p class="noindent">These global commands may be used in Preamble. They create font commands <code>\chapterfont</code> and <code>\subchfont</code> that may be used to style text anywhere in your document, like this:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>{\chapterfont <em>text</em>}<br/>
+{\subchfont <em>text</em>}</code></p>
+<p>The <i>chapterfont</i> is automatically applied to text in <code>\ChapterTitle</code> commands, and the <i>subch</i> font is automatically applied to text in chapter subtitles (see below).</p>
+<p>These fonts are pre-configured, based on the document's parent font. They have TeX ligatures and kerning, and use Lining numbers instead of Old Style. The <i>chapterfont</i> is scaled at 1.6, and the <i>subchfont</i> is scaled at 1.2, compared to normal font size. Ordinary (common) ligatures are not used, because such ligatures are best avoided with enlarged text.</p>
+<p>If you don't like the pre-configured fonts, then you may specify your own, using <i>fontspec</i> syntax. Here is what the default codes look like:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetChapterFont[Numbers=Lining,Scale=1.6]{\parentfont}<br/>
+\SetSubchFont[Numbers=Lining,Scale=1.2]{\parentfont}</code></p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.3.1 -->
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.3.2">5.1.3.2. <code>\ChapterTitle[<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code><br/>
+<span class="dbloc">5.1.3.2. </span><code>\ChapterSubtitle[<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.3.2">
+<p class="noindent">Text within <code>\ChapterTitle</code> is styled using the <i>chapterfont</i>, and text within <code>\ChapterSubtitle</code> is automatically styled using the <i>subchfont</i>. You can locally over-ride that, using font commands within the text.</p>
+<p>The optional <i>alignment</i> is one of <i>l</i>, <i>c</i>, <i>r</i> (left, center, right). Default <i>c</i>.</p>
+<p>You don't have to use either of these commands. Or, you can use either of them more than once! All these commands do is style the text.</p>
+<p>The styled text is limited to one line (no wrap). If you have a long chapter title or subtitle, then break it into pieces of manageable size, by repeating the command(s). Example:</p>
+<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/chaptertitlesubtitle.png" width="338" height="179" title="chapter title and subtitle, left aligned" alt="chapter title and subtitle, left aligned"/>
+<code><small>
+\begin{ChapterStart}
+\vspace{2\nbs}
+\ChapterTitle[l]{XV}
+\vspace{\nbs}
+\ChapterSubtitle[l]{In which Lord Withens, returned from his quest,}
+\ChapterSubtitle[l]{encounters an Army of Gnomes at his castle gate.}
+\end{\ChapterStart}
+Following the dark and stormy night, it was a bright and sunny day. That did nothing to improve the demeanor of Lord Withens, who was still soaked from riding through the rain. ...\par
+</small></code></p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.3.2 -->
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.3.3">5.1.3.3. <code>\ChapterDeco[<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.3.3">
+<p class="noindent">Text within <code>\ChapterDeco</code> has no particular content, and no particular styling. This command is simply a way for you to remember that its content is neither the title nor subtitle of the chapter.</p>
+<p>The optional <i>alignment</i> is one of <i>l</i>, <i>c</i>, <i>r</i> (left, center, right). Default <i>c</i>.</p>
+<p>Many works of fiction have a decorative element below (or within) chapter titles. For your convenience, the <i>NovelDeco</i> font (included with <i>novel</i> has a few possibilities. they are accessed via the <code>\decoglyph</code> command. The list of available decorations, and codes to access them, are in the file <i>NovelDeco-glyphs.pdf</i>, which is in the <i>extras</i> folder within this documentation. Note that the decorations can be placed anywhere in your document, not just in <code>\ChapterDeco</code>.</p>
+<p>When you use a decoration, it will almost certainly have to be up-scaled, using the <code>\charscale</code> command. You may have to adjust its vertical position using <code>\vspace</code>.</p>
+<p>Example: More likely than not, the same decoration will be applied to any chapter that has one. Then, you can define the decoration as a macro in Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code"><code><small>\newcommand\myctdeco{%<br/>
+<span style="padding-left:2em"></span>\charscale[4]{\decoglyph{r9666}\decoglyph{n9591}\decoglyph{r9656}}<br/>
+<span style="padding-left:2em"></span>}%
+</small></code></p>
+<p>Then use it wherever needed:</p>
+<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/thelowdown.png" width="334" height="181" title="chapter title with decoration" alt="chapter title with decoration"/><code><small>
+\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
+\vspace{2\nbs}<br/>
+\ChapterTitle{3. The Low-Down}<br/>
+\vspace{2\nbs}<br/>
+\ChapterDeco{\myctdeco}<br/>
+\end{ChapterStart}<br/>
+I didn't hear the low-down until the following Saturday. By then, all hell had broken loose at Vinny's joint, and the boys were looking for me in trash cans, just in case that was where I was hiding. ...\par
+</small></code></p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.3.3 -->
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.3.4">5.1.3.4. Chapter Epigraph</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.3.4">
+<p class="noindent">If you would like to place an Epigraph within <i>ChapterStart</i>, there is no special command for that purpose. You do it the same way you would do it anywhere else: Use the <i>adjustwidth</i> environment to limit the text width. You may use the <i>parascale</i> environment to scale the block of text, without disturbing the following line grid, as long as you are within <i>ChapterStart</i>. Example:</p>
+<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/bookofbeirh.png" width="344" height="191" title="chapter title with epigraph" alt="chapter title with epigraph"/><code><small>
+\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
+\vspace{2\nbs}<br/>
+\ChapterTitle{16. The Great Incantation}<br/>
+\vspace{\nbs}<br/>
+\begin{adjustwidth}{4em}{4em}<br/>
+\begin{parascale}[0.88]<br/>
+In the third moon of the third raveling, in the third hour of the third day, Fingly shall come again.\par<br/>
+\stake\hfill \textit{Book of Beirh}\par<br/>
+\end{parascale}<br/>
+\end{adjustwidth}<br/>
+\end{ChapterStart}<br/>
+In the latter days of the Dorf dynasty, a marvelous apparition sent the King's guard scrambling in terror. Elders soon declared that it was the return of Fingly, prophesized in the Book of Beirh. ...\par
+</small></code></p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.3.4 -->
+</div><!-- end 5.1.3 -->
+
+<h4 id="h5.1.4">5.1.4. ChapterStart With Image</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d5.1.4">
+<p class="noindent">You can use an image in chapter titles. If you place an image, use one of the image commands defined by <i>novel</i> elsewhere in the documentation. Any other method is likely to push the following text off-grid.</p>
+<p>Be sure that you are licensed to use the image. Many clipart catalogs "for personal use only," prohibit usage in commercial books. One possible source is <a href="http://openclipart.org" rel="external" target="new">openclipart.org</a> (note the <em>.org</em>).</p>
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.4.1">5.1.4.1. Text Over Image</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.4.1">
+<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/ctimg35.png" width="79" height="196" alt="example of chapter title image, text over"/> You may position text over an image. It is best to use black text, or grayscale text that is much darker than the underlying image. Results are uncertain if you try to place light text over a dark image, because it depends on the print technology, which is not within your control.</p>
+<p>Example, where the command <code>\unifrac</code> calls for the font <i>UnifrakturMaguntia.ttf</i>. Note that the font command is <i>outside</i> \charscale:</p>
+<p class="code"><code><small>\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
+\BlockImage{sword.png} <span class="ap">% centered by default</span><br/>
+{\unifrak\centering\charscale[3,0pt,4\nbs]{35}\par}<br/>
+</small>\end{ChapterStart}</code></p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.4.1 -->
+
+<h5 id="h5.1.4.2">5.1.4.2. Text Built Into Image</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d5.1.4.2">
+<p class="noindent">If the text is not ordinary black, or not much darker than the background image, then it is better to include the text as part of the raster image. The reason is that "white ink" will not be used for your book. Also, you cannot use image transparency.</p>
+<p>Although light text over a dark image may appear as expected in PDF, and print that way on some printers, there are many exceptions. If in doubt, ask your print service. In this example, the number is built into the image itself:</p>
+<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/smfingerprint8.png" width="86" height="70" alt="example of chapter title image, raster text"/><code><small>\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
+\BlockImage[l]{smfingerprint8.png}<br/>
+\end{ChapterStart}</small></code></p>
+</div><!-- end 5.1.4.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 5.1.4 -->
+</div><!-- end 5.1 -->
+
+<h3 id="h5.2">5.2. Continuously Running Chapters</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d5.2">
+<p class="noindent">Standard book design calls for each chapter to begin on a new page. However, some books are designed with numerous short chapters that run continously, so that chapters may start anywhere on a page. There are two ways to handle this in <i>novel</i>, or you can simply design your own method.</p>
+
+<h4 id="h5.2.1">5.2.1. Reduced-Height ChapterStart</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d5.2.1">
+<p class="noindent">Since the <i>ChapterStart</i> environment does not automatically begin a new page, you can use it for continuously running chapters. In Preamble, set a short height, such as <code>\SetChapterStartHeight{4}</code>. Also use <code>\SetChapterStartStyle{fancy}</code> so that headers don't disappear.</p>
+<p>Throughout the book, you can make local adjustments to the <i>ChapterStart</i> height, so that they don't fall at an inconvenient location (such as at the bottom of a page). Yes, I have seen this done in published works. If a particular chapter is sufficiently important that it deserves a page break, or a lot more space, you can do that easily.</p>
+</div><!-- end 5.2.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h5.2.2">5.2.2. <code>\QuickChapter[<em>linelength</em>]{<em>chapter title</em>}</code></h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d5.2.2">
+<p class="noindent">The <code>\QuickChapter</code> command inserts two blank lines. In the gap, the chapter title is left-justified using <i>subchfont</i> (not <i>chapterfont</i>). It is slightly raised from the normal baseline, because this looks better; but the following text is back on-grid. By default, the start of the following text will be un-indented.</p>
+<p>If the optional <i>linelength</i> is provided, then a dash will be written after the title, at the position and thickness typical of the em dash in <i>subchfont</i>. If <i>linelength</i> is specified in units of length, then that will be the length of the line. But if <i>linelength</i> is an asterisk, then the line will fill to the right margin.</p>
+<p>Note that this command is probably too obtrusive for mere scene changes within a chapter.</p>
+<p>Example:</p>
+<p class="code"><code><small>Then he looked at me with a sneer, and barked, “You better haul your can over to Vinny's joint, before the Boss finds out.”\par<br/>
+\QuickChapter[3em]{16. At Vinny’s}<br/>
+So I took his advice, and hauled my can over to Vinny’s. It was everything I had expected, and worse.\par<br/>
+The bouncer wasn't the biggest one I’d ever seen, but he was the ugliest. ...</small></code></p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/quickchapter.png" width="629" height="240" alt="quick chapter"/></p>
+</div><!-- end 5.2.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 5.2 -->
+
+<h3 id="h5.3">5.3. Scene Breaks</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d5.3">
+<p class="noindent">There are several commands dedicated to the purpose of scene breaks.</p>
+<p class="code"><code><b>\scenebreak</b></code> inserts a one-line blank skip. The following line of text is not indented.</p>
+<p class="code"><code><b>\sceneline</b></code> inserts a one-line skip, containing a short centered line. The following line of text is not indented.</p>
+<p class="code"><code><b>\scenestars</b></code> inserts a one-line skip, containing three spaced, centered asterisks. The following line of text is not indented.</p>
+<p style="margin-top:20px">Examples:</p>
+<p class="code"><img style="float:right; margin-left:16px;" src="html-resources/scenebreaks.png" width="331" height="236" alt="scene breaks"/>
+<code><small>
+\noindent It was a dark and stormy night.\par<br/>
+Lord Withens, the last of his line, hurried through the gloom to Castle McWhistle, where Lady McWhistle awaited.\par<br/>
+\scenebreak<br/>
+Well, maybe it was not very dark.\par<br/>
+But to Lord Withens, it seemed dark enough. Or rather, he hoped it was dark enough. Lord McWhistle was suspicious.\par<br/>
+\sceneline<br/>
+Actually, it was not all that stormy, either. But the Withens clan never tolerated drizzle, much less a storm.\par<br/>
+Who could blame them? It's not like they lived in Italy.\par<br/>
+\scenestars<br/>
+Ah, such ill fortune haunted the Withens!\par<br/>
+Unfortunately, novelists of that era had so little to write about, or they would have chosen another family to pursue.\par
+</small></code></p>
+<p>If you are using <code>\scenebreak</code> and the gap occurs at the very bottom or top of a page, then manually substitute <code>\sceneline</code> or <code>\scenestars</code> there. This is a standard way to indicate that the gap is intentional. The substitution is not automatic.</p>
+
+<h4 id="h5.3.1">5.3.1. <code>\SetScenebreakIndent{<em>true</em> or <em>false</em>}</code></h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d5.3.1">
+<p class="noindent">This global command may only be used in the Preamble. Default is <i>false</i>.</p>
+<p>Normally, text begins without a paragraph indent, after each scene break. This is standard in fiction. If you prefer that each new scene begins indented, use this command. It works only with <code>\scenebreak</code>, <code>\sceneline</code>, and <code>\scenestars</code>.</p>
+<p><small>Note: <code>\SetScenebreakIndent</code> is new in version 1.40.3. When set to <i>true</i> it is identical to the <code>\IndentAfterScenebreak</code> command from prior versions. The older command is still honored. The new command has syntax more consistent with other <i>novel</i> settings.</small></p>
+</div><!-- end 5.3.1 -->
+</div><!-- end 5.3 -->
+
+
+</div><!-- end 5 -->
+</div><!-- end page05 -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page07" class="page">
+<div id="page06" class="page">
-<h2 id="h7">7. Text Sizes and Styling</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="d7">
+<h2 id="h6">6. Text Sizes and Styling</h2>
+<div class="d2" id="d6">
<p class="noindent">This section describes how to change the size of text, how to style text (such as italics), and how to move it around. It also describes some miscellaneous commands that are intended to modify text.</p>
-<p>Information about how to choose the main text point size is described in <a href="#h4.2.3">section 4.2.3</a>. Information about choosing fonts and font features was <a href="#h5">previously described</a> on this page.</p>
+<p>Information about how to choose the global, main text point size is described in <a href="#h4.2.1.2">section 4.2.1.2</a>. General information about choosing fonts and font features is in <a href="#hC">Appendix C</a> and <a href="#hE">Appendix E</a>.</p>
<p>There is no direct setting for normal baselineskip; it is automatically calculated from the size of the textblock and lines per page.</p>
-<h3 id="h7.1">7.1. Text Sizes</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d7.1">
+<h3 id="h6.1">6.1. Text Sizes</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d6.1">
<p class="noindent">Be sure to read through this. In <i>novel</i>, standard TeX font size commands are disabled. There are new commands that address the limited needs for font sizing, in the context of fiction. These new commands are primarily for local adjustments of a few characters, or for display pages that are outside the main flow of text.</p>
-<h4 id="h7.1.1">7.1.1. Surprise! Traditional TeX Font Size Commands Are Disabled.</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.1.1">
+<h4 id="h6.1.1">6.1.1. Surprise! Traditional TeX Font Size Commands Are Disabled.</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.1.1">
<p class="noindent">Ah, the simplicity of TeX font size commands, such as <code>\small</code> and <code>\LARGE</code>. But in <i>novel</i>, they don't work. If you write <code>{\LARGE text}</code>, then the included text appears at normal size. This is by design.</p>
<p>Why? In <i>novel</i>, the focus is on maintaining a constant baselineskip, so that facing pages have text aligned. This is impossible with the standard TeX commands. In particular, commands to increase font size will change the baselineskip, whether you like it or not, even if you try to code for a constant baselineskip. That's just the way TeX works.</p>
-<p>The one exception is that <a href="#h12.1">footnotes</a> will appear with smaller than normal size and skip. But this is done automatically. You cannot manipulate it with a size command.</p>
+<p>The one exception is that <a href="#hXXXXX">footnotes</a> will appear with smaller than normal size and skip. But this is done automatically. You cannot manipulate it with a size command.</p>
<p>Fortunately, there are not a lot of occasions where fiction needs to change font size. In <i>novel</i>, there are new commands to address each situation.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.1.1 -->
-<h4 id="h7.1.2">7.1.2. <code>\charscale[<em>scale,hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code>, <code>\charscale*[<em>scale,hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.1.2">
+<h4 id="h6.1.2">6.1.2. <code>\charscale[<em>scale,hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code> and starred</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.1.2">
<p class="noindent">The <code>\charscale</code> command may be used for a short amount of text, where there is no line break. The command will throw an error if the included text has <code>\\</code> or <code>\par</code> or any other command that breaks the line. Text within <code>\charscale</code> does not wrap. You may not place an image in <code>\charscale</code>.</p>
<p>When used without the option, <code>\charscale</code> echoes the included text. However, the text gains the magical ability to extend above or below the normal line of text, without pushing apart the baselines. This is useful if the text has some unusual character that is extraordinarily tall or deep.</p>
<p>Using the option, you may uniformly scale the text by any amount, and displace it horizontally and vertically. The text can overlie other text, or any previously-placed image.</p>
<p>With the unstarred command, the scaled width of the text will occupy horizontal space, even if the text is displaced far away. But with the starred command, the text does not occupy any horizontal space.</p>
<p>The single optional argument may include up to three comma-separated values. The first value is a number, indicating the scale. If a second argument is used, it is the length of horizontal offset (positive is right). If a third number is used, it is the length of the vertical offset (positive is up). Remember that if all you want to do is scale the text, without positioning it, then you only need to provide the scale.</p>
+<p>• Note: <code>\charscale</code> does not commute with some other TeX commands. That is, the results of <code>\charscale{\othercommand{<em>text</em>}}</code> and <code>\othercommand{\charscale{<em>text</em>}}</code> may differ. That is just the way things are. Use the one that works for you.</p>
<p>Here is an example illustrating the command in all its glory:</p>
<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/badaboom.png" width="146" height="102" alt="badaboom"/><code>
Bada \charscale*[1.25,5em,1.3\nbs]{Boom} Bam\par<br/>
@@ -1617,10 +1594,10 @@
<p class="code"><code>\FirstLine{\noindent\charscale[1.5]{I}t was a dark and stormy night. Lord Withens mounted his horse and rode through the gloom to Castle McDingle, where Baron von Feathering awaited. The pair had dirty deeds to do, but being members of the nobility, they commanded a high price.}</code></p>
<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/mcdingle.png" width="559" height="121" alt="larger first letter"/></p>
<p>In the above example, the initial I is 1.5x its normal size. It appears larger than that, by comparison to the adjacent small caps letters.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.1.2 -->
-<h4 id="h7.1.3">7.1.3. <code>\begin{parascale}[<em>scale</em>] ... \end{parascale}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.1.3">
+<h4 id="h6.1.3">6.1.3. <code>\begin{parascale}[<em>scale</em>] ... \end{parascale}</code></h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.1.3">
<p class="noindent">The parascale environment is used on a paragraph basis. More than one paragraph may be included. The scale is applied to the font size and to the baselineskip within.</p>
<p>Since the text within parascale generally will not occupy an integral number of normal baselineskips, the following text will be off-grid. This may not be a problem, if parascale is used in places where maintaining the grid does not matter (such as on a title page or copyright page).</p>
<p>• If parascale is used within body text, then it will be necessary to restore the line grid for the following text. This cannot be done automatically; you will have to make a preliminary run, look at the results, and adjust accordingly.</p>
@@ -1627,45 +1604,47 @@
<p>For example, suppose you use <code>\begin{parascale}[0.92]...text...\end{parascale}</code>. The preliminary run shows that the included text occupies 7 lines. The following baseline will then be 7x(1–0.92)=0.56 normal baselineskip too high. This can be fixed by adding <code>\vspace{0.56\nbs}</code>. For best appearance, the <code>\vspace</code> should be split above and below the parascale environment, but not nessarily in half.</p>
<p>• If parascale crosses to the next page, then you will need to make vertical adjustment for each page independently. For example, if a 7-line parascale has 3 lines at the bottom of a page, followed by 4 lines on the following page, then you need to restore only a 4 line deficit on the following page.</p>
<p>• Within parascale you may need to manually indent paragraphs, or remove indents if necessary.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.1.3 -->
-<h4 id="h7.1.4">7.1.4. Open Type Scale (fontspec)</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.1.4">
-<p class="noindent">If you will be using a font in a way that it will <em>always</em> be at a size different from the normal font size, you may use the <i>Scale</i> feature when you first define the font. This is defined by the <i>fontspec</i> package, which is automatically loaded with <i>novel</i>.</p>
+<h4 id="h6.1.4">6.1.4. Open Type Scale (fontspec)</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.1.4">
+<p class="noindent">If you will be using a font in a way that it will <em>always</em> be at a size different from the normal font size, you may use the <i>Scale</i> feature when you first define the font. This is defined by the <i>fontspec</i> package, which is automatically loaded with <i>novel</i>. Example:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\NewFontFamily\minifont[Scale=0.75,Numbers=Lining]{\parentfont}</code></p>
<p>A scaled font can be used anywhere. It is not limited to a single line, and it will maintain the line grid at scales not exceeding 1. However, scaled text may disturb the line grid if its scale is more than 1.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 6.1.4 -->
+</div><!-- end 6.1 -->
-<h3 id="h7.2">7.2. General Styling</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d7.2">
+<h3 id="h6.2">6.2. General Styling</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d6.2">
<p class="noindent">Many of these commands are directly from LaTeX, and are mentioned here because they are frequently used. Other commands are specific to <i>novel</i>.</p>
-<h4 id="h7.2.1">7.2.1. Italics and Emphasis</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.2.1">
-<p class="noindent"><b><code>\textit{<em>text</em>}</code></b> puts the text in italics, provided that the font family has an Italic font. If it does not have an Italic font, then the letters will remain normal, <em>not</em> fake slanted.</p>
+<h4 id="h6.2.1">6.2.1. Italics and Emphasis</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.2.1">
+<p class="noindent"><code><b>\textit{<em>text</em>}</b></code> puts the text in italics, provided that the font family has an Italic font. If it does not have an Italic font, then the letters will remain normal, <em>not</em> fake slanted.</p>
<p>If the italicized text leans too far into the following space, try adding <code>\/</code> (back and forward slashes) just before closing the braces.</p>
-<p><b><code>\emph{<em>text</em>}</code></b> changes regular text to italics, and italic text to regular. You may nest <code>\emph</code> commands. Many writers opine that this is the preferred way to specify Italics.</p>
-</div>
+<p><code><b>\emph{<em>text</em>}</b></code> changes regular text to italics, and italic text to regular. You may nest <code>\emph</code> commands. Many writers opine that this is the preferred way to specify Italics.</p>
+<p>Sadly, the above two commands will fail if the styled text is in more than one paragraph. A more general command that is able to cross paragraphs is <code><b>\itshape{<em>text</em>}</b></code>.</p>.
+</div><!-- end 6.2.1 -->
-<h4 id="h7.2.2">7.2.2. Bold, Semibold, etc.</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.2.2">
-<p class="noindent"><b><code>\textbf{<em>text</em>}</code></b> puts the text in whatever font you specified as the Bold font, when you defined the currently-used font family.</p>
+<h4 id="h6.2.2">6.2.2. Bold, Semibold, etc.</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.2.2">
+<p class="noindent"><code><b>\textbf{<em>text</em>}</b></code> puts the text in whatever font you specified as the Bold font, when you defined the currently-used font family. If the text is in more than one paragraph, use <code><b>\bfshape{<em>text</em>}</b></code> instead.</p>
<p>If the font family has no Bold font, then it will <em>not</em> be faked.</p>
<p>The default main font used by <i>novel</i>, namely <i>Libertinus Serif</i>, has both Bold and Semibold weights. Given this choice, <i>novel</i> explicitly calls for the Semibold weight. If you intend to use a font such as Adobe Garamond Pro, which also has a Semibold weight, then you can request it instead of Bold when you define the font family.</p>
-<p>What if you want both Bold and Semibold, or maybe even a Light weight? Only one can be assigned to <code>\textbf</code> when you define the font. For the others, use <code>\NewFontFace</code> to assign the desired weight to its own font command, which you will use (but inside the braces) instead of <code>\textbf</code>.</p>
+<p>What if you want both Bold and Semibold, or maybe even a Light weight? Only one can be assigned as the bold weight when you define the font. For the others, use <code>\NewFontFace</code> to assign the desired weight to its own font command, which you will use (but inside the braces) instead of <code>\textbf</code>.</p>
<p>Actually, you should not be using Bold in fiction. It <em>might</em> be the case that this weight is useful for titles, but you ought to consider a fancy-looking font for that purpose, rather than mere Bold. Or, make the letters big and bold, but balance the effect by using gray.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.2.2 -->
-<h4 id="h7.2.3">7.2.3. Underlining</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.2.3">
+<h4 id="h6.2.3">6.2.3. Underlining</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.2.3">
<p class="noindent">Underlining is inappropriate for fiction. Don't do it. Besides, there are some issues regarding line grid and appearance, which are not a problem in academic works, but are noticeable in fiction.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.2.3 -->
-<h4 id="h7.2.4">7.2.4. Small Caps and Acronyms</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.2.4">
-<p class="noindent"><b><code>\textsc{<em>text</em>}</code></b> converts lowercase letters to small caps, leaving uppercase unchanged. The font's <code>smcp</code> Open Type feature will be used. But if the font does not have <code>smcp</code>, it will <em>not</em> be faked.</p>
-<p><b><code>\smcp{<em>text</em>}</code></b> is an alias for <code>\textsc{<em>text</em>}</code>.</p>
-<p><b><code>\allsmcp{<em>text</em>}</code></b> places both uppercase and lowercase letters in small caps. If the font has the <code>c2sc</code> feature, it will be used; if not, the letters will be converted to lowercase first. Then, <code>smcp</code> is applied.</p>
+<h4 id="h6.2.4">6.2.4. Small Caps and Acronyms</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.2.4">
+<p class="noindent"><code><b>\textsc{<em>text</em>}</b></code> converts lowercase letters to small caps, leaving uppercase unchanged. The font's <code>smcp</code> Open Type feature will be used. But if the font does not have <code>smcp</code>, it will <em>not</em> be faked. If you need to corss paragraphs, use <code><b>\scshape{<em>text</em>}</b></code>.</p>
+<p><code><b>\smcp{<em>text</em>}</b></code> is an alias for <code>\textsc{<em>text</em>}</code>.</p>
+<p><code><b>\allsmcp{<em>text</em>}</b></code> places both uppercase and lowercase letters in small caps. If the font has the <code>c2sc</code> feature, it will be used; if not, the letters will be converted to lowercase first. Then, <code>smcp</code> is applied.</p>
<p>• If you require small caps, but your font does not have them, you can fake them by scaling uppercase. But this is usually unattractive. A better method is described in the <i>fontspec</i> package documentation: You may appoint a different font that will provide small caps.</p>
<p>• If you insist on using old-fashioned TeX fonts, which do not have the <i>smcp</i> Open Type feature, then you may need to write this code in the Preamble:</p>
<p class="code"><code>\let\smcp\oldscshape\relax<br/>
@@ -1672,7 +1651,7 @@
\let\textsc\oldscshape\relax<br/>
\let\scshape\oldscshape\relax</code></p>
<p>The above code sends you in a time machine back to the Twentieth Century.</p>
-<p><b><code>\acronym{<em>text</em>}</code></b> is special to <i>novel</i>. If the <i>NovelDeco</i> font is installed, uppercase letters in the text will be converted to "mid-size capitals," and lowercase will remain lowercase, but with ascenders slightly reduced. The purpose of this command is so that acronyms such as NASA and NATO blend well with surrounding text. I have found that whereas ordinary uppercase is too conspicuous, small caps also looks wrong. Example:</p>
+<p><code><b>\acronym{<em>text</em>}</b></code> is special to <i>novel</i>. If the <i>NovelDeco</i> font is installed, uppercase letters in the text will be converted to "mid-size capitals," and lowercase will remain lowercase, but with ascenders slightly reduced. The purpose of this command is so that acronyms such as NASA and NATO blend well with surrounding text. I have found that whereas ordinary uppercase is too conspicuous, small caps also looks wrong. Example:</p>
<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/acronym2.png" width="192" height="89" alt="acronym"/>
<code>
The NATO alliance...\par<br/>
@@ -1680,41 +1659,41 @@
The \allsmcp{NATO} alliance...\par
</code></p>
<p>Whether or not to use the \acronym command, is up to you. Since its letters are drawn from the <i>NovelDeco</i> font, rather than your main font, there may be some stylistic differences if your <i>parentfont</i> is not Libertinus Serif.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.2.4 -->
-<h4 id="h7.2.5">7.2.5. Local Tracking Adjustment</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.2.5">
-<p class="noindent"><b><code>\squeeze{<em>text</em>}</code></b> narrows the text by one percent.</p>
-<p class="noindent"><b><code>\crush{<em>text</em>}</code></b> narrows the text by two percent.</p>
+<h4 id="h6.2.5">6.2.5. Local Tracking Adjustment</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.2.5">
+<p class="noindent"><code><b>\squeeze{<em>text</em>}</b></code> narrows the text by one percent.</p>
+<p class="noindent"><code><b>\crush{<em>text</em>}</b></code> narrows the text by two percent.</p>
<p>These commands are for emergency use only. They temporarily apply a horizontal scale to the letters, so that they are very slightly narrower than usual. Inter-word spacing is not necessarily changed (it can even grow larger), because spacing is calculated during paragraph layout. The enclosed text may span paragraphs.</p>
<p>The commands do not compound. That is, placing one crush inside another will not narrow the text by four percent. But any adjustments made by <i>microtype</i> will still apply, and may compound with these commands.</p>
<p>The only application for these commands is when a paragraph does not quite fit where you would like it to be. For example: Perhaps one short word, or part of a word, dangles to an extra line. Try <code>\squeeze</code> first, then <code>\crush</code>, for all or most of the paragraph. These do not always produce a useful effect, since the actual paragraph layout depends on other factors. But <em>if you are lucky,</em> then the paragraph re-flows to a better layout.</p>
<p>• If the commands do not help, then <em>be sure to remove them</em>, or the typography will be worse than it was before!</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.2.5 -->
-<h4 id="h7.2.6">7.2.6. Local Font Selection</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.2.6">
-<p class="noindent"><b><code>{\<em>fontcode</em> <em>text</em>}</code></b> where <i>fontcode</i> is a previously-defined <a href="#h5.1">built-in</a> or <a href="#h5.3">user-defined</a> font command.</p>
+<h4 id="h6.2.6">6.2.6. Local Font Selection</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.2.6">
+<p class="noindent"><code><b>{\<em>fontcode</em> <em>text</em>}</b></code> where <i>fontcode</i> is a previously-defined <a href="#h4.2">built-in</a> or <a href="#h4.2.5">user-defined</a> font command.</p>
<p>You locally change the font in use, by calling its font command. For example, <code>\subchfont</code> is a built-in command, automatically used in certain macros. You can use it yourself:</p>
<p class="code"><code>{\subchfont <em>text</em>} % Note that the braces go on the outside.</code></p>
<p>Likewise, if you used <code>\NewFontFamily</code> or <code>\NewFontFace</code> to define your own font, giving it the command name <code>\mynewfont</code>, then you would use it like this:</p>
<p class="code"><code>{\mynewfont <em>text</em>} % Again, the braces go on the outside.</code></p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.2.6 -->
-<h4 id="h7.2.7">7.2.7. Local Feature Changes</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.2.7">
-<p class="noindent"><b><code>{\addfontfeature{<em>feature</em>} <em>text</em>}</code></b> for changing Open Type features.</p>
-<p>If a font is already defined, you can locally add one or more <a href="#h5.4.3">features</a>. For example, suppose that you defined <code>\mynewfont</code> without using its Open Type feature <i>ss03</i> (we will assume that the font actually has this feature). In a particular place, you wish to activate <i>ss03</i>. The code looks like this:</p>
+<h4 id="h6.2.7">6.2.7. Local Feature Changes</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.2.7">
+<p class="noindent"><code><b>{\addfontfeature{<em>feature</em>} <em>text</em>}</b></code> for changing Open Type features.</p>
+<p>If a font is already defined, you can locally add one or more <a href="#E.2">features</a>. For example, suppose that you defined <code>\mynewfont</code> without using its Open Type feature <i>ss03</i> (we will assume that the font actually has this feature). In a particular place, you wish to activate <i>ss03</i>. The code looks like this:</p>
<p class="code"><code>{\mynewfont\addfontfeature{RawFeature=+ss03} <em>text</em>}</code> % Note + sign. Braces outside.</p>
<p>That limits the scope of the feature to the included group, in TeX terminology.</p>
<p>You can modify features used by any defined font, whether you defined it yourself or it is one of the <i>novel</i> built-in font commands. You can add more than one feature. If the requested feature does not exist in the font, then your request will be ignored.</p>
<p>What about removing a feature that is already present in the font definition? Suppose you defined <code>\mynewfont</code> so that <i>Numbers=OldStyle</i> is used. On a local basis, can you change the style of numbers? Usually, yes. You could use <i>Numbers=Lining</i> to over-ride the feature. Sometimes it depends on how you chose the features, as a matter of syntax. See the <i>fontspec</i> documentation.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 6.2.7 -->
-<h4 id="h7.2.8">7.2.8. Color Text (actually, grayscale)</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.2.8">
+<h4 id="h6.2.8">6.2.8. Color Text (actually, grayscale)</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.2.8">
<p class="noindent">For this effect, the <a href="#h2.2"><i>graytext</i></a> class option must be used, or any color command will be ignored, and its included text will be rendered in black (even if the requested color is white). Images are unaffected.</p>
-<p><b><code>\color{<em>name</em>}</code></b> or <b><code>\color[gray]{<em>scale</em>}</code></b> is used within a group. All text will be in grayscale, from where the command is placed, until the group ends. If the command is not at the beginning of the group, it does not affect prior text. Example:</p>
+<p><code><b>\color{<em>name</em>}</b></code> or <code><b>\color[gray]{<em>scale</em>}</b></code> is used within a group. All text will be in grayscale, from where the command is placed, until the group ends. If the command is not at the beginning of the group, it does not affect prior text. Example:</p>
<p class="code"><code>
\begingroup<br/>
This text is unaffected by the following command.<br/>
@@ -1722,7 +1701,7 @@
This text is in lightgray, until the group ends.<br/>
\endgroup
</code></p>
-<p style="margin-top:10px"><b><code>\textcolor{<em>text</em>}</code></b> or <b><code>\textcolor[gray]{<em>scale</em>}{<em>text</em>}</code></b> affects only the included text.</p>
+<p style="margin-top:10px"><code><b>\textcolor{<em>text</em>}</b></code> or <code><b>\textcolor[gray]{<em>scale</em>}{<em>text</em>}</b></code> affects only the included text.</p>
<p class="code"><code>\textcolor{gray7}{This text is in color gray7, a medium-light gray.}<br/>
\textcolor[gray]{0.32}{This text is in 32 percent gray.}</code></p>
<p style="margin-top:10px">Whether you use <code>\color</code> or <code>\textcolor</code>, there are two ways to specify the color: by name, or by scale, using package <i>xcolor</i> syntax.</p>
@@ -1732,98 +1711,176 @@
<p>• To specify color by scale, follow the color command with <i>[gray]{<em>scale</em>}</i>, where the scale is a number between 0 (black) and 1 (white). Example:<code> \color[gray]{0.63}</code>.</p>
<p>• If you use <i>xcolor</i> syntax to request an rgb color, it will be converted to 1-channel grayscale.</p>
<p>• Absolutely no transparency!</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 6.2.8 -->
+</div><!-- end 6.2 -->
-<h3 id="h7.3">7.3. Positioning and Alignment</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d7.3">
+<h3 id="h6.3">6.3. Positioning and Alignment</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d6.3">
<p class="noindent">By now, you already know: In <i>novel</i> there are new ways to position or align text, and some of the standard TeX methods are discouraged or disabled.</p>
-<h4 id="h7.3.1">7.3.1. What to Avoid</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.3.1">
-<p class="noindent">• The <code>\raisebox</code> command does not play well with novel. It can be used, but there is the great risk of disturbing the line grid. Use <code><a href="#h7.1.2">\charscale</a></code> instead.</p>
+<h4 id="h6.3.1">6.3.1. What to Avoid</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.3.1">
+<p class="noindent">• The <code>\raisebox</code> command does not play well with novel. It can be used, but there is the great risk of disturbing the line grid. Use <code><a href="#h6.1.2">\charscale</a></code> instead.</p>
<p>• If you must use the <code>\vspace</code> command (or its relative, <code>\vskip</code>) be sure to measure the space in units of <code>\nbs</code> (normal baseline skip).</p>
<p>• Avoid the <i>minipage</i> and <i>parbox</i> environments. These are likely to disrupt the line grid. When that happens, restoring the grid is your own responsibility. You may find the <i>adjustwidth</i> environment to be a useful alternative.</p>
<p>• In most cases, do not use the center environment. You may use <code>{\centering ... \par}</code> instead, for a single paragraph. The center environment may cause the text to go off-grid. That's not a problem on some stand-alone pages where you don't care about the grid, but it is ugly in the middle of running text.</p>
-<p>• Avoid positioning via the <i>textblock</i> or <i>textblock*</i> environments (package <i>textpos</i>). Actually, <i>novel</i> uses that code internally. But if not handled with more care than usual, positioned text can disrupt the baseline and position of surrounding text. You may use <code><a href="#h7.1.2">\charscale</a></code> to position small amounts of text safely, but not on a paragraph basis. Images have built-in positioning arguments, which may also be useful for positioned text.</p>
+<p>• Avoid positioning via the <i>textblock</i> or <i>textblock*</i> environments (package <i>textpos</i>). Actually, <i>novel</i> uses that code internally. But if not handled with more care than usual, positioned text can disrupt the baseline and position of surrounding text. You may use <code><a href="#h6.1.2">\charscale</a></code> to position small amounts of text safely, but not on a paragraph basis. Images have built-in positioning arguments, which may also be useful for positioned text.</p>
<p>• Do not use floats. If you try, then <i>novel</i> may intercept them with a nasty message.</p>
-<p>• Do not use tables. Nasty message will result. But <i>novel</i> has its <a href="#h9.3.5">own provision</a> for a Table of Contents, and the code may be used for other purposes as well.</p>
-<p>• If you use images, then use only the image commands provided by novel: <code><a href="#h8.4.2">\InlineImage</a></code> and <code><a href="#h8.4.4">\BlockImage</a></code>.<p>
-<p>• There is no built-in provision for a two-column environment. However, you can place text <a href="#h8.4.5">alongside</a> an image.</p>
-</div>
+<p>• Do not use tables. Nasty message will result. But <i>novel</i> has its <a href="#h8.2.1.7">own provision</a> for a Table of Contents, and the code may be used for other purposes as well.</p>
+<p>• If you use images, then use only the image commands provided by novel: <code><a href="#h7.3.2">\InlineImage</a></code> and <code><a href="#h7.3.4">\BlockImage</a></code>.<p>
+<p>• There is no built-in provision for a two-column environment. However, you can place text <a href="#h7.3.5">alongside</a> an image.</p>
+</div><!-- end 6.3.1 -->
-<h4 id="h7.3.2">7.3.2. Some Useful Commands</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d7.3.2">
+<h4 id="h6.3.2">6.3.2. Some Useful Commands</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.3.2">
<p class="noindent">This is not a complete list. It merely addresses a few situations that you are likely to encounter, without the need for elaborate code, and without loading additional packages.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\begin{adjustwidth}{<em>left</em>}{<em>right</em>}</b> ... <b>\end{adjustwidth}</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\begin{adjustwidth}{<em>left</em>}{<em>right</em>} ... \end{adjustwidth}</code></p>
<p>This environment, from the included <i>changepage</i> package, is the most useful way to create block indents. The included text may have multiple paragraphs and span pages. The left and right arguments are lengths, being the amount to <em>increase</em> the respective margins from their normal values.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\phantom{<em>text</em>}</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\phantom{<em>text</em>}</code></p>
<p>Does not print the text, but leaves a horizontal gap as if the text were there.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\mbox{<em>text</em>}</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\mbox{<em>text</em>}</code></p>
<p>Prevents a specific word from being hyphenated, or to ensure that two consecitive words always appear on the same line. The box will not be broken across lines. However, it may overhang the margin, which is undesirable.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\makebox[<em>width</em>][<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\makebox[<em>width</em>][<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code></p>
<p>Puts the text in a box of fixed width (usually much larger than the text's own width) and aligns it left, center, or right in the box. If using this across the full textwidth, be sure to precede it with <code>\noindent</code> to prevent offset.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\hspace{<em>length</em>}</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\hspace{<em>length</em>}</code></p>
<p>Creates a horizontal space.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\strut</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\strut</code></p>
<p>Places an invisible box with no width, which has the height and depth of the font. Sometimes used as a placeholder.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\stake</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\stake</code></p>
<p>Placeholder like <code>\strut</code>, but does not occupy the height or depth of the font.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\indent</code>, <code>\noindent</code>, <code>\forceindent</code>, <code>\backindent</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\indent</code>, <code>\noindent</code>, <code>\forceindent</code>, <code>\backindent</code></p>
<p>Commands <code>\indent</code> and <code>\noindent</code> have their ordinary TeX meaning. Sometimes, the action of other macros will remove an indent that should be there, or add an indent that should not be there. If writing <code>\indent</code> and <code>\noindent</code> do not fix the problems, use <code>\forceindent</code> and <code>\backindent</code> as more forceful solutions.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\hfill</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\hfill</code></p>
<p>Pushes the following text to the right end of the line. Actual effect depends on what precedes and follows. Sometimes a \strut is needed at the beginning of a line.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\vfill</code>, <code>\vfill*</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\vfill</code>, <code>\vfill*</code></p>
<p>Pushes the following text to the bottom of the page. Actual effect depends on paragraph organization. Use the asterisk if there is nothing printed above this command, on the same page.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\kern</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\kern</code></p>
<p>Tweaks the spacing between consecutive letters. A tricky command, as it is always used without braces, and makes the surrounding text illegible in your source code. If you use it, the units of length should always be <i>em</i>, rather than <i>pt</i>. Example:</p>
<p class="code"><code>It wa\kern-.02ems a da\kern.03emrk and stormy ni\kern-.004emght.</code></p>
<p>The <code>\kern</code> command is not useful for globally changing kern values.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\bigemdash[<em>yoffset,thickness</em>]</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\bigemdash[<em>yoffset,thickness</em>]</code></p>
<p>Simulates a "big emdash" of variable length. Horizontal width is from command to end of line marked by <code>\par</code>, or limited by a fixed width such as created by <code>\makebox</code>. If placed in other situations, the line may be missing or too long.</p>
<p>The line's normal position is at the typical height of an emdash, which is slightly above half the height of lowercase x. Its normal width is typical of an emdash width. Thus, the line is like an extended emdash.</p>
<p>You can tweak the line using its optional argument. The first value tweaks the vertical position by a scale factor, where 1 equals its normal position (so that 0.9 places it a little lower). The second argument, if used, is separated from the first by a comma. It tweaks the line thickness by a scale factor (so that 0.9 makes it a little thinner).</p>
<p>Since <code>\bigemdash</code> allows an optional argument, but no mandatory argument, you may not immediately follow it with text. If it is boxed, then first close the box; otherwise, end the paragraph.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:10pt"><b><code>\straightquote</code>, <code>\straightdblquote</code></b></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10pt"><code>\straightquote</code>, <code>\straightdblquote</code></p>
<p>These insert the single quote (apostrophe), and double quote, as ASCII straight characters. Prevents TeX (or your software) from automatically substituting the curly characters.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 6.3.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 6.3 -->
+<h3 id="h6.4">6.4 Superscripts, Subscripts</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d6,4">
+<p class="noindent">In <i>novel</i>, superscripts and subscripts are called "markers." Most book-quality Open Type fonts have markers in style sets (<i>sups</i>, <i>sinf</i>, <i>subs</i>).</p>
+<p>In professional fonts, marker glyph weights are adjusted for consistent appearance compared to ordinary glyphs. However, many free fonts do not adjust marker glyph weights, so the markers may appear too small, or too light. You may choose whether to use a font's own markers, or allow <i>novel</i> to generate markers, depending on whichever you think looks better.</p>
+<p>• <i>real</i> markers attempt to use the Open Type feature <i>sups</i> for superscripts, and the feature <i>sinf</i> (preferred) or <i>subs</i> (alternate) for subscripts. If the requested feature is not available for the font, then it will be automatically faked, by scaling/raising/lowering ordinary characters from the basefont (lining numerals will be used).</p>
+<p>• <i>fake</i> markers ignore whether the Open Type features are available, and simply fakes them.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page07 -->
+<h4 id="h6.4.1">6.4.1 <code>\SetMarkerStyle[<em>real,fake</em>]{<em>asterisk, dagger, number</em>}</code></h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.4.1">
+<p>This command may only be used in the Preamble. It globally sets the kind of marker to be used. Default is <i>real</i> and <i>asterisk</i>.</p>
+<p>The optional argument applies real or fake markers, as described above.</p>
+<p>The required argument applies only to markers created by the <code>\footnote</code> command. It does not apply to endnotes, or to manually placed superscripts and subscripts.</p>
+<p>• <i>asterisk</i> (default) uses symbolic footnote markers. The symbols rotate in order * † ‡ § ** †† ‡‡ §§ until reset.</p>
+<p>• <i>dagger</i> uses symbolic footnote markers, but without asterisks. The symbols rotate in order † ‡ § †† ‡‡ §§ until reset.</p>
+<p>• <i>number</i> uses numerical footnote markers. Due to possible conflict, the log file will have a "Big Bad Warning" if you use a numerical footnote marker in a document that also has endnotes, since endnotes always have numerical markers.</p>
+</div><!-- end 6.4.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h6.4.2">6.4.2 <code>\realmarker</code>, <code>\fakemarker</code></h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.4.2">
+<p class="noindent">Within the body of the document, you may use <code>\realmarker</code> and <code>\fakemarker</code> to change your preference. The choice remains in effect until you change it again.</p>
+<p>The option real/fake applies wherever superscripts or subscripts are used, not just for footnotes or endnotes.</p>
+</div><!-- end 6.4.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 6.4 -->
+
+<h3 id="h6.5">6.5. Footnotes and Endnotes</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d6.5">
+<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> class has <em>limited</em> support for footnotes, because they are rarely used in fiction. Nevertheless, I have seen them. The notes may be factual or imaginary.</p>
+<p>If there are more than a handful of notes, then use endnotes to avoid a constant disruption of the text flow. You may use both footnotes and endnotes.</p>
+<p>Footnotes and endnotes insert superscripts (markers) at the appropriate point in the main text. The actual footnote or endnote begins with the marker in ordinary text, not as a superscript.</p>
+
+<h4 id="h6.5.1">6.5.1 Footnotes</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.5.1">
+<p>Footnotes appear at the bottom of the page where they are placed. There is no option to accumulate them to another location. Very long footnotes might straddle pages, but that situation is uncommon in fiction (and not within your control).</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\footnote[<em>option</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code></p>
+<p>The <code>\footnote</code> command places a superscript "marker" at the place where the command is written. The included text is written at the bottom of the page, beneath a short line that separates it from the main text. The footnote text is at smaller size and line skip, and has the same marker placed before it (but not as superscript). All of this is automatic.</p>
+<p>You may, if necessary, apply some style to the footnote text. For example, if you are referring to another work, its title might be in italics.</p>
+<p>Normally, no option is used. If you use option <i>0</i> (zero) then no marker will appear in the main text, and the footnote text will also appear without a marker. The count of markers is not incremented. This applies whether the markers are numbers or symbols.</p>
+<p>• Trick: If you are using footnote numbers, but wish to place a special footnote using a symbol, you can do it manually. For example:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>He blinked.*\footnote[0]{* No, he didn't.}</code></p>
+<p>• Avoid use of underlining, as it is considered bad style, due to visual distraction. If necessary, use italics.</p>
+</div><!-- end 6.5.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h6.5.2">6.5.2 Endnotes</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d6.5.2">
+<p class="noindent">Endnotes are sometimes used in fiction. In general, the endnotes are also fictional.</p>
+<p>You may use both footnotes and endnotes, if you wish. However, if endnotes are used, then footnotes must be marked by symbols, rather than by numbers, to avoid confusion. The counts for endnotes and footnotes are independent.</p>
+
+<h5 id="h6.5.2.1">6.5.2.1 <code>\endnote</code>, <code>\ResetEndnote</code>, <code>\memo{}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d6.5.2.1">
+<p class="noindent">The <code>\endnote</code> command inserts a numerical superscript in the text. A running count of the numbers is automatically updated. This command does nothing else.</p>
+<p>The endnote numbers normally run continuously through the text, without reset. If you wish to reset the count (perhaps at new chapters), you have to do it manually, using <code>\ResetEndnote</code> at the appropriate location.</p>
+<p>When you use <code>\endnote</code>, there is no provision for the actual note, at that place in the text. The <i>novel</i> class does not know, and does not care, whether or not you actually write the endnote later.</p>
+<p>If you wish to write an in-place reminder to yourself, about why you put an endnote marker there, use <code>\memo{<i>text</i>}</code>. The argument of <code>\memo</code> will not be printed, and will not be remembered for later use. Note that <code>\memo</code> is not like the percent <code>%</code> comment, because anything following <code>\memo</code> will be honored. Also, don't use space both before and after <code>\memo{}</code>, because both spaces will appear when typeset:</p>
+<p class="code"><i>Wrong:</i> <code>... in the sacred book.\endnote \memo{Dorf, VI} Afterward, Shange left for ...</code><br/>
+<i>Correct:</i> <code>... in the sacred book.\endnote\memo{Dorf, VI} Afterward, Shange left for ...</code></p>
+</div><!-- end 6.5.2.1 -->
+
+<h5 id="h6.5.2.2">6.5.2.2 <code>\endnotetext{<em>number</em>}{<em>text</em>}</code></h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d6.5.2.2">
+<p class="noindent">The <code>\endnotetext</code> command is a simple way of styling endnotes. You do not have to use it, if you have your own method. These may be placed per-chapter, or at the final end. The <i>novel</i> class does not keep track of them.</p>
+<p>The first argument is usually the endnote number. A period and following space will automatically be added, so that the text of the note is block-indented. You may use <code>\emph{<em>number</em>}</code> if you prefer the number to be in italics.</p>
+<p>The text must be one paragraph. Be sure to end with <code>\par</code> or equivalent.</p>
+<p>If the note needs more than one paragraph, then continue like this, with an empty note number:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\endnotetext{}{\indent <em>text</em>}</code></p>
+<p>• In <i>novel</i>, you must create and style the page(s) with endnotes yourself! There is no provision for bibliography, and no provision for any other kind of automated styling. This is because the endnotes, being fictional, are more like the main text than any academic style. Think of the endnotes as just another chapter, but starting with something that identifies them as being endnotes. Pagination continues as main matter, with Arabic page numbers. This is recommended by <i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i>, for both fiction and nonfiction.</p>
+<p>• There is no track of which endnote number was placed where. You will have to keep track of them yourself. In the following example, the author knows that the endnote numbers are <i>9</i> and <i>10</i>, only after an initial typesetting run showed the numbers. Then, the endnote texts were added.</p>
+<p>Example of an endnote:</p>
+<p class="code">
+<code><small>
+\endnotetext{9}{Yang Sho-Nuff was the twelfth son of the elder god of the ancient Who-Zit Clan, with power over the forces of rust.\par}<br/>
+\endnotetext{}{\indent However, since this was not yet the Iron Age, the terrible might of Yang Sho-Nuff was largely unrecognized.\par}<br/>
+\endnotetext{10}{As Professor Withens notes in his treatise, \emph{When Sho-Nuff Was Not Enough}, the ceremony of daily human sacrifice had a devastating effect on the tribal population.\par}
+</small></code></p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/endnotetext.png" width="447" height="151" alt="using endnotetext"/></p>
+</div><!-- end 6.5.2.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 6.5.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 6.5 -->
+
+
+</div><!-- end 6 -->
+</div><!-- end page06 -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page08" class="page">
+<div id="page07" class="page">
-<h2 id="h8">8. Images</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="d8">
+<h2 id="h7">7. Interior B/W or Gray Images, and Color Cover Artwork</h2>
+<div class="d2" id="d7">
<p class="noindent">If you intend to place a lot of images in your document, or if you need to have text wrap around floating images, then the <i>novel</i> document class is not well-suited to your purpose. This is because the methods of formatting, and the emphasis on maintaining a constant baseline skip, sometimes interfere with the behavior you expect from other document classes.</p>
<p>Yet you can place the occasional image. Most fiction does use imagery on the title page, and sometimes at chapter starts. Some stories include a map, or an image of ancient writing. In a detective novel, we might get a glimpse at handwritten evidence. The <i>novel</i> class has its own commands for easily dealing with these situations.</p>
-<p>Like it or not, you are restricted to <em>png</em> and <em>jpg</em> raster images. No vector artwork. No included <em>eps</em> or <em>pdf</em>. Forget about <i>pgf</i> and <i>TikZ</i>. Although you can "cheat" the <i>novel</i> commands, and circumvent the restrictions, don't do it. The restrictions are intentional. The reasons are explained below.</p>
-<h3 id="h8.1">8.1. Use Raster Images</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d8.1">
-<p class="noindent">Place raster images, not vector images, in your document.</p>
-<p>You may think that the above sentence is a mistake. Haven't you been told that vector artwork is always preferable to rasterized artwork, because vector artwork is scalable? The part about being scalable is true. But if you do not need scalability, vector artwork is worse.</p>
+<h3 id="h7.1">7.1. Raster Images Only</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d7.1">
+<p class="noindent">You may place only raster images in your document. No vector artwork. No included <i>eps</i> or <i>pdf</i>. Forget about <i>pgf</i> and <i>TikZ</i>. Although you can "cheat" the <i>novel</i> commands, and circumvent these restrictions, <em>don't do it</em>. These restrictions are intentional.</p>
+<p>You may think that the above paragraph is a mistake. Haven't you been told that vector artwork is always preferable to rasterized artwork, because vector artwork is scalable? The part about being scalable is true. But if you do not need scalability, vector artwork is worse.</p>
<p>How so? A PDF file can incorporate vector artwork, and if properly done it will meet commercial printing standards. <em>Sadly, it is often not properly done.</em> When vector artwork has technical errors, as it often does, then the appearance will depend on which software is used to view the image. The fact that it is within a PDF does not always help.</p>
-<p>When you design a vector image, or perhaps acquire one, you approve its appearance based on what you see on your computer. The odds are good that someone else, on a different computer, will be using the same software and thus see the same result. However, that is not true of the software built into commercial printing machines. That software may interpret ambiguous vector instructions in a different way than you expected.</p>
+<p>Also, commercial standards don't like vector artwork where bleed is emulated using control points beyond the MediaBox. You don't know what that statement means, do you? That's another reason to avoid vector artwork.</p>
+<p>When you design a vector image, or perhaps acquire one, you approve its appearance based on what you see on your computer. The odds are good that a friend or editor, on a different computer, will be using the same software and thus see the same result. However, that is not true of the software built into commercial printing machines. That software may interpret erroneous or ambiguous vector instructions in a different way than you expected.</p>
<p>A good example is on pages 232-234 of the <i>Adobe PDF 1.7 Reference</i>. That's an enormous file, full of technical information. You don't need to read it. But Adobe provides an example of a vector drawing in the form of a five-pointed star, made with one continuous line that crosses itself. There are two possible rules for deciding whether the central pentagon should be filled or not. They produce different results. Adobe chooses a particular rule, and so should all compliant software. But is all software compliant? Without reading the Adobe spec, there is no particular reason to prefer one rule over the other. And, that's a simple example. Many vector drawings are very convoluted, in ways that make the artist's intent difficult to interpret.</p>
-<p>You normally do not need to scale images. Your finished work will be viewed at fixed size on the printed page, not at variable size in a PDF reader. So, scalability is not an advantage. Your image is placed on paper at its exact size and resolution. You are in complete control. If it is purely black/white line art, its detail will be about the same whether it was placed as vector or raster. If it is grayscale, it is subject to halftoning, which reduces the resolution in any case.</p>
-<p>Do not attempt to place an image by including a PDF within your TeX file. The reason is that the included PDF may carry its own File Data, which will differ from the File Data of the main PDF. There's nothing you can do about that, and commercial printers don't like it. So, don't do it. Indeed, <i>novel</i> may ban it!</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p>You normally do not need to scale images. Your finished work will be viewed at fixed size on the printed page, not at variable size in a PDF reader. So, <em>scalability is not an advantage</em>. Your image is placed on paper at its exact size and resolution. You are in complete control. If it is purely black/white line art, its detail will be about the same whether it was placed as vector or raster. If it is grayscale, it is subject to halftoning, which reduces the resolution in any case.</p>
+<p>• Do not attempt to place an image by including a PDF within your TeX file. The reason is that the included PDF may carry its own File Data, which will differ from the File Data of the main PDF. There's nothing you can do about that, and commercial printers don't like it. So, don't do it. Indeed, <i>novel</i> may ban it!</p>
-<h3 id="h8.2">8.2. Use Flattened png or jpg Image Format</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d8.2">
+<h4 id="h7.1.1">7.1.1. Use Flattened <i>png</i> or <i>jpg</i> Image Format</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.1.1">
<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> image-handling commands require the <i>png</i> or <i>jpg</i> formats, exclusively. If you already have a raster image in another format, such as <i>tif</i>, you must convert it. If you have a vector image, such as <i>eps</i> or <i>svg</i> format, you must rasterize it. This must all be done in an external graphics program, such as <i>GIMP</i> or <i>Inkscape</i>. It cannot be done from within TeX.</p>
-<p>Both <i>jpg</i> and <i>png</i> images can store their resolution internally. When you export images from a graphics program, be sure that the resolution is stored. This may or may not be an option that you need to check.</p>
-<p>With <i>png</i>, the image must be flattened (no transparency). Be sure to flatten the image before you export it to <i>png</i>. With <i>jpg</i>, the exported image is always flattened.</p>
-<p>When using grayscale, be sure to convert the image to true grayscale, which has only one color channel. In GIMP, this is achieved with the <i>Image>Mode</i> menu. Note that an RGB or CMYK image "that only uses grays" is <em>not</em> the same thing, since these have three or four color channels!</p>
+<p>Both <i>jpg</i> and <i>png</i> images can store their resolution internally. When you export images from a graphics program, be sure that the resolution is stored. This may or may not be an option that you need to check, in an export dialog box.</p>
+<p>Be sure to flatten the image before you export it to <i>png</i>. With <i>jpg</i>, the exported image is always flattened.</p>
+<p>When using grayscale, be sure to convert the image to <i>only grayscale</i>, which has only one color channel. In GIMP, this is achieved with the <i>Image>Mode</i> menu. Note that an RGB or CMYK image "that only uses grays" is <em>not</em> the same thing, since these have three or four color channels!</p>
<p>When using pure black/white (<i>png</i> only), you can get there with GIMP's <i>Image>Mode>Indexed</i> menu.</p>
<p>Note that within the finished PDF file, images are stored in an internal format which differs from your input. If your image is in the wrong format, or contains transparency, it will not be detected by TeX.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.1.1 -->
-<h4 id="h8.2.1">8.2.1. Saving the Resolution</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.2.1">
+<h4 id="h7.1.2">7.1.2. Saving the Resolution</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.1.2">
<p class="noindent">Image resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). In a graphics program, it may be called pixels per inch (ppi). And, if the software was written in Europe or Asia, it may be measured in pixels per centimetre!</p>
<p>When you prepare an image in a graphics program, you must first ensure that it is at the correct resolution. Most U.S. print services require <i>300dpi</i> for grayscale images (or color covers), <i>600dpi</i> for black/white line art. Then, it is a simple matter of multiplying the image dimensions (in inches) by the resolution, to get the image dimensions in pixels.</p>
<p>Example: A grayscale image that will print at 1.25" wide by 1.5" high, must be 375 pixels wide by 450 pixels high, at 300dpi. If the original image is at different dimensions, it must be cropped and scaled to the correct size. However, it is not enough to finish the image at 375x450 pixels. You must specifically set the resolution to 300dpi. If you fail to set the resolution correctly, then the image will not appear at its correct size in your PDF.</p>
@@ -1831,35 +1888,34 @@
<p>When you export your image, you may be asked whether or not to save the resolution. Be sure to save it.</p>
<p>Example dialog boxes for grayscale png exported from GIMP:</p>
<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/imgdialogs.png" width="600" height="192" alt="png image with resolution"/></p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 7.1.2 -->
-<h4 id="h8.2.2">8.2.2. Removing Private Metadata</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.2.2">
-<p class="noindent">Your image may contain "private metadata" that records how the image was created, especially if it was converted from a digital photograph. It may also contain color profile data that is inappropriate for a grayscale or black/white image. Commercial printing standards prefer that such private metadata be removed from images; the PDF File Data should speak for everything, not the individual images.</p>
-<p>The simplest way to remove private metadata is via a command-line program: Use either <i>ImageMagick</i>, or <i>GraphicsMagick</i>. These programs work on Windows, Linux, and (so I am told) OS/X. Specific code is shown in the workflow examples, below. If you ever re-work an image, you must once again remove its private data.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h4 id="h7.1.3">7.1.3. Removing Private Metadata</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.1.3">
+<p class="noindent">Your image may contain "private metadata" that records how the image was created, especially if it was converted from a digital photograph. For example, EXIF and IPTC may contain a lot of private metadata. The image may also contain color profile data that is inappropriate for a grayscale or black/white image.</p>
+<p>Many commercial printing standards require that such private metadata be removed from images. The PDF File Data should speak for everything, not the individual images.</p>
+<p>The simplest way to remove private metadata is via a command-line program: Use either <i>ImageMagick</i>, or <i>GraphicsMagick</i>. These programs work on Windows, Linux, and (so I am told) OS/X. Specific code is shown in the workflow examples, below. If you ever re-work an image, you must once again remove its private metadata.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.1.3 -->
+</div><!-- end 7.1 -->
-<h3 id="h8.3">8.3. Line Art vs. Grayscale</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d8.3">
+<h3 id="h7.2">7.2. Workflows for Interior Line Art and Grayscale</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d7.2">
<p class="noindent">Two kinds of images may appear in a black-and-white book: <i>line art</i>, and <i>grayscale</i>.</p>
-<p>Line art contains only black and white. Moreover, there cannot be any places where the black or white areas are very tiny. Most print services request that your line art be rasterized at 600dpi (dots per inch), but that does not mean you can emulate gray with an alternating pattern of black and white, repeated 300 times per inch. All it means is that the sharp transition from black areas to white areas can be resolved to about 1/600" during printing (only "about" since the ink spreads a little).</p>
-<p>So, if you think you can use Floyd-Steinberg dithering to convert a grayscale image to "line art," that won't work: The printer will note that it cannot resolve such fine detail, and treat it as a grayscale. The result will be worse than if you had left it as grayscale instead of dithering to black and white.</p>
-<p>Think in terms of how an <i>offset press</i> works. Look it up on the Internet. You can have a sharp boundary between black and white, but you cannot closely mingle tiny black and white areas. Actually, at low production volume, your book may be printed with an inkjet technology that can resolve very fine details. But you cannot count on that; and, if your book does sell well, you may be shocked if the print technology changes.</p>
-<p>A PDF file can place ordinary (vector) text atop an image. However, if the underlying image is halftoned, there is the risk that the overlying text will also be halftoned, even if it sits atop white areas of the image. Ask your print service for advice. It may be better to make the text part of the image, and anticipate halftoning by using appropriately styled text.</p>
+<p>Line art contains only black and white. Moreover, there cannot be any places where the black or white areas are very tiny, so you cannot emulate gray by dithering black/white.</p>
+<p>Most print services request that line art be rasterized at 600dpi (dots per inch), and that grayscale images be rasterized at 300dpi. Grayscale images may be printed using halftone technology. Text that sits atop a halftoned image may itself be halftoned.</p>
-<h4 id="h8.3.1">8.3.1. Workflow: Line Art in GIMP</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.3.1">
+<h4 id="h7.2.1">7.2.1. Workflow: Line Art in GIMP</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.2.1">
<p class="noindent">To create a suitable <b>line art</b> image in GIMP, with post-processing in ImageMagick or GraphicsMagick, follow these instructions:</p>
-<p>(1) Open the image file in GIMP. If it is a vector format (such as svg or pdf), ensure that it is resolved to 600 pixels/in with anti-aliasing, and that its size is the same as your intended dimensions (measured in inches or mm). You can also use a larger size, if you intend to crop some of the periphery; or you can use a smaller size, if you intend to make it larger by adding white space.</p>
-<p>(2) If you need to crop to a smaller size, or add to a larger size, do it now. Image > Canvas Size, with Resize Layers All.</p>
+<p>(1) Open the image file in GIMP. If it is a vector format (such as svg or pdf), ensure that it is resolved to 600 pixels/in with anti-aliasing, and that its size is the same as your intended dimensions (measured in inches or mm). You can also use a larger size, if you intend to crop some of the periphery; or you can use a smaller size, if you intend to make it larger by adding white space.</p>
+<p>(2) If you need to crop to a smaller size, or add to a larger size, do it now. <i>Image>Canvas Size</i>, with <i>Resize Layers:All</i>.</p>
<p>(3) If you need to edit the image, by adding or removing anything, do it now.</p>
-<p>(4) Image>Flatten Image.</p>
-<p>(5) Image>Mode>Grayscale.</p>
-<p>(6) View>Zoom to an appropriate amount that shows the image at approximately its print size. That depends on your monitor's resolution. On my own computer, 25% is about right. Does not need to be exact.</p>
-<p>(7) Colors>Threshold. If necessary, adjust the slider until the image looks best. It might be that the default 50% works for you. If you move it to the left, then black areas will become a little narrower. If to the right, black areas will become a little thicker.</p>
-<p>(8) Image>Mode>Indexed>(black and white 1-bit palette). Remove unused colors from colormap. No dithering.</p>
-<p>(9) File>Export. Use png (Portable Network Graphics) extension. When the dialog box appears, ensure that "save resolution" is checked. Use the highest level of compression offered. The exported image may look poor in some image viewers, because those viewers do not read the full resolution. Not a problem. The image will look good when seen in better viewers.</p>
+<p>(4) <i>Image>Flatten Image</i>.</p>
+<p>(5) <i>Image>Mode>Grayscale</i>.</p>
+<p>(6) <i>View>Zoom</i> to an appropriate amount that shows the image at approximately its print size. That depends on your monitor's resolution. On my own computer, 25% is about right. Does not need to be exact.</p>
+<p>(7) <i>Colors>Threshold</i>. If necessary, adjust the slider until the image looks best. It might be that the default 50% works for you. If you move it to the left, then black areas will become a little narrower. If to the right, black areas will become a little thicker.</p>
+<p>(8) <i>Image>Mode>Indexed>(black and white, 1-bit palette)</i>. Remove unused colors from colormap. No dithering.</p>
+<p>(9) <i>File>Export</i>. Use png (Portable Network Graphics) extension. When the dialog box appears, ensure that "save resolution" is checked. Use the highest level of compression offered. The exported image may look poor in some image viewers, because those viewers do not read the full resolution. Not a problem. The image will look good when seen in better viewers.</p>
<p>(10) Command-Line Terminal, using GraphicsMagick or ImageMagick:</p>
<p class="code">GraphicsMagick, Windows or Linux: <code>gm mogrify -strip nameofimage.png</code></p>
<p class="code">ImageMagick, Windows: <code>magick mogrify -strip nameofimage.png</code></p>
@@ -1868,21 +1924,21 @@
<p class="code">GraphicsMagick, Windows or Linux: <code>gm identify -verbose nameofimage.png</code></p>
<p class="code">ImageMagick, Windows: <code>magick identify -verbose nameofimage.png</code></p>
<p class="code">ImageMagick, Linux: <code>identify -verbose nameofimage.png</code></p>
-<p>After a few moments, the Terminal will show some information. It should say that the depth is 1-bits per pixel, that the only color is gray (1 bits), that the resolution is 236.22 pixels per centimeter (which is 600dpi). The page geometry, divided by 600, will give you the image size in inches (thus, a page geometry of 900+1200+0+0 represents an image 1.5" wide x 2" high).</p>
-</div>
+<p>After a few moments, the Terminal will show some information. It should say that the depth is 1-bits per pixel, that the only color is gray (1 bits), that the resolution is 236.22 pixels per centimeter (which is 600dpi). The page geometry, divided by 600, will give you the image size in inches (thus, a page geometry of 900+1200+0+0 represents an image 1.5" wide x 2" high).</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.2.1 -->
-<h4 id="h8.3.2">8.3.2. Workflow: Grayscale in GIMP</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.3.2">
+<h4 id="h7.2.2">7.2.2. Workflow: Grayscale in GIMP</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.2.2">
<p class="noindent">To produce a suitable <b>grayscale</b> image in GIMP, with post-processing in ImageMagick or GraphicsMagick, follow these instructions:</p>
<p>(1) Open the image file in GIMP. If it is a vector format (such as svg or pdf), ensure that it is resolved to 300 pixels/in with anti-aliasing, and that its size is the same as your intended dimensions (measured in inches or mm). You can also use a larger size, if you intend to crop some of the periphery; or you can use a smaller size, if you intend to make it larger by adding white space.</p>
-<p>(2) If you need to crop to a smaller size, or add to a larger size, do it now. Image > Canvas Size, with Resize Layers All.</p>
+<p>(2) If you need to crop to a smaller size, or add to a larger size, do it now. <i>Image>Canvas Size</i>, with <i>Resize Layers:All</i>.</p>
<p>(3) If you need to edit the image, by adding or removing anything, do it now.</p>
-<p>(4) Image>Flatten Image.</p>
-<p>(5) Image>Mode>Grayscale.</p>
-<p>(6) View>Zoom to an appropriate amount that shows the image at approximately its print size. That depends on your monitor's resolution. On my own computer, 25% is about right. Does not need to be exact.</p>
-<p>(7) Very dark grays are hard to produce accurately, and so are very light grays. If your image relies on areas that are nearly black and nearly white, then consider adjusting lightness and contrast so that they are not so close to black and white. GIMP's Colors>Levels might be more useful than Colors>Brightness/Contrast.</p>
-<p>(8) Ensure that white areas are truly white, not light gray. Use GIMP's <i>Select By Color</i> Tool, with a very low threshold, to choose areas that should be exactly white, then clear them.</p>
-<p>(9) File>Export. Use png (Portable Network Graphics) extension. When the dialog box appears, ensure that "save resolution" is checked. Use the highest level of compression offered. The exported image may look poor in some image viewers, because those viewers do not read the full resolution. Not a problem. The image will look good when seen in better viewers.</p>
+<p>(4) <i>Image>Flatten Image</i>.</p>
+<p>(5) <i>Image>Mode>Grayscale</i>.</p>
+<p>(6) <i>View>Zoom</i> to an appropriate amount that shows the image at approximately its print size. That depends on your monitor's resolution. On my own computer, 50% is about right. Does not need to be exact.</p>
+<p>(7) Very dark grays are hard to produce accurately, and so are very light grays. If your image relies on areas that are nearly black and nearly white, then consider adjusting lightness and contrast so that they are not so close to black and white. GIMP's <i>Colors>Levels</i> might be more useful than <i>Colors>Brightness/Contrast</i>.</p>
+<p>(8) Ensure that white areas are truly white, not light gray. Use GIMP's <i>Select By Color</i> Tool, with a very low threshold, to choose areas that should be exactly white, then clear them.</p>
+<p>(9) <i>File>Export</i>. Use png (Portable Network Graphics) extension. When the dialog box appears, ensure that "save resolution" is checked. Use the highest level of compression offered. The exported image may look poor in some image viewers, because those viewers do not read the full resolution. Not a problem. The image will look good when seen in better viewers.</p>
<p>(10) Command-Line Terminal, using GraphicsMagick or ImageMagick:</p>
<p class="code">GraphicsMagick, Windows or Linux: <code>gm mogrify -strip nameofimage.png</code></p>
<p class="code">ImageMagick, Windows: <code>magick mogrify -strip nameofimage.png</code></p>
@@ -1898,32 +1954,32 @@
<p class="code">For jpg images: <i>JPEG-Colorspace: 1</i> and <i>JPEG-Colorspace-Name: GRAYSCALE</i></p>
<p>The above codes are the only ones that matter. Even if other information claims that the image is grayscale, or lists the colors and they are all shades of gray, <em>that is not good enough</em>. When automated software reviews your PDF for compliance, it will look at the png <i>IHDR.color_type</i>, which must be 0, or the <i>JPEG-Colorspace</i>, which must be 1. Anything else fails. If the information is different, it means that you forget to change the mode from RGB to grayscale before you exported the image.</p>
<p>You may ask: If the image was not really grayscale, can it be converted to grayscale using a simple command line, with ImageMagick or GraphicsMagick? The answer is yes, but don't do it that way. The reason is that there are many ways to map colors (even "gray colors") to true grayscale, and an automated conversion may produce unexpectedly light or dark results. It is better to do the conversion in a graphics program, where you can see what you are doing.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 7.3.2 -->
-<h4 id="h8.3.3">8.3.3. Scaling Images after <code>\Rework</code>.</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.3.3">
-<p class="noindent">When you use one or both of the <code>\Rework</code> commands (<a href="#hF">Appendix F</a>), the font size and/or the baselineskip will change. However, it does not scale images. In many cases, there is no problem. But in some cases, an un-scaled image will disrupt the previous flow of text or pagination. See <a href="#hF.5">Appendix F.5</a> for how to re-work images.</p>
-</div>
-<!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h4 id="h7.2.3">7.2.3. Scaling Images after <code>\Rework</code>.</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.2.3">
+<p class="noindent">When you use one or both of the <code>\Rework</code> commands (<a href="#hA">Appendix A</a>), the font size and/or the baselineskip will change. However, it does not scale images. In many cases, there is no problem. But in some cases, an un-scaled image will disrupt the previous flow of text or pagination. The same Appendix shows you how to scale images when you use <code>\Rework</code>.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.2.3 -->
+</div><!-- end 7.2 -->
-<h3 id="h8.4">8.4. Placing Images In Your Document</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d8.4">
+<h3 id="h7.3">7.3. Placing Images In Your Document</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d7.3">
<p class="noindent">An image may be placed as an inline element, using the <code>\InlineImage</code> or <code>\InlineImage*</code> command. This allows the image to mingle with text, and even have text as an overlay.</p>
<p><code>\BlockImage</code> places the image so that <em>subsequent</em> text will clear the bottom of the image, and be on the baseline grid. You may also <em>accompany</em> the image with text in its own block space, if you wish.</p>
-<p>If your book has a lot of images, then you should consider using a page layout program (such as Scribus) instead of TeX. That's because the best strategies for an image-intensive picture book are very different from the strategies adoped by <i>novel</i>.</p>
-<p>Beware of overlap. If images overlap each other, or overlap with text, no error will result. If text lies atop an image, the result may be desirable. All other situations are undesirable. Since TeX cannot detect such errors, you need to carefully review the result.</p>
-<p>Do not use the ordinary TeX commands, or environments, for floats or figures.</p>
+<p>If your book has a lot of images mingled with text, then you should consider using a page layout program (such as Scribus) instead of TeX. That's because the best strategies for an image-intensive picture book are very different from the strategies adoped by <i>novel</i>.</p>
+<p>• Beware of image overlap. Images are not allowed to overlap each other, in the kind of commercial printing that is likely to be used for your book. However, since overlap is generally legal in PDF, TeX will not issue an error.</p>
+<p>• Do not use the ordinary TeX commands, or environments, for floats or figures.</p>
-<h4 id="h8.4.1">8.4.1. <code>\charscale[<em>scale,hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code> and starred version</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.4.1">
+<h4 id="h7.3.1">7.3.1. <code>\charscale[<em>scale,hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code> and starred version</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.3.1">
<p class="noindent">The <code>\charscale</code> command pertains to text, not images. It is mentioned here because it can place text almost anywhere on a page, even overlapping other text or previously-placed images. Thus, it provides an image-like effect.</p>
-<p>The command is documented <a href="#h7.1.2">earlier</a> on this page.</p>
-</div>
+<p>The command is documented in <a href="#h6.1.2">section 6.1.2</a>.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.4.1 -->
-<h4 id="h8.4.2">8.4.2 <code>\InlineImage[<em>hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>imageFile.png or .jpg</em>}</code> and starred version</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.4.2">
+<h4 id="h7.3.2">7.3.2 <code>\InlineImage[<em>hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>imageFile.png or .jpg</em>}</code> and starred version</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.3.2">
<p class="noindent">This command places the image as an inline element, at 100% scale. The use of <i>png</i> or <i>jpg</i> images, with file extension, is required.<p>
-<p>You may offset the image horizontally or vertically. Positive direction is to the right and up. If you use one offset, then you must use both (if necessary, <i>0em</i>). Any units of length may be used, but the preferred units are <i>em</i> or <code>\textwidth</code> for horizontal, and <i>em</i> or <code>\nbs</code> for vertical, because these are most compatible with the <code><a href="#hF">\Rework</a></code> commands.</p>
+<p>You may offset the image horizontally or vertically. Positive direction is to the right and up. If you use one offset, then you must use both (if necessary, <i>0em</i>). Any units of length may be used, but the preferred units are <i>em</i> or <code>\textwidth</code> for horizontal, and <i>em</i> or <code>\nbs</code> for vertical, because these are most compatible with the <code><a href="#hA">\Rework</a></code> commands.</p>
<p>By default, the <em>top</em> of the image is at the text baseline. If you prefer that the <em>bottom</em> of the image be at the text baseline, use voffset <i>b</i>. Example:</p>
<p class="code"><code>\InlineImage[0em,b]{imageFile.png}</code></p>
<p>Thanks to the included <i>calc</i> package, offsets may use <code>\widthof{<em>text</em>}</code> and/or <code>\heightof{<em>text</em>}</code> as lengths. The most useful of these is when you wish to align the top of an image at the X-height of surrounding text:</p>
@@ -1943,10 +1999,10 @@
<p>Note that an image may be placed in a way that prints some of the image in the margin. That's allowable if your margin is wider than the minimum required for printing clearance. But even if it is not allowable, there will be no complaint or warning from TeX. Use the <a href="#h2.3">shademargins</a> class option to ascertain position.</p>
<p>Do not place an image so that it approaches or goes beyond the page edge. That requires a "bleed box" which is not part of <i>novel</i> capabilities. If your book needs that kind of image handling, use a page layout program instead.</p>
<p>Do not place images so that they overlap. Although that is allowed in the PDF, it is likely to be flagged as an error by your print service.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 7.3.2 -->
-<h4 id="h8.4.3">8.4.3. Text Over <code>\InlineImage</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.4.3">
+<h4 id="h7.3.3">7.3.3. Text Over <code>\InlineImage</code></h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.3.3">
<p class="noindent">As noted above, an <code>\InlineImage</code> (or its starred version) can be used as the background to any subsequent text. Just as with any other text, whatever sits atop an image must be pure black. If you need text in gray, then you must integrate the rasterized text with the image in an external graphics program, instead of typing the text in your document.</p>
<p>When text overlies an image, it retains its identity as vector paths, as far as the PDF is concerned. In some printing processes, particularly those for very low volume production, the result will be as sharp and dark as ordinary text. However, if your book sells well (or is being prepared to sell well), the image will be converted to halftone, and the text that lies above it may also be converted to halftone. This will reduce the sharpness of the text. It is not necessarily a problem, unless your text is very small or has fine details.</p>
<p>If the text-over-image is part of a title, then the text is naturally large and dark, and will easily withstand halftoning.</p>
@@ -1958,17 +2014,17 @@
He would have taken the car, had it not been stolen. But that was why he was here, at the arraignment of the person charged with the theft. It was most unfortunate that the accused was his own elderly father; but then, theft ran in the family line.\par
</code></p>
<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/inlineimagest.png" width="651" height="249" alt="example of InlineImage*"/></p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 7.3.3 -->
-<h4 id="h8.4.4">8.4.4. <code>\BlockImage[<em>alignment,hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>imageFile.png or .jpg</em>}[<em>text</em>]</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.4.4">
+<h4 id="h7.3.4">7.3.4. <code>\BlockImage[<em>alignment,hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>imageFile.png or .jpg</em>}[<em>text</em>]</code></h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.3.4">
<p class="noindent">Note that <code>\BlockImage</code> has an optional argument that <i>precedes</i> the mandatory image file name. It has another optional argument that <i>follows</i> the file name. If this second option is used, there must be no space between <code>}[</code>.</p>
<p>The first optional argument has up to three comma-separated values. The first is alignment: <i>l</i>, <i>c</i>, or <i>r</i> for left, center, or right. The second and third values are hoffset and voffset. Unlike the <code>\InlineImage</code> command, do not use <i>b</i> to indicate vertical position relative to the image bottom; it is always at the top with this command. The default alignment is centered, without offsets.</p>
<p>An automatic calculation clears the height of the image. Subsequent text will be on grid. This is the right thing to do when the image and included text fit on a single page. But if they cannot both fit on a single page, an unusual layout will result.</p>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 7.3.4 -->
-<h4 id="h8.4.5">8.4.5. <code>\BlockImage</code> with Accompanying Text</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d8.4.5">
+<h4 id="h7.3.5">7.3.5. <code>\BlockImage</code> with Accompanying Text</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.3.5">
<p class="noindent">The second optional argument of <code>\BlockImage</code>, following the image file name, may contain text that will accompany the image in the same block of space. The text is left-aligned like ordinary text, no matter which alignment you use for the image. The text may be in more than one paragraph, and may use <code>{\centering ...\par}</code> or <code>\begin{adjustwidth} ... \end{adjustwidth}</code> for positioning relative to the image. The text may overlie the image, using <code>\charscale</code>. You may need to use <code>\forceindent</code> or <code>\backindent</code> to control how the text appears. Note that you cannot automatically "flow" text around an image in <i>novel</i> class.</p>
<p>Example:</p>
<p class="code">
@@ -1983,169 +2039,298 @@
<p>Thus, this technique requires careful inspection, particularly if there is the danger that the image or accompanying text may overflow the bottom of the page.</p>
<p>Note that I used the start of the following text as a reference point for placing CENSORED over the gnome. That is not the only way it could have been done, but it was easy to discern the necessary offset.</p>
<p>• In general, avoid using accompanying text with an image, with the possible exception of titles and other special layouts. There is little need for it in the flowing text of a novel. If you find that you need to use it frequently, then perhaps your book would benefit from a page layout program such as <i>Scribus</i>, instead of TeX.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.3.5 -->
+</div><!-- end 7.3 -->
+
+<h3 id="h7.4">7.4. Color Cover Artwork</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d7.4">
+<p class="noindent">This portion serves a limited purpose. It is for the benefit of those who need to submit color print cover artwork in the form of a PDF/X-1a:2001 file, with the artwork as CMYK and 240% ink limit. This is the format required by some American print-on-demand services. It is also generally acceptable to others, whose requirements are less restrictive.</p>
+<p>Example cover artwork can be found at the <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://github.com/RobtAll/novel/">GitHub project page</a>, in the "other" folder.</p>
+<p><b>Before you begin:</b> Do you really need to do this? Many print-on-demand services are perfectly happy to accept something such as an ordinary RGB jpeg image, as long as it has the correct size (with bleed area). They can easily process it for print production in a few moments, using professional software. If they do it, then whether or not you are surprised by the resulting colors, will depend on whether or not your original image is within the printer gamut. In other cases, the print service prefers (or insists) that you do the image print production processing yourself. Then, you get to see an emulation of the print colors <em>before</em> you submit the file, and can change your artwork if the resulting colors are disappointing.</p>
+<p>The <em>novel</em> document class does not provide any support for creating the original artwork, either image or text. In fact, TeX is not the best way to do that. Use a graphics program (such as the free GIMP) to do your artwork, including text. In the end, your text will be rasterized, just like any background image. For this reason, avoid using small text, or consider using a sans-serif typeface on the cover (even though there is no sans-serif in the book itself).</p>
+<p>DO NOT PLACE A BARCODE. If your print service requests a white rectangle where the barcode will go, then include it in your image. Almost every print service is willing to create the barcode from your ISBN, and place the barcode image into your PDF during post-processing. Most of them even demand that they do it themselves. Do-it-yourself barcodes are incompatible with the following instructions.</p>
+<p><b>DISCLAIMER:</b> This documentation, and its accompanying software, is offered AS-IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USE ONLY AT YOUR OWN RISK. The author is an amateur who does not profess expertise in these matters. The best I can say is, "It works for me."</p>
+
+<h4 id="h7.4.1">7.4.1. Begin With PNG</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.4.1">
+<p class="noindent">Create your artwork, including all text (but not barcode or barcode text) using whatever means you have. How you do it is not relevant. To follow these instructions, you must provide the artwork as a flattened (no transparency) PNG format image, at correct size (including bleed area) and resolution (dpi).</p>
+<p style="margin-top:8px"><b>Example:</b> Suppose your book is 5.5" x 8.5" softcover, a typical size for American fiction. Based on its page count and paper, you are told that the spine width must be 0.62". The required bleed width, on all four sides, must be 0.125".</p>
+<p>Then, the image is 0.125 + 5.5 + 0.62 + 5.5 + 0.125 = 11.87in wide.</p>
+<p>The image is 0.125 + 8.5 + 0.125 = 8.75in high.</p>
+<p>At 300dpi resolution (a typical value) the image must be 11.87 x 300 = 3561 pixels wide, and 8.75 x 300 = 2625 pixels high. In case of fractional pixels, round upward. The exact pixel count is important.</p>
+<p style="margin-top:8px"><img src="html-resources/example-adobergb.png" class="floatright" width="445" height="328" alt="example rgb image"/> It is best to use the AdobeRGB1998 color workspace, or equivalent. But you can also use sRGB, or equivalent, and in many cases you will not notice much difference. It is helpful to attach (embed) the workspace color profile in your PNG image, especially if it is something other than AdobeRGB1998 or sRGB. Note that the workspace is NOT the color profile of your monitor (if you have it). If you do not attach (embed) the workspace color profile, then remember whether you were using AdobeRGB1998 or sRGB. If you make a mistake here, it is not fatal. It merely means that some colors (particularly bright greens and blue-greens) will print somewhat brighter or duller than you were expecting.</p>
+<p>When done, export it as a flattened PNG.</p>
+<p>If you are provided with an image other than PNG, you have to convert it to PNG. No alternative. It is easy enough to use GIMP to convert most image formats. If you have a PDF (which is not already in the required format), GIMP can probably open it as an image. Be sure you import it with the correct resolution. Again, the pixel width and height are important.</p>
+<p><b>Cover Text:</b> These instructions assume that your cover text is rasterized, and is part of the image rather than vector text. In many cases your graphics program has enough text capability to do what you need.</p>
+<p>If you wish to use TeX to typeset the cover text, do it this way: Use TeX to create one or more PDFs of the cover text, without images. You can create several blocks of text at different pages sizes, if you wish. Open your background artwork in GIMP. Add a new transparent layer above it. Open a text PDF in GIMP. Choose resolution 300dpi, full antialiasing, grayscale or color. The opened text is now a raster image. Copy it, and paste it atop the transparent layer. Anchor it. Use Color: Color to Alpha: white to alpha filter. That removes the white area from the PDF image. Finally, move the text to where it should go. You can rotate the text 90 degrees, but do not resize it! If you would rather the text be at a different size, then either change it in TeX, or use a different resolution when you open the PDF in GIMP. Note that even when you open the PDF at a different resolution, it will still be at 300dpi when you place it over the 300dpi background image; but its size will change.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.4.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h7.4.2">7.4.2. Get Some Software</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.4.2">
+<p class="noindent">Get the 238% total ink limit color profile from <a href="http://www.newselfpublishing.com/TotalInkLimit.html" rel="external" target="new">Aaron Shepard</a>. Direct link to <a href="http://www.newselfpublishing.com/TotalInkLimit.zip" rel="external" target="new">zipped profile</a>. This does the magic of ensuring that you comply with the 240% ink limit (the profile provides a little headroom, which seems useful). It can also be used for softproofing, if you know how to do that. That's not the only possible profile, but it seems to me that it is the best of several available. A good alternative is from <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://indesignsecrets.com/force-color-images-cmyk-240-ink-limit.php">David Blatner</a>. Direct link to <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="http://indesignsecrets.com/downloads/SWOP%20Coated%20240%25%20Ink%20Limit.icc">icc profile</a>.</p>
+<p>Included in the <i>novel</i> documentation <i>extras</i> folder is an open-source color profile for sRGB (file <i>srgb.icc</i>). There is also an open-source Equivalent to AdobeRGB (file <i>crgb.icc</i>). You will be using these when you convert your PNG image to a JPG in CMYK color space. These are re-named, cross-platform files obtained from <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://ninedegreesbelow.com">Elle Stone</a>. I can think of no technical need to use the "real" profiles that may be lurking somewhere in your computer.</p>
+<p>Get GraphicsMagick or ImageMagick. On Linux, you can install it via your system package manager. On Windows, get GraphicsMagick Q16 binaries for your system (32 or 64 bit) from <a href="https://sourceforge.net/projects/graphicsmagick/files/graphicsmagick-binaries/" rel="external" target="new">SourceForge</a>. I am told that versions for Mac are available via homebrew and macports, but again, I do not have a Mac, so I cannot check that. Or, get ImageMagick Q16 for various platforms from <a href="https://www.imagemagick.org/script/download.php" rel="external" target="new">here</a>.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.4.2 -->
+
+<h4 id="h7.4.3">7.4.3. Convert Your Image to CMYK at 240% (or less) Ink Limit</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.4.3">
+<p class="noindent"><img src="html-resources/example-cmyk238.png" class="floatright" width="445" height="328" alt="example cmyk238 image, back to rgb"/> At right, you can see an emulation of the above image, softproofed to CMYK at 238% ink limit. It is not the CMYK file itself, but an RGB image that is supposed to help you visualize what happens during conversion. The original image contained colors that didn't fit the gamut of the printing process. Nevertheless, it is very close, because (in the original) I avoided using much color that I knew would not convert well.</p>
+<p><b>Get ready:</b> Make a copy of the above 238% (or 240%) ink limit color profile, and re-name the copy as <i>240.icc</i>. I will call your original PNG image <i>yourimage.png</i>. Put this image, the <i>240.icc</i> file, and files <i>srgb.icc</i> and <i>crgb.icc</i> in a single working folder.</p>
+<p>I will also assume that the image resolution is <i>300dpi</i>. If it is something else, then modify <i>300</i> to the other number, when you see it below.</p>
+<p><i>Note: Each of the following boxed commands is a single command line. You may need to scroll the box to the right, or the text may wrap, depending on how you view this file.</i></p>
+<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 1:</b> Open a Terminal (Command Prompt) and navigate to that folder.</p>
+<p>In the following commands, the initial "gm" calls GraphicsMagick (same code Linux and Windows). If you prefer ImageMagick, then eliminate the initial "gm" on Linux, or change the "gm" to "magick" on Windows.</p>
+<div class="codeblock">
+<p><code>gm convert yourimage.png embedded.icc</code></p>
</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p>The above command may return the message "No color profile available" and generate a zero-byte embedded.icc file. Not a problem. Discard the zero-byte file. But if it generates a non-zero embedded.icc file, keep it.</p>
+<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 2:</b> Next (note the file extensions):</p>
+<div class="codeblock">
+<p><code>gm convert -strip yourimage.png yourimage-stripped.tif</code></p>
+</div>
+<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 3:</b> At this point, there are three possibilities:</p>
+<p><b>(a)</b> You have a non-zero embedded.icc file. In this case:</p>
+<div class="codeblock">
+<p><code>gm convert -profile embedded.icc -profile 240.icc yourimage-stripped.tif yourimage-temp.tif</code></p>
+</div>
+<p><b>(b)</b> No embedded.icc, but you know that the artwork was create using AdobeRGB1998 workspace, or equivalent. Then:</p>
+<div class="codeblock">
+<p><code>gm convert -profile crgb.icc -profile 240.icc yourimage-stripped.tif yourimage-temp.tif</code></p>
+</div>
+<p><b>(c)</b> Neither of the above. The image is probably sRGB (default). Then:</p>
+<div class="codeblock">
+<p><code>gm convert -profile srgb.icc -profile 240.icc yourimage-stripped.tif yourimage-temp.tif</code></p>
+</div>
+<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 4:</b> Now, regardless of which possibility you used above:</p>
+<div class="codeblock">
+<p><code>gm mogrify -strip yourimage-temp.tif</code></p>
+</div>
+<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 5:</b> And finally:</p>
+<div class="codeblock">
+<p><code>gm convert -units PixelsPerInch -density 300 -quality 100 yourimage-temp.tif yourimage-cmyk240.jpg</code></p>
+</div>
+<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 6:</b> Now verify your work:</p>
+<div class="codeblock">
+<p><code>gm identify -verbose yourimage-cmyk240.jpg</code></p>
+</div>
+<p>The report should show that the image is CMYK, that it is at 300 pixels/inch, and that there is NO entry for "Profile-color". It will not have anything to say about ink limit, or SWOP.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.4.3 -->
+<h4 id="h7.4.4">7.4.4. Convert your CMYK Image to PDF/X.</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.4.4">
+<p class="noindent">Up to now, you did not need TeX. Now you do. Be sure that you have a working TeX installation, with the <em>novel</em> document class package.</p>
+<p>In folder (your TeX root)/doc/lualatex/novel/extras you will find file "novel-cover-template.tex". Place a copy in the same working folder as your image, and modify it as needed.</p>
+<p><code>\SetMediaSize</code> refers to the full size of the image, with units (usually in). This includes the bleed box. For example, <code>\SetMediaSize{11.87in}{8.75in}</code>.</p>
+<p><code>\SetTrimSize</code> refers to the trimmed image, without bleed. For example, <code>\SetTrimSize{11.62in}{8.5in}</code>.</p>
+<p><code>\SetPDFX[CGATSTR001]{X-1a:2001}</code> will get you "US Web Coated SWOP v2" output intent (most common the USA), and PDF/X-1a:2001 compliance. The Output Intent *.icc color profile will NOT be embedded, because this is almost always the way that print services want it. The PDF contains a code identifying the intent, so there is no need to embed the color profile (and disadvantages to embedding it). In the unlikely event that they demand the Output Intent color profile embedded, put an asterisk on the command.</p>
+<p>For compliance you need to use <code>\SetTitle</code>. The title for this file might not be the title of your book, because this file isn't your book. Ask you print service what they want. Same with <code>\SetAuthor</code>.</p>
+<p>You can use <code>\SetApplication</code> and <code>\SetProducer</code> to change internal identifiers. Don't use these unless you have a reason.</p>
+<p><code>\SetCoverImage</code> is self-explanatory. Must have file extension jpg, jpeg, JPG, or JPEG. Must be CMYK. Note that TeX cannot verify whether the image is in correct color space. It will compile, even if the image is wrong. Beware!</p>
+<p>Do not attempt to write anything between <code>\begin{document}</code> and <code>\end{document}</code>. If you erroneously put some text there, the document will probably compile, and it may even be a valid PDF/X file. However, the resulting text color will almost surely be wrong. If so, the problem will be detected when you submit your file (wrong ink limit or color space).</p>
+<p>Compiling may take a little longer than expected. If your TeX system opens a PDF viewer automatically, the image might be missing (or partial) until a few seconds after the viewer opens. Be patient. The file size is large.</p>
+</div><!-- end 7.4.4 -->
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page08 -->
+<h4 id="h7.4.5">7.4.5. Final Check</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d7.4.5">
+<p class="noindent">Open the PDF in Adobe Reader, which does a trick that no other free software will do, to my knowledge. If your platform does not have Adobe Reader, then find a friend who has it. May be a different platform.</p>
+<p>In Adobe Reader, go to Edit, Preferences, Documents. Check "Save As optimizes for fast web view." Then go to Edit, Preferences, Page Display. Check "Show art, trim, and bleed boxes." Then OK.</p>
+<p>Open your PDF. You should see a light green box, just inside the image boundary. This shows the Trim Area. This box does not print; it is only for visualization. Go to File, Properties, Fonts. There should be no fonts listed.</p>
+<p>Then, "Save As" the same file name (or another one, if you prefer). This will optimize the file. You probably do not need to do that, but it does not hurt, and a few services expect it.</p>
+<p>There will always be some difference between color as viewed on your monitor, and color as printed. This is due to the difference between emitted light (your monitor) and reflected light (print). In professional use, the monitor will be calibrated, and operated at a specific screen brightness. The print will be viewed under lighting with a specific color temperature and illumination. Your own colors are not that critical, are they? If you have a calibrated monitor, and view the PDF and images in color-managed software, then what you see on your computer will be reasonably close to what prints. If your monitor is not calibrated, or you are not using color-managed software, then the printed cover may have its greens a bit more colorful than you were expecting. That doesn't mean there will be a greenish cast. It merely means that things such as spring leaves and shamrocks will be a bit greener (in print) than you expected.</p>
+<p><b>Remember the Disclaimer!</b> Your PDF file should now be ready for submission. Only "should," not "is," because this documentation and its accompanying software comes without warranty. Submit at your own risk!</p>
+<p>All I can say is that it "worked for me." Screenshots:</p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/workedforme.png" width="860" height="275" title="worked for me" alt="worked for me"/></p>
+</div><!-- end 7.4.5 -->
+</div><!-- end 7.4 -->
+
+
+</div><!-- end 7 -->
+</div><!-- end page07 -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page09" class="page">
+<div id="page08" class="page">
-<h2 id="h9">9. Front Matter</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="d9">
-<p class="noindent">The <b><code>\frontmatter</code></b> command must be written immediately after <code>\begin{document}</code>. This sets page numbering to lowercase roman, and performs some other actions.</p>
+<h2 id="h8">8. Book Design</h2>
+<div class="d2" id="d8">
+<p class="noindent">Most authors in P.O.D. use an ordinary word processor, particularly MS Word. For that reason, many print services, and most online user forums, refer to the terminology and settings of MS Word, rather than to the meanings in traditional book publishing. In the case of images, Photoshop settings are often described.</p>
+<p>Since you are neither using MS Word nor Photoshop, you must understand the terminology of printed book design. Then, you can apply that knowledge to the physical layout and internal design of your book, using <i>novel</i> document class.</p>
+
+<h3 id="h8.1">8.1. Terminology</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d8.1">
+<p class="noindent">You <i>must</i> understand these terms, as used in printing.</p>
+
+<h4 id="h8.1.1">8.1.1. Sheet, Page, Leaf</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.1.1">
+<p class="noindent">A <b>sheet</b> of paper is a single, physical piece of paper, regardless of whether anything is printed on it, or where. Often, paper starts out as a large sheet that will subsequently be cut into smaller sheets. The size doesn't matter. A sheet of paper is, in ordinary understanding, a piece of paper.</p>
+<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/page-leaf.png" width="490" height="155" alt="page, leaf"/> In a finished book, a <b>page</b> is one side of a <b>leaf</b>. Thus, there are always exactly twice as many pages are there are leaves. From the manufacturer's point of view, a 240-page (double-sided printing) book has 120 leaves, regardless of whether or not anything is printed on the pages, or how they are numbered.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.1.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h8.1.2">8.1.2. Folio, Spine</h3>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.1.2">
+<p class="noindent">Imagine a single sheet of US Letter 8.5"Wx11"H paper. It has two pages, since you can print on both sides (even if one is empty).</p>
+<p>If you fold that sheet in half across its width, it is still one sheet. But now you have a <b>folio</b>, consisting of two leaves of size 5.5"Wx8.5"H. Each leaf has two pages, so you now have four pages. The fold is at the <b>spine</b>.</p>
+<p>Caution: The term "folio" has several different meanings, even in the narrow field of book publishing. It may refer to folded paper, as mentioned above. Or it may refer to a particular sheet size of paper ("foolscap"). Or, it may simply refer to the number printed on a page. This last use of "folio" is discussed in the context of headers and footers.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.1.2 -->
+
+<h4 id="h8.1.3">8.1.3. Signature, Imposition</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.1.3">
+<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/signature.png" width="133" height="102" alt="signature"/> When a book is commercially manufactured, folios are nested to form <b>signatures</b>. The number of folios in a signature is typically 6 to 16 (that would be 24 to 64 pages). If you were hand-making a single book at home, you might use only one folio per signature.</p>
+<p>Now, think about how those pages must be ordered. Suppose a book contains a single signature of 4 folios. The outermost folio is printed with pages 1 and 16 on one side (before folding), and pages 2 and 15 on its other side. The next nested folio has pages 3/14 and 4/13. Nested inside is 5/12 and 6/11. Innermost is 7/10 and 8/9.</p>
+<p>Re-arranging the page order is part of the <b>imposition</b> process. The process may involve tweaking the position of each page slightly, to account for offset due to paper thickness when the folios are grouped into signatures. If numerous folios are printed on a larger sheet of paper before cutting, the process may involve rotating folios so that they waste less paper.</p>
+<p>Your home printer software can probably do imposition for a single-folio design (four pages). Anything beyond that is left to professional software. You don't need to do it. The print service does it for you, automatically.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.1.3 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.1 -->
+
+<h3 id="h8.2">8.2. Book Manufacture</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d8.2">
+<p class="noindent">In many cases, when you choose how your book will be manufactured, you will have <at most</i> these choices: Trim Size, interior b/w or color, paper, binding, cover finish. The <i>novel</i> class does not address the particular requirements of color interiors (grayscale is OK, since it is emulated by black and white). When you choose the Trim Size, other options may be limited.</p>
+
+<h4 id="h8.2.1">8.2.1 Perfect Binding</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.2.1">
+<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/perfectbinding.png" width="160" height="290" alt="perfect binding"/>Most modern softcover books (and some inexpensive hardcovers) are manufactured using a process named <b>Perfect Binding</b>.
+<p>In Perfect Binding, the signatures are clamped together, and the folded area is removed by a cutting machine. Then there are no longer any folios, just individual leaves.</p>
+<p>The leaves are glued together at the spine, possibly with reinforcement. Note that the glue is not merely at the edge of the leaves; it penetrates the paper slightly, for better strength. Finally, the cover is attached.</p>
+<p>The Perfect Binding method is inexpensive, and is more than adequate for a book that will not receive rough handling. Whether using P.O.D. or a major mass-quantity publisher, most softcover books have been made this way for a long time. Unless you know that your book will be acquired by libraries for addition to their long-term literary collection, there is little reason to have your book manufactured by any other process. The possible exception would be books for small children, which receive rough handling under all circumstances.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.2.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h8.2.2">8.2.2 Library Binding</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.2.2">
+<p class="noindent">Libraries rarely purchase Perfect Binding books (regardless of soft or hard cover) due to lack of durability in a library environment. The exceptions are popular books of no lasting literary value, and how-to books for evolving technologies. These may be obtained by libraries in the cheapest softcover version, because such books will be discarded long before they wear out.</p>
+<p>Unless you are sure that your book will be acquired by numerous libraries for long-term addition to their collections, there is little reason to produce a quality hardcover version. Not all P.O.D. services offer hardcover. If you do need a hardcover version, then be sure to carefully inquire regarding its manufacture, and preferably obtain a copy of someone else's book manufactured that way.</p>
+<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/smythsewn.png" width="177" height="141" alt="perfect binding"/> The best hardcovers, suitable for library use, are made using the <b>Smyth Sewing</b> process. A Smyth Sewn book has signatures of (typically) 12 or 16 folios. But instead of removing the creases after folding, each signature is sewn through its crease using strong thread, onto a durable spine material. The pages will remain attached, even with hard usage. If the spine material is sufficiently flexible, then the book will lie flat when opened.</p>
+<p>Be sure to ask about spine flexibility. The most flexible methods have a soft, curved spine, and are best suited to thick novels. There is also a variety that has a square (flat) spine, which will not quite lie flat when opened. Square-spine Smyth Sewn books seem to be the fashion for documenting intellectual property.</p>
+<p>If a major publisher is producing a book that is sure to be ordered by many libraries, due to its author's popularity or maybe a movie tie-in, then it is likely to be released as a Smyth Sewn hardcover. That's because the production method is affordable in quantity. But on a P.O.D. basis, it is a significant expense.</p>
+<p>Different bindings must have different ISBNs, because they are different products. If you need to change the dimensions of Trim Size or Margins, the <a href="#hA"><code>\Rework</code></a> commands are your friends.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.2.2 -->
+
+<h4 id="h8.2.3">8.2.3 Other Bindings</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.2.3">
+<p class="noindent">A Perfect Bound softcover cannot be retroactively converted to a Smyth Sewn, Library Bound hardcover. However, it is possible to convert a softcover book to some other kinds of hardcover.</p>
+<p>In the simplest method, the soft cover is removed, and a hard cover is glued on. The pages may be shaved in size, so that they don't edge beyond the new cover; or the new cover may be slightly over-sized. Part of the soft cover may be pasted onto the hard cover. That won't look the same as original manufacture, but it avoids creating a dust jacket. Such a hard cover book is no more durable than the softcover, no more flexible at the spine, and no more resistant to losing pages. It simply has a harder cover.</p>
+<p>A more advanced method involves adding strength to the glued spine, by sewing it <em>sideways</em>, before adding the hard cover. This results in a book that is less flexible at the spine, but less likely to lose pages. Sometimes, small (page count) books are made this way, when there are a limited number stored for archival purposes, rather than reading. In other words, it does not concern novels.</p>
+<p>I only mention this because there are services that will create a hardcover book from an existing softcover copy. This is how they do it. Not very useful to you, except possibly as a personal souvenir. If you want a "real" hardcover book, you want a Smyth Sewn Library Binding with hard cover and curved (flexible) spine. Those must be made directly from PDF, not by re-working an existing book.</p>
+<p>Also, the original ISBN is not valid for a book with changed binding.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.2.3 -->
+
+<h4 id="h8.2.4">8.2.4. Paper and Cover Materials</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.2.4">
+<p class="noindent">The interior paper may be white or "creme" (off-white). White paper is generally used for nonfiction, and must be used if there are interior color images. Creme paper is generally used for fiction. The idea is that white paper creates an air of authority, whereas creme paper is more comfortable for lengthy reading. I agree. I recently read a novel that was (mis-) printed on white paper, and it was hard to read in a bright area. So, for your novel, choose creme paper.</p>
+<p>The cover of a Perfect-Binding softcover book may be produced with a glossy or a matte finish. The fashion is to use glossy for nonfiction, matte for fiction. Again, the idea is authority versus comfort. But you may choose what you wish. "Instant Best-Seller" mass-market paperbacks often have an embossed texture, and maybe even metal foil. In the print-on-demand market, forget it. Don't even think about it.</p>
+<p>If you do request a hardcover edition, then it may or may not have a dust jacket (costs extra). The general rule is that books for libraries have a dust jacket, which will be encased in plastic by the library. Books for documentation generally have no dust jacket, with the title and other info embossed in the cover material, for permanance.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.2.4 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.2 -->
+
+<h3 id="h8.3">8.3. Interior Structure</h3>
+<div class="d3" id="d8.3">
+<p class="noindent">This section discusses how a book is designed, in terms of its component pages, where they are placed, and how they are styled. The emphasis is on popular fiction. Some sections that would be required in a dissertation or other nonfiction, are much rarer in popular fiction, or are entirely missing. There is also considerable "wiggle room" in terms of structure, particularly for genres that <i>pretend to be</i> a truthful report of someone else's writing.</p>
+<p>The advice you are about to receive is <em>not</em> authoritative. It is combined from <i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i> (which focuses on nonfiction) and on actual practice, as I have seen by looking through numerous professionally-published works of popular fiction at the local public library. There is a certain amount of variation.</p>
+
+<h4 id="h8.3.1">8.3.1. Display Pages vs. Chapter-Like Sections</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.3.1">
+
+<h5 id="h8.3.1.1">8.3.1.1. Display Pages</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.1.1">
+<p class="noindent">A <em>Display Page</em> has its own design, and stands by itself. Examples are Half-Title, Title, Copyright, Dedication, Epigraph, Table of Contents, Map, Part Separator, and of course Blank.</p>
+<p>Half-Title, Title, Dedication, and Part Separators are always single-page recto. A Table of Contents begins recto, but may continue verso. An Epigraph is single-page, and may be recto or verso. Maps are one per page, and may be recto or verso. If you intend to create a large map that spreads verso-recto, be aware that the technology you will be using does not allow continuous image through the spine area; there will be inside margins that break the image into two separate maps. A Blank page is almost always verso; the only exception is when multiple blanks appear at the very end of the book.</p>
+<p>Each kind of display page has its own style, and position. What they have in common is that all of them lack a header or footer (and thus, lack a printed page number). Use <code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code>.</p>
+<p>If a display page extends to a second page (such as Table of Contents), then use <code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code> at its begining and end, to ensure that both pages omit header and footer.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.1.1 -->
+
+<h5 id="h8.3.1.2">8.3.1.2. Chapter-Like Sections</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.1.2">
+<p>A <em>Chapter-Like Section</em> includes things that are styled like a chapter. This includes Foreword, Preface, Introduction, Author's Note, Acknowledgements, Prologue, Chapters, Epilogue, Conclusion, Endnotes.</p>
+<p>A Chapter-Like Section begins recto, with one exception: Chapter One must begin recto, but any subsequent Chapter may begin recto or verso.</p>
+<p>The first page of a Chapter-Like Section section has no header, but <i>may</i> have a footer with page number. See the available choices for <code><a href="#h4.3.5.1">\thispagestyle</code></a>.</p>
+<p>Remaining pages in the section will have such header/footer style as pertains to ordinary chapters in the book. Exception: If a Chapter-Like Section in front matter is only two pages long, then you may optionally omit the header, or footer, on both pages. Then, use <code>\thispagestyle</code> at the end of the section, with choice that matches its beginning.</p>
+<p>When a Chapter-Like Section appears in front matter, its page headers (if any) do <em>not</em> show the author and title of the book, the way they would appear in main matter. Instead, they show the name of the section (such as Author's Note) both verso and recto. Commands <code><a href="#h4.3.4.6">\SetVersoHeadText</a></code> and <a href="#h4.3.4.6">\SetRectoheadText</a></code> are your friends, as they permit you to dynamically change header text as you move through the book.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.1.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.1 -->
+
+<h4 id="h8.3.2">8.3.2. Front Matter</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="8.3F.2">
+<p class="noindent">The <code><b>\frontmatter</b></code> command must be written immediately after <code>\begin{document}</code>. This sets page numbering to lowercase roman, and performs some other actions.</p>
<p>A book's front matter is <em>about the book</em>. It is not part of the story. The only mandatory front matter is the Title Page and its verso, the Copyright Page. On a practical basis, six pages of front matter are the minimum, and this minimum is often used, even by major publishers. See <a href="#hB">Appendix B</a> for how to construct basic six-page front matter.</p>
-<h3 id="h9.1">9.1. Useful Commands in Front Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d9.1">
-<p class="noindent">Among the numerous commands available to you, here are some that are particularly useful in front matter, for styling and positioning:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code> prevents header or footer from printing on that page. In most cases, this command should be the first to appear on each page of front matter. The only exceptions are lengthy Foreword, Preface, and Introduction. Those should be treated with the same styling as chapters, and may contain headers (except at their start) or footers.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\strut</code> and <code>\stake</code> are invisible, zero-width placeholders. <code>\strut</code> occupies the vertical text height, but <code>\stake</code> does not. Once in a while, these are used to establish a reference point, where positioning is relative to prior code.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\charscale</code> changes text size, and can also tweak position.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\vspace</code> inserts a specified vertical space between block elements (such as paragraphs). Without an asterisk, the command does nothing if it is at the top of the page. With an asterisk, the command is equally effective anywhere on the page.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\vfill</code> between block elements (such as paragraphs) pushes the following material downward on the page. Typically used on a title page, where the publisher's imprint is forced down to the final line.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>center</code> environment. Although the center environment may sometimes cause vertical misalignment when used within flowing text (chapters), it is OK for front matter, where that is not a problem.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>adjustwidth</code> environment. Very useful for creating text areas do not occupy the full page text width. Often used for a Dedication or Epigraph. Also useful in conjunction with the center environment, for certain copyright page designs. In other cases, a non-centered copyright page may have its text limited to less than full width, so that it is visually different from an ordinary page.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>legalese</code> environment. Sets text ragged-right, and disables hyphenation. Useful for some copyright page designs.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\smcp</code> and <code>\allsmcp</code> for small caps. <code>\smcp</code> is the same as <code>\textsc</code>, which converts lowercase letters to small caps, leaving uppercase letters unchanged. <code>\allsmcp</code> changes both uppercase and lowercase letters to small caps. These commands are useful for such expressions as FIRST EDITION, which are customarily set in small caps.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\lnum</code> sets Lining numbers, which all have the height of a capital letter. Without using <code>\lnum</code>, numbers will probably be set Old Style, since that is the text default.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\indent</code>, <code>\forceindent</code>, <code>\noindent</code>, <code>\backindent</code> control indentation. <code>\forceindent</code> and <code>\backindent</code> usually work when the others don't, and can also be used cumulatively. If your copyright page has CIP data, you will need to pay attention to how the data is indented, since that is part of the specification.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\decoglyph</code> selects a decorative element from the deco font (normally <i>NovelDeco.otf</i>). The decoration may usually have to be magnified, using <code>\charscale</code>. This is a handy way to add something to a title page, if you do not otherwise have artwork there.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\clearpage</code> or <code>\cleartorecto</code> terminates a page. With <code>\clearpage</code>, the following material will be placed recto or verso, in normal flow. With <code>\cleartorecto</code>, if the following page would normally be verso, then a blank verso is inserted, so that the following material is forced to recto. The blank page has no header/footer.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\itshape</code> or <code>\textit</code> for italics. The <code>\itshape</code> command is used when the text includes multiple paragraphs. Sometimes a copyright page is styled in all italics. The <code>\textit</code> command cannot cross paragraphs.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\straightquote</code> and <code>\straightdblquote</code> insert a character. A following space is gobbled, in usual TeX fashion. This commands may be helpful if (for some technical reason) you must place a straight quote, and cannot allow the typesetter to convert it to a curly quote.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>parascale</code> environment. Unlike <code>\charscale</code>, this command works with line breaks and multiple paragraphs. The scaled text also has its line spacing scaled, which is not a problem in most front matter. Possibly useful if your copyright information does not quite fit on one page, at normal text size.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\strut\hfill</code> right-aligns the following text n a single line. Be sure to finish with <code>\par</code>. Useful for attributing an Epigraph, or for things such as a signed Foreword.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>toc</code> environment. Specifically designed for a Table of Contents.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\tocitem</code> is an entry in a Table of Contents.</p>
-<p>You may also use image commands, as needed. In fiction, the title page often has graphical elements.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.1">8.3.2.1. Half-Title, page i</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.1">
+<p class="noindent"><p>Some book manufacturers (particulary in hardcover) place a blank or decorative <em>flyleaf</em> before any part of the book interior. A flyleaf (if present) is added at the bookbinding factory, and is not part of your book's interior PDF file.</p>
+<p>Your book's first interior recto page is a Half-Title. It is a <a href="#F.1">Display Page</a>. Historically it was a protective page for the full title page, in the era when a printed interior was not immediately bound. That tradition lives on.</p>
+<p>The Half-Title contains nothing but the book's title. No subtitle. It should be styled in the same manner as is used on the full Title Page, but typically smaller. You can place the title anywhere it looks good. It is almost never placed upper left.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.1 -->
-<h3 id="h9.2">9.2. Chapter-Like Sections in Front Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d9.2">
-<p class="noindent">By "chapter-like section" I mean something such as a Foreword, Preface, or Introduction that may be styled in the same manner as a chapter. Most fiction does not have them. Before you place such sections in front matter, ask yourself: Do your readers really want to hear about your travails in writing the book? Maybe they'd rather get directly to the sex and violence in your main story.</p>
-<p>You may begin a chapter-like section with the <i>ChapterStart</i> environment, and use <code>\ChapterTitle</code>. These commands may be used anywhere.</p>
-<p>Such a section always begins recto. If it does not extend for more than two pages, then you should use <code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code> to ensure that headers and footers do not appear. Since you don't know where a two-page section will break, the second <code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code> may be placed at the end of the second page, before <code>\clearpage</code>.</p>
-<p>However, if the section is longer than two pages, it may have headers and footers. For example, suppose you have a lengthy Preface, in a book that ordinarily has page headings. At the start of the Preface:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetVersoHeadText{\allsmcp{Preface}}<br/>
-\SetRectoHeadText{\allsmcp{Preface}}</code></p>
-<p>In the above case, small caps were chosen as style. Then, instead of the author and title of your book, the word <small>PREFACE</small> will appear in headings. Page numbers will be lowercase roman, because those were set by the <code>\frontmatter</code> command.</p>
-<p>Note: If your book is of the genre that pretends to be a "lost manuscript," with the main story being a transcription or translation of the manuscript, then your own explanation of its finding may go in front matter or main matter. If it pretends to be "about the book" with litle to say, then it can go in front matter (probably as an "Author's Note"). If it is a chapter-length tale of the adventure finding the rest of the book, then is should go in main matter (probably as an "Introduction" or possibly "Prologue"). I doubt if there is a bright line.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.2">8.3.2.2. Blank, page ii</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.2">
+<p class="noindent">Verso page ii is a <a href="#F.1">Display Page</a>. In most cases, it will be blank. This is achieved by using <code>\cleartorecto</code> at the end of the Half-Title page. But if you wish to manually create a blank page, verso or recto:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>
+\clearpage\thispagestyle{empty}\null\clearpage</code></p>
+<p>Instead of blank, prolific authors may show a list of their books. However, even if you wrote other books, many print services won't allow you to list them, unless the same service exclusively carries all of them.</p>
+<p>Major publishers may provide an advertisement for the related movie. In the good old days (looong ago) an expensive book might have a high-quality illustration, known as Frontispiece. Unless you truly know what you are doing, avoid these, and just use a blank page.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.2 -->
-<h3 id="h9.3">9.3. Examples of Front Matter Pages</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d9.3">
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.3">8.3.2.3. Title Page, iii</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.3">
+<p class="noindent">The Title Page is a recto <a href="#F.1">Display Page</a> It shows the title, subtitle (if any), and author. These elements are often very decorative, and may involve imagery. They must exactly match the information you provided when you obtained the book's ISBN. Exception: Some services allow the author's name to use initials.</p>
+<p>If there is a publisher's imprint, it goes at the base. This is achieved by using <code>\vfill</code> just above it.</p>
+<p>Remember that a self-publishing service is not the publisher; <em>you are</em>. That's why it is called self-publishing. If you don't have anything else to put there, and don't like leaving the base of the page empty, you might use "Independently Published in Your City, YourState" or something similar.</p>
+<p>• Note: Others have written (and I agree) that the surest sign that a book was written by an amateur, is when the Title Page simply uses the book's main text font (perhaps bold and larger). That has "term paper" written all over it. Instead, be creative.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.3 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.1">9.3.1. Sample Title Page</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.1">
-<p class="noindent">Below is a sample title page. The <code>\orbitron</code> command would be defined in Preamble using <code><a href="#h5.3">\NewFontFace</a></code>. It calls for the font <i>Orbitron-Medium.otf</i>, which is not part of the TeX distribution. The <code>\decoglyph</code> command calls for a decorative element from the <i>NovelDeco.otf</i> font, which comes with the <i>novel</i> class. The length \nbs is the normal baseline skip of the book's main font. The <code>\stake</code> commands place an invisible zero-width reference point, for the use of adjacent commands. Here is the code:</p>
-<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/starsmash.png" width="263" height="410" alt="sample title page"/>
-<code><small>
-\clearpage<br/>
-\thispagestyle{empty}<br/>
-\vspace*{6\nbs}<br/>
-\stake\hfill{\orbitron\charscale[3]{Star Smash}}\par<br/>
-\vspace{0.4\nbs}<br/>
-\noindent\charscale[3]{\decoglyph{r10059}}<br/>
-\bigemdash[3.4,3]\stake\par<br/>
-\vspace{0.4\nbs}<br/>
-\stake\hfill{\orbitron\charscale[1.42]{A Sci-Fi Murder Mystery}}\par<br/>
-\vspace{9\nbs}<br/>
-\begin{center}<br/>
-\charscale[4]{Dirk Hardcase}<br/>
-\vfill<br/>
-Meaningless Press\par<br/>
-Eschwege • Merthyr Tydfil • Lethbridge\par<br/>
-\end{center}<br/>
-\clearpage
-</small></code></p>
-<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div>
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.4">8.3.2.4. Copyright Page, iv</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="8.3.2.4">
+<p class="noindent">The Copyright Page is a verso <a href="#F.1">Display Page</a>. It is primarily legalistic in nature, providing essential details about the book, as an item in commerce.</p>
+<p>Some nations require specific information to appear on a Copyright Page. That is your responsibility to know, and is beyond the scope of this documentation.</p>
+<p>At least in the U.S.A., the nation where the book is printed must be indicated, either on the Copyright Page or some other allowed location (such as the final verso). Many print-on-demand services use multiple printers, which may be in various nations, depending on who purchases your book. With the services I have used, this is solved by omitting "Printed in the United States of America" on the Copyright page, because it may not be true. At the printing factory, the necessary information is added by them, as a Colophon on the final verso page. This is one reason why that final verso page must be blank (in your PDF). Ask your P.O.D. service.</p>
+<p>A Copyright Page is in ordinary text, perhaps using minimal styling such as italics or small caps. In all cases, its overall page style must differ from the page style of main text. Almost always, the content of the Copyright Page is forced downward, so that excess white space is on top, and the final line appears at the base of the textblock. This is achieved using <code>\null\vfill</code> at the beginning of the page.</p>
+<p>The <i>legalese</i> environment prevents hyphenation, aligns paragraphs ragged-right (instead of justified), and omits paragraph indents. This style is widely used for a Copyright Page. Be sure to use <code>\null</code>, or a similar vertical spacing command, to separate paragraphs. If you nest the <code>center</code> environment within <i>legalese</i>, it will over-ride the ragged-right alignment.</p>
+<p>The <i>adjustwidth</i> environment can be used to set the width of the lines at less than the full width. This is especially helpful if you have little to say, and choose to center the content.</p>
+<p>Always review where lines break, if necessary insrting manual line breaks, to ensure that the meaning is sensible.</p>
+<p>If you use them, certain words or phrases such as <span style="text-transform:lowercase; font-variant:small-caps">FIRST EDITION</span> are traditionally set in all small caps. Use <code>\allsmcp{FIRST EDITION}</code>.</p>
+<p>Numbers, such as date and ISBN, may be Old Style or Lining. The text default is probably Old Style. If you prefer Lining (looks more legalistic), then use <code>\lnum{<em>numbers</em>}</code>. Anything other than digits (and related characters) will remain unchanged by the <code>\lnum</code> command.
+<p>The Copyright Symbol © is pasted from a Unicode character map. Avoid using TeX code.</p>
+<p>I have never seen a Copyright Page extend to a second page. Never. If you have that much to say, it may be that some of the information may be moved to an Author's Note or Acknowledgements section. Or, if necessary, you may use the <i>parascale</i> environment to slightly shrink the text and baseline skip.</p>
+<p>If you have a Cataloging-in-Publication data block (probably you do not), then be aware that its content may be provided to you in MS Word format. Pay attention to indents, as they are part of how the data is presented. Use <code>\forceindent</code> or <code>\backindent</code> to over-ride the normal indentation (or lack thereof). Use the <i>adjustwidth</i> environment for block indents, but be aware that nesting one <i>adjustwidth</i> inside another may cause problems. It is better to end one <i>adjustwidth</i> before beginning a new one.</p>
+<p>Also, CIP data uses emdash in places. MS Word may represent an emdash with <i>two</i> hyphens, whereas TeX uses <i>three</i> hyphens. Better to simply paste the emdash from a Unicode character map, which will appear the same in both MS Word and TeX.</p>
+<p>If you need straight apostrophe or straight quotes, use <code>\straightquote</code> and <code>\straightdblquote</code> to insert a character that won't be converted to curly. These commands gobble the following space, in usual TeX fashion.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.4 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.2">9.3.2. Sample Copyright Page</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.2">
-<p class="noindent">The Copyright Page should be styled differently from the main text. Note that you may past the copyright symbol © from a Unicode character map.</p>
-<p>The simplest Copyright Page begins with <code>\null\vfill</code> so that the following text sinks to the bottom of the page. Ensure that the text is not hyphenated. One way to do that is to use the <i>legalese</i> environment, which prevents hyphenation and sets text ragged-right instead of justified. The <a href="#h7.1.3"><i>parascale</i></a> environment is helpful for setting the text size to something other than normal.</p>
-<p> </p>
-<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" style="padding-top:2em" src="html-resources/copyrightcentered.png" width="264" height="408" alt="sample copyright page, centered"/> First Example: centered italics, limited width. This design is most effective when you don't have a lot to say.</p>
-<p class="code"><code><small>
-\clearpage\thispagestyle{empty}\vspace*{6\nbs}<br/>
-\begin{center}\itshape{<br/>
-Dark and Stormy: A Tale of Nights / Dirk Hardcase\par<br/>
-Copyright ©2017 Dirk Hardcase. All Rights Reserved.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-This is a work of fiction.\\<br/>
-All persons and events are imaginary.\\<br/>
-Resemblance to any real persons or events\\<br/>
-is entirely coincidental.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-Printed in the United States of America.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-\allsmcp{FIRST EDITION}, March 2017.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-ISBN 9-876-54321-0\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-Independently Published\\Dirkstown, U.S.A.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-Inquiries for Cataloging-in-Publication data\\<br/>
-should be directed to the author's web site:\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-http://example.com/bigdealauthor.html\par<br/>
-}\end{center}\clearpage % note initial closing brace ends itshape
-</small></code></p>
-<p> </p>
-<p class="noindent" style="clear:both"><img class="floatright" style="padding-top:2em" src="html-resources/copyrightoffset.png" width="264" height="408" alt="sample copyright page, not centered"/> Second example: offset block. This style is more effective when there are many details, particularly if there is complete Cataloging-in-Publication data.</p>
-<p class="code"><code><small>
-\clearpage\thispagestyle{empty}\null\vfill<br/>
-\begin{adjustwidth}{0em}{5em}\begin{legalese}<br/>
-Dark and Stormy: A Tale of Nights / Dirk Hardcase\par<br/>
-Copyright ©2017 Dirk Hardcase. All Rights Reserved.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-This is a work of fiction.\\<br/>
-All persons and events are imaginary.\\<br/>
-Resemblance to any real persons or events\\<br/>
-is entirely coincidental.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-Printed in the United States of America.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-\allsmcp{FIRST EDITION}, March 2017.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-ISBN 9-876-54321-0\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-Independently Published\\Dirkstown, U.S.A.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-Inquiries for Cataloging-in-Publication data\\<br/>
-should be directed to the author's web site:\par<br/>
-http://example.com/bigdealauthor.html\par<br/>
-\end{legalese}\end{adjustwidth}\clearpage
-</small></code></p>
-<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.5">8.3.2.5. Dedication</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.5">
+<p class="noindent">If you use a Dedication, it is a recto <a href="#F.1">Display Page</a>, and must be placed immediately facing the Copyright Page.</p>
+<p>A Dedication is not required. But sadly, nowadays many authors write a frivolous Dedication, which detracts from the book. If you feel that you need a Dedication, why not put it on your web site? Then you can always edit or remove it, if the subject of your affection runs off with someone else (or, you do). Keep it simple.</p>
+<p>A Dedication is centered. If it is more than a few words, use the <i>adjustwidth</i> environment to keep it bounded, as you would for an Epigraph.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.5 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.3">9.3.3. Sample Dedication</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.3">
-<p class="noindent">A Dedication is not required. But sadly, nowadays many authors write a Dedication, which is often frivolous and detracts from the book. If you feel that you need a Dedication, why not put it on your web site? Then you can always edit or remove it, if the subject or your affection runs off with someone else.</p>
-<p>Keep it simple. This one might be used for a novel of military combat.</p>
-<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/dedic.png" width="133" height="205" alt="sample dedication page"/> <code><small>
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.6">8.3.2.6. Epigraph</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.6">
+<p class="noindent">If you use an Epigraph, it is a <a href="#F.1">Display Page</a>, which may be placed verso or recto.</p>
+<p>An Epigraph is optional. It is a short quotation, traditionally from a work by someone else. Its purpose is to set the tone of your own book, or shamelessly imply that your own talents resemble that of the person quoted. However, even though it is short, do not place copyrighted material there, unless you have the necessary legal permission. You probably don't, so forget about quoting a famous contemporary author or performer. Quotations from the Bible, Shakespeare, and Nineteenth-Century authors are popular; but even then, a more recent translation may be still under copyright.</p>
+<p>Alternatively, you can quote from your own book, or make up something entirely new. One famous Epigraph is used in J.R.R. Tolkien's <i>Lord of the Rings</i> trilogy, in which each book uses the long form of the Ring's incantation as its Epigraph.</p>
+<p>One possible use of an Epigraph is on recto page v, in books that lack a Dedication, a Table of Contents, or other important front matter beyond the Copyright Page. Alternatively, if a book has both Dedication and Table of Contents, an Epigraph may be placed on the otherwise-blank verso page vi between them. Or, an Epigraph may appear in some later convenient place in front matter.</p>
+<p>In general, an Epigraph is set as a centered block, not occupying the full page width. The <i>adjustwidth</i> environment serves this purpose. You will have to manually adjust the widths at left and right, for best visual effect.</p>
+<p>The source of the quotation should be right-justified within the block, and may be preceded by an emdash. Typically, names of people are not italicized, but titles of books are. It is not necessary to give elaborate details; this is not a bibliography.<p>
+
+<h6 id="h8.3.2.6.1"><span class="n"></span>Example Epigraph: Real Quotation</h6>
+<div class="d6" id="u8.3.2.6.1">
+<p class="noindent">This might be used for an action adventure:</p>
+<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/shakepi.png" width="131" height="208" alt="sample epigraph: Shakespeare"/>
+<code><small>
\clearpage<br/>
\thispagestyle{empty}<br/>
-\vspace*{12\nbs}<br/>
-\begin{center}<br/>
-\charscale[1.25]{\textsc{To Those Who Served}}\par<br/>
-\end{center}<br/>
+\vspace*{10\nbs}<br/>
+\begin{adjustwidth}{7em}{7em}<br/>
+Cowards die many times before their deaths;\\<br/>
+The valiant never taste of death but once.\par<br/>
+\stake\hfill---Shakespeare\par<br/>
+\end{adjustwidth}<br/>
\clearpage
</small></code></p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.6.1 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.4">9.3.4. Sample Epigraph</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.4">
-<p class="noindent">An Epigraph may be placed verso or recto. If your book has a Dedication and Table of Contents, a possible place for an Epigraph would be on the otherwise-blank verso between them.<p>
-<p>In this sample Epigraph, the fictional speaker will appear as a character in the book. A glance at this, and you know where the story is headed:</p>
-<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/dorfmcnorf.png" width="131" height="208" alt="sample epigraph"/>
+<h6 id="h8.3.2.6.2"><span class="n"></span>Example Epigraph: Imaginary Quotation</h6>
+<div class="d6" id="u8.3.2.6.2">
+<p class="noindent">This might be used for contemporary fiction with a humorous style. The fictional speaker will appear as a character in the book:</p>
+<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/dorfmcnorf.png" width="131" height="208" alt="sample epigraph: imaginary"/>
<code><small>
\clearpage<br/>
\thispagestyle{empty}<br/>
@@ -2157,54 +2342,58 @@
\clearpage
</small></code></p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.6.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.6 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.5">9.3.5. Sample Table of Contents</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.5">
-<p class="noindent">Most fiction does not have, and does not need, a Table of Contents. It is more useful when the story consists of discrete episodes with distinctive names, not just numbers. Or, if the book is a collection of short stories, a table of contents is mandatory. If your book is a critical edition, with sections by different authors, then a Table of Contents is appropriate.</p>
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.7">8.3.2.7. Table of Contents</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.7">
+<p class="noindent">If you use a Table of Contents, it is a <a href="#F.1">Display Page</a>, beginning recto. If a second page is needed, add <code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code> after the table completes, but before you clear that page.</p>
+<p>Most fiction does not have, and does not need, a Table of Contents. It is more useful when the story consists of discrete episodes with distinctive names, not just numbers. Or, if the book is a collection of short stories, a table of contents is suggested. If your book is a critical edition, or has sections by different authors, then a Table of Contents is mandatory.</p>
<p>Avoid any of the table environments that come with TeX or its packages. These do not provide the most attractive presentation for fiction, without a lot of work on your part.</p>
<p>A Table of Contents has no header or footer, and no printed page number. Use <code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code>. If it continues to a second page, add <code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code> at the end, if you don't know where the page breaks.</p>
-<p>If you use a Table of Contents, it must begin on a recto page.</p>
-<p>The Table of Contents does not include itself, Dedication, or Epigraph.</p>
-<p>A single front matter map, wherever it appears, need not be listed in a Table of Contents. If there are numerous maps and diagrams strewn throughout the book, then you may list them in the Table, or provide a separate List of Illustrations.</p>
-<p>A basic Table of Contents uses the center environment, so that the Table's title and each entry appear centered on the page, without any fancy layout. So simple. So effective. However, if you prefer a more formal table, <i>novel</i> has commands for this purpose.</p>
+<p>Anything preceding a Table of Contents is not listed in the table. Neither is the table itself. An Epigraph is normally not listed, even if it follows the table.</p>
+<p>You may or may not list maps or other illustrations in the table. Fiction rarely has more than a map or two, easily located in front matter by the reader, so there's no need to mention them. Use your judgement. That's different from the practice in nonfiction, especially academic works, where the illustrations convey factual data rather than artistry.</p>
+<p>A basic Table of Contents uses the <i>center</i> environment, so that the Table's title and each entry appear centered on the page, without any fancy layout. So simple. So effective. However, if you prefer a more rectangular table, <i>novel</i> has commands for this purpose.</p>
-<h5 id="h9.3.5.1">9.3.5.1. The toc Environment</h5>
-<div class="d5" id="d9.3.5.1">
+<h6 id="h8.3.2.7.1"><span class="n"></span>8.3.2.7.1. The <i>toc</i> Environment</h6>
+<div class="d6" id="u8.3.2.7.1">
+<p class="noindent">Unlike some other TeX document classes, <i>novel</i> will not automatically build a Table of Contents. Also, LaTeX commands related to tables are generally disabled; adding other packages does not help (and may hurt).</p>
+<p>You may create a Table of Contents in your own style, or use the <i>toc</i> environment for <i>novel's</i> own style. The choice is yours.</p>
<p class="code"><code>\begin{toc}[<em>extra entry separation</em>]{<em>extra margins</em>} <em>...</em> \end{toc}</code></p>
<p>The table is not indented, and text within it is not indented.</p>
-<p>• The optional argument is a number. It is the portion of normal baselineskip that will be added beneath each <code>\tocitem</code> entry (see next section). Default is 0, meaning that there is no extra skip between items, and normal baselineskip is maintained. A value greater than 0 spreads the entries, which could be attractive if there are only a few chapters and you'd like to use more space on the page. For example, a value of 0.25 means that a gap of 0.25 normal baselineskip will be added beneath each entry. A small negative value will crowd the lines together, but there is a limit (approximately -0.1) before the lines cannot be squeezed any tighter.</p>
+<p>The optional argument is a number. It is the portion of normal baselineskip that will be added beneath each <code>\tocitem</code> entry. Default is 0, meaning that there is no extra skip between items, and normal baselineskip is maintained. A value greater than 0 spreads the entries, which could be attractive if there are only a few chapters and you'd like to use more space on the page. For example, a value of <i>0.25</i> means that a gap of 0.25 normal baselineskip will be added beneath each entry. A small negative value will crowd the lines together, but there is a limit (approximately -0.1) before the lines cannot be squeezed any tighter.</p>
<p>Note that the optional argument only applies to <code>\tocitem</code> entries, not to any other text within the environment.</p>
-<p>• The required argument is a length, which will be the amount of extra margin added at left and right of the table (using adjustwidth). A value of 0em allows the table to occupy the full width of the textblock. A value of 2em adds 2em to the margin on each side, so that the width of the table is 4em less than the width of the textblock.</p>
+<p>The required argument is a length, which will be the amount of extra margin added at left and right of the table (using <i>adjustwidth</i>). A value of <i>0em</i> allows the table to occupy the full width of the textblock. A value of <i>2em</i> adds 2em to the margin on each side, so that the width of the table is 4em less than the width of the textblock.</p>
<p>It is best to specify horizontal lengths in units of <i>em</i> or the proportional <code>\parindent</code> or <code>\textwidth</code>.</p>
-<p>• Place at least one empty line above the Table, using <code>\null</code> or <code>\vspace*</code>. This will prevent the Table's title (which is normally enlarged using <code>\charscale</code>) from encroaching into the top margin.</p>
-</div>
+<p>Place at least one empty line above the Table's title, using <code>\null</code> or <code>\vspace*</code>. This will prevent the title (which is normally enlarged using <code>\charscale</code>) from encroaching into the top margin.</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\tocitem[<em>chapter number</em>]{<em>description</em>}{<em>page number</em>}</code> and starred</p>
+<p>Use this command for entries in the Table. Do not use it for non-Table text on the page.</p>
+<p>The optional argument is the <i>chapter number</i>, at most two digits. The number will be left-aligned, with a period automatically added. Following the period will be whatever amount of space is needed to keep the following description aligned.</p>
+<p>If the optional argument is omitted (or empty), then the <i>description</i> will align to the left of the table.</p>
+<p>If the optional argument is the tilde character ~ then no number or period is printed, but the space for <i>chapter number</i> is occupied, so that the following <i>description</i> aligns as if you had entered a <i>chapter number</i>.</p>
+<p>The <i>description</i> is usually the chapter title. If it cannot easily fit on one line, then use an additional <code>\tocitem</code>, because the text cannot be wrapped. The following example shows how this can be done.</p>
+<p>Without the asterisk, <code>\tocitem</code> fills the area between the description and the page number with empty space. The more popular, starred <code>\tocitem*</code> command fills with a dotted line, and is very attractive.</p>
+<p>You may use ordinary style commands, such as <code>\textit</code>, in the entries.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.7.1 -->
-<h5 id="h9.3.5.2">9.3.5.2. <code>\tocitem</code> and <code>\tocitem*</code> Entries</h5>
-<div class="d5" id="d9.3.5.2">
-<p class="code"><code>\tocitem[<em>chapter number</em>]{<em>description</em>}{<em>page number</em>} and starred version</code></p>
-<p>• Use this command for entries in the Table. Do not use it for non-Table text on the page.</p>
-<p>• The optional argument is the chapter number, at most two digits. The number will be left-aligned, with a period automatically added. Following the period will be the amount of space needed to keep the following description aligned.</p>
-<p>• If the optional argument is omitted (or empty), then there is no space, and the following description will align to the left of the table.</p>
-<p>• If the optional argument is the tilde character ~ then no number or period is printed, but the space is occupied, so that the following description aligns as if you had entered a chapter number.</p>
-<p>• The description is usually the chapter title. If it cannot easily fit on one line, then use an additional <code>\tocitem</code>, because the text cannot be wrapped. The following example shows how this can be done.</p>
-<p>• Without the asterisk, <code>\tocitem</code> fills the area between the description and the page number with empty space. The more popular, starred <code>\tocitem*</code> command fills with a dotted line, and is very attractive.</p>
-<p>• You may use ordinary style commands, such as <code>\textit</code>, in the entries.</p>
-<p><b>Example of toc:</b></p>
+<h6 id="h8.3.2.7.2"><span class="n"></span>8.3.2.7.2. Example Table of Contents</h6>
+<div class="d6" id="u8.3.2.7.2">
+<p class="noindent">This content of this table is a spoiler, in that you can figure out where the story is going. Sometimes that's desirable, but usually not:</p>
<p class="code" style="text-indent:0px; font-size:small"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/toc.png" width="264" height="408" alt="toc example"/>
<code>
-\clearpage<br/>
+\cleartorecto % because ToC must start recto<br/>
\thispagestyle{empty}<br/>
-\begin{toc}[0.25]{3em}<br/>
\vspace*{4\nbs}<br/>
+\begin{toc}[0.25]{5.5em}<br/>
{\centering\charscale[1.25]{Contents}\par}<br/>
\null\null<br/>
-\tocitem*[1]{The Evil Weeds}{1}<br/>
-\tocitem*[2]{A Plan of Attack}{14}<br/>
+\tocitem*{Prologue}{1}<br/>
+\tocitem*[1]{The Evil Weeds}{5}<br/>
+\tocitem*[2]{A Plan of Attack}{18}<br/>
\tocitem*[3]{Lady Withens Objects}{35}<br/>
\tocitem*[4]{Back-Hoe to the Rescue}{48}<br/>
-\tocitem[5]{Invasion of the Dandelions}{}<br/>
-\tocitem*[~]{\emph{Interlude}}{63}<br/>
+\tocitem*[5]{Invasion of the Dandelions}{63}<br/>
+\tocitem*[~]{\emph{Interlude}}{90}<br/>
\tocitem*[6]{Army of the Gardeners}{94}<br/>
\tocitem*[7]{Too Much Rain}{113}<br/>
\tocitem*[8]{To Nuke, or Not to Nuke?}{145}<br/>
@@ -2211,102 +2400,84 @@
\tocitem*[9]{Revenge of the Zucchini}{162}<br/>
\tocitem*[10]{Lady Withens Sneezes}{180}<br/>
\tocitem*[11]{The Concrete Lawn}{206}<br/>
+\tocitem*{Epilogue}{228}<br/>
\end{toc}<br/>
\clearpage
</code>
</p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div></div><!-- end class="d4" -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.7.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.7 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.6">9.3.6. Sample Foreword</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.6">
-<p>A Foreword is very rare in fiction, because its normal purpose (in nonfiction) is to endorse, or add credence to, the rest of the book. Thus, a Foreword is not written by the author, but by an editor, expert, or celebrity. You should be so lucky.</p>
-<p><img src="html-resources/foreword.png" class="floatright" width="178" height="826" alt="example foreword"/> A Foreword begins recto. Its start page has no header, but may have a footer. If there is only one more page, then again have no header, possibly footer. More than two pages, use both header and footer if they are available. The header text is not the author and title of the book. Usually, it is "Foreword" (perhaps in small caps) recto and verso. Typically the Foreword is signed at its end. A very lengthy Foreword might have its writer's name and credentials shown on its start page.</p>
-<p>We will imagine that your book <i>Zombie Chemists</i> was once approved for the reading list of some low-income elementary school. Four years later, all the kids who read it were accepted in chemical engineering programs at elite colleges. Now, someone from the National Bureau of Schools wants to recommend the book everywhere. The lengthy Foreword is styled like a chapter (see below), using header/footer book layout:</p>
-<p class="code"><code><small>
-\cleartorecto <span class="ap">% always start with this</span><br/>
-\thispagestyle{footer} <span class="ap">% the book has a footer</span><br/>
-\SetVersoHeadText{\textsc{Foreword}}<br/>
-\SetRectoHeadText{\textsc{Foreword}}<br/>
-\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
-\vspace*{2\nbs}<br/>
-\ChapterTitle{Foreword}<br/>
-\end{ChapterStart}<br/>
-It is my great pleasure to recommend...\par<br/>
-\lipsum<br/>
-... And I urge all schools to adopt it.\par<br/>
-\null<br/>
-\stake\hfill Bigg Wigg, Ph.D.\par<br/>
-\stake\hfill Honcho, National Bureau of Schools, 2017\par<br/>
-\clearpage <span class="ap">% always end with this or \cleartorecto</span><br/>
-<span class="ap">% Be sure to re-set the head texts!</span>
-</small></code></p>
-<p style="clear:both">Once again: It is very unlikely that your book will have a Foreword. Ever.</p>
-</div>
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.8">8.3.2.8. Foreword, Preface, Introduction</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.8">
+<p class="noindent">A Foreword, Preface, or Introduction is a <a href=#h8.3.1.2">Chapter-Like Section</a>, beginning recto.</p>
+<p>A <i>Foreword</i> is written by someone other than the author. It is essentially a marketing tool, by which the publisher addes credence to the work, or mere publicity, by having an expert or celebrity write something in front matter. Introductions are common in nonfiction, but extremely rare (I have never seen one) in fiction, except for critical editions of older works (where the new, original material is essentially nonfiction).</p>
+<p>A <i>Preface</i> is written by the author, speaking as author, and may include a general discussion of this and that about how the author came to write the book. It may also include acknowledgements, if they are not in a separate section. A Preface is rather formal, and very rare in popular fiction. If you wish to address the reader, the less-formal <i>Author's Note</i> is better for your purpose.</p>
+<p>An <i>Introduction</i>, when used in front matter, is written by the author. Its purpose is to provide sufficient background for understanding the material that is to follow. Thus, an Introduction is sometimes seen in the front matter of historical or technical nonfiction.</p>
+<p>An Introduction in front matter is inappropriate for popular fiction, but I suppose it <i>might</i> be used for the purpose of world-building in that genre, where the main story assumes that the reader is familiar with the setting. In such a case, the setup is described by the author (as author), but <i>not</i> by a character in the story. Also see <i>Author's Note</i>.</p>
+<p>A Foreword, Preface, or Introduction is a "chapter-like" section. That is, its style is the same as if it were a chapter, in terms of how it is titled, and the use of page header/footer. But there is a significant exception: If your book design uses header text, you do <i>not</i> write the author and title in headers. Instead, you use <code>\SetVersoHeadText</code> and <code>\SetRectoHeadText</code> to write Foreword, Preface, or Introduction in both. See the example Author's Note, below, for how this is done.</p>
+<p>A Foreword or Preface is often signed at the end by its writer, with place and date. A lengthy Foreword might instead place its writer's name and credentials under the Foreword title.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.8 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.7">9.3.7. Sample Preface</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.7">
-<p>A Preface is written by the author. Usually, it is an explanation of the circumstances that led to the writing of this book. That is common in nonfiction, where a how-to book might self-praise expertise; a lifestyle book might mention the author's own success with the following advice; an account of an incident might explain that the author was really there.</p>
-<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/preface.png" width="178" height="826" alt="example preface"/> A Preface is uncommon in fiction, but it is sometimes used as a catch-all for a variety of things, perhaps including acknowledgements and permissions when they are not shown separately. Or, if the fiction was "inspired by" some real events, that might be mentioned. Don't you dare say that your book was inspired by the writing style of [famous living author] or the setting and characters of [television, movie, another author's book].</p>
-<p>Here, we will imagine that the author is a combat veteran who is writing combat fiction. He will explain his own experience in the armed forces, so we can understand that the setting is realistic:</p>
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.9">8.3.2.9. Acknowledgements</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.9">
+<p class="noindent">If you use Acknowledgements, it begins recto. If very short, style it as a <a href=#h8.3.1.1">Display Page</a>, possibly even using limited text width (as with an Epigraph, above). Otherwise, it is a <a href=#h8.3.1.2">Chapter-Like Section</a>.</p>
+<p>Most fiction doesn't need acknowledgements. Don't write Acknowledgements just because you can. Acknowledgements are for those who provided real assistance. If you want to provide a shout-out to your friends for their encouragement, consider doing it on a web page.</p>
+<p>If you have a Preface or Author's Note, you can often include acknowledgements there (if you wish), rather than in separate Acknowledgements.</p>
+<p>If styled like a chapter, in a book that has page headers, the verso and recto head text is set to Acknowledgements, not the author and title. See the Author's Note, below, for how this is done.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.9 -->
+
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.10">8.3.2.10. Author's Note</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d83..2.10">
+<p class="noindent">If you use an Author's Note, it begins recto. If very short, style it as a <a href=#h8.3.1.1">Display Page</a>, possibly even using limited text width (as with an Epigraph, above). Otherwise, it is a <a href=#h8.3.1.2">Chapter-Like Section</a>.</p>
+<p>An Author's Note directly addresses the reader, from the author. It is often signed with name, place, and date at the end. There is no particular content. Some authors point out that a particular element of the story, which seems fictional, is actually based on a real historical event. Others babble their life stories, and how they came to write the book. Others use it as a catch-all, including acknowledgements and whatever else fits. In the "lost manuscript" genre, authors may (fictionally) tell how the manuscript came into their hands; but a lengthy tale of discovery is better placed in mainmatter, as an Introduction.</p>
+<p>If an Author's Note is two pages long, then on the second page use the same page style that you would ordinary use to start a chapter. Normally, this is <code>\thispagestyle{footer}</code>.</p>
+<p>If an Author's Note is three or more pages long, then a header is permitted (if the book's main style has header). You may allow author and title to appear in header text, but it is better to indicate that this is <em>not</em> the main story, using <code>\SetVersoHeadText{Author's Note}</code> and <code>\SetRectoHeadText{Author's Note}</code>.</p>
+
+<h6 id="h8.3.2.10.1"><span class="n"></span>Example Author's Note</h6>
+<div class="d6" id="u8.3.2.10.1">
+<p class="noindent">In a book of historical fiction, based on the author's own travels and expertise:</p>
<p class="code"><code><small>
-\cleartorecto <span class="ap">% always start with this</span><br/>
-\thispagestyle{footer} <span class="ap">% the book has a footer</span><br/>
-\SetVersoHeadText{\textsc{Preface}}<br/>
-\SetRectoHeadText{\textsc{Preface}}<br/>
-\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
-\vspace*{2\nbs}<br/>
-\ChapterTitle{Preface}<br/>
+\cleartorecto % begins recto<br/>
+\SetVersoHeadText{Author's Note}<br/>
+\SetRectoHeadText{Author's Note}<br/>
+\begin{ChapterStart} % because chapter-like<br/>
+\null\null<br/>
+\ChapterTitle{Author's Note}<br/>
\end{ChapterStart}<br/>
-In the 1990s I served three tours of duty in...\par<br/>
-\lipsum[1-2]<br/>
-Our platoon successfully...\par<br/>
-\lipsum[1-2]<br/>
-By the time I returned home...\par<br/>
-\lipsum[1-2]<br/>
-... And finally, I would like to thank....\par<br/>
+After many years of studying the late Roman Empire... \lipsum[1]<br/>
+The Third-Century burial practices of the Alemanni... \lipsum[1-2]<br/>
+I have taken great liberty with the likely behavior... \lipsum[1]<br/>
+The battles with Roman forces are entirely imaginary... \lipsum[1-2]<br/>
+Finally, I would like to thank... \lipsum[1]<br/>
\null<br/>
-\stake\hfill Dirk Hardcase\par<br/>
-\stake\hfill Springfield, March 14, 2017\par<br/>
-\clearpage <span class="ap">% always end with this or \cleartorecto</span><br/>
-<span class="ap">% Be sure to re-set the head texts!</span>
+\stake\hfill \textsc{Dirk Hardcase}\par<br/>
+\stake\hfill Springfield, September 22, 2016\par<br/>
+\clearpage<br/>
+% Be sure to re-set the verso and recto head texts!
</small></code></p>
-<p style="clear:both">Note that a <i>fictional</i> tale of the book's creation does not belong in a Preface, or anywhere in front matter. Put it in main matter.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h9.3.8">9.3.8. Sample Acknowledgements</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.8">
-<p class="noindent">Most books don't need acknowledgements. As with a Dedication, don't write Acknowledgements just because you can. Acknowledgements are for those who provided real assistance. If you want to provide a shout-out to your friends for their encouragement, do that on a web page.</p>
-<p>If you have a Preface, you can include acknowledgements there, so you don't need a separate Acknowledgements section. If you obtained permission to use copyrighted material, and if that can be documented on the copyright page, do it there; or do it in the Preface, if you have one.</p>
-<p>Acknowledgements begin on a recto page. If lengthy, style the section like a chapter. See the above sample Foreword and Preface. If very brief, it is better to use the style of a Dedication or Epigraph, with the material in a block that does not fill the page width. In the following, the width was manually adjusted until the text looked good, without hyphenation:</p>
-<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/acknowledgements.png" width="178" height="274" alt="sample acknowledgements"/>
-<code><small>
-\cleartorecto <span class="ap">% always start with this</span><br/>
-\thispagestyle{empty}<br/>
-\vspace*{6\nbs}<br/>
-\begin{adjustwidth}{3.6em}{3.6em}<br/>
-{\centering\charscale[1.6]{Acknowledgements}\par}<br/>
-\null<br/>
-\null<br/>
-\noindent The author would like to thank the antiquities research staff at the Erewhon County Library, without whose assistance the material regarding Eighteenth Century axe murderers would never have come to light.\par<br/>
-\end{adjustwidth}<br/>
-\clearpage <span class="ap">% always end with this or \cleartorecto</span>
-</small></code></p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/authorsnote.png" width="813" height="415" alt="sample author's note in frontmatter"/></p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.10.1 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.10 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.9">9.3.9. Sample Map</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.9">
-<p class="noindent">Many works of fiction have a map or other diagram. It might be the map of a real or fictional geographic area. It might be the map of a crime scene. It might be an inheritance chart. Even though fictional, it may be placed in front matter.</p>
-<p>A map may be placed verso or recto, as long as it does not visually interfere with material on the facing page. In particular, do not place a map on the verso that faces the opening of your story.</p>
-<p>Typically, a map appears late in front matter, but I have sometimes seen it early in front matter. I have not seen an authoritative guide to placement. A single map, or maybe two, need not be mentioned in a table of contents or illustrations. If you have a lot of them strewn around the book, then they should be listed in such a table; but this is very rare in fiction.</p>
-<p>As with all images in <i>novel</i>, a map must be raster png or jpg (not vector artwork), of correct resolution, placed using <i>novel's</i> own image placement commands. These are described <a href="#h8">elsewhere</a> in this documentation.</p>
-<p>Normally, a map in front matter has no header/footer. For example:</p>
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.11">8.2.1.11. Map</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.11">
+<p class="noindent">A Map is a <a href=#h8.3.1.1">Display Page</a>, which may be verso or recto. You may use more than one Map, but be aware that in the printing technology available to you via <i>novel</i> class, a single Map cannot be continued as a spread across the spine; you must break it into two independent Maps, allowing for the inside margins.</p>
+<p>Many works of fiction have a map or other diagram. It might be the map of a real or fictional geographic area. It might be the map of a crime scene. It might be an inheritance chart. Even though fictional, it is usually placed in front matter, presumably because a map does not actually tell any part of the story.</p>
+<p>I have seen maps placed very early, or very late, in front matter. The general rule seems to be, "put it where it fits." However, do not place a map where some other item <i>must</i> be located, and do not place a map on the final verso that faces the beginning of main matter, due to its visual distraction.</p>
+<p>A single map, or maybe two, need not be mentioned in a table of contents or illustrations. If you have a lot of them strewn around the book, then they should be listed in such a table; but this is very rare in fiction.</p>
+<p>As with all images, a map must be placed using <i>novel's</i> own <a href="#h7">image placement methods</a>.</p>
+
+<h6 id="h8.3.2.11.1"><span class="n"></span>Example Map</h6>
+<div class="d6" id="u8.3.2.11.1">
+<p class="noindent">Typically, there will be nothing but the single image on a Map page, with all text self-contained. But in this example, the image only occupies part of the page. It is followed by ordinary text for the numbered locations:
<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/map.png" width="178" height="274" alt="sample map"/>
<code><small>
-\clearpage <span class="ap">% always start with this or \cleartorecto</span><br/>
+\clearpage<br/>
\thispagestyle{empty}<br/>
-\BlockImage{areamap.png} <span class="ap">% 600dpi b/w</span>
+\BlockImage{areamap.png} <span class="ap">% 600dpi b/w</span><br/>
\vspace{2\nbs}<br/>
\begin{center}<br/>
1. Alice Springs\\<br/>
@@ -2319,516 +2490,194 @@
8. Sanya\\<br/>
9. Ice Station 414\par<br/>
\end{center}<br/>
-\clearpage <span class="ap">% always end with this or \cleartorecto</span>
+\clearpage
</small></code></p>
<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.11.1 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.11 -->
-<h4 id="h9.3.10">9.3.10. Cast of Characters, Synopsis, etc.</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d9.3.10">
-<p class="noindent">Some authors like to provide a page or two that names the characters who will appear in the story, with a quick description. This seems fashionable in murder mysteries.</p>
-<p>Example: "Lord Withens: Master of his ancestral estate, fond of horses and bridge. Who knew what he kept in that distant farmer's cottage?" (Plus a few other characters.)</p>
-<p>Or, if your book is part of a series where this book begins where another left off, you may have a short Synopsis reminding the reader what came before. Example: "Space Captain Withens and his robo-sidekick are on a quest to find the lost Frgltz stone. After intercepting a secret message, they hastily sped to planet Wkertx, only to discover that it was a trap. They are now hiding in an abandoned mine, with a squad of Qltprs patrolling the skies above."</p>
-<p>The Cast of Characters, or Synopsis, begins recto. It is placed very late in front matter, just before main matter begins.</p>
-<p>What's the difference between a Synopsis and a Prologue? A Synopsis is very brief, rarely more than a page, and does not reveal anything that an avid reader would not already know, from previous books in the series. It belongs in front matter. A Prologue is brief (but may be a few pages), and does reveal something that the reader would not already know. It belongs in main matter. I cannot think of any occasion for using both.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h5 id="h8.3.2.12">8.3.2.12. Second Half-Title</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.2.12">
+<p class="noindent">In many cases, front matter has very little content. After the Copyright Page, there is nothing else to say. But it is visually bad practice to go directly from verso Copyright Page to the start of the story on recto page 1. This can be solved by repeating the Half-Title as recto page <i>v</i>, with blank verso page <i>vi</i>. I've seen it with major writers and major publishers.</p>
+<p>You can do the same thing with longer front matter, if it would otherwise end on a verso page.</p>
+<p>When there is a lot of front matter (no particular amount), it is customary to use a second Half-Title to mark the boundary where front matter finally ends.</p>
+<p><i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i> recommends that a second Half-Title be the first page of main matter. Thus, it would be page 1, with the actual story beginning on page 3. But it acknowledges that a common practice is for a second Half-Title and its verso to remain part of front matter, so that main matter begins with the story on page 1. Although I have seen a few books that follow the recommendation, it appears that the great majority of them follow the common practice.</p>
+<p>If your book has Part Separators in main matter, then you can do without a second Half-Title.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.12 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.2.1 -->
+<h4 id="h8.3.3">8.3.3. Main Matter</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.3.3">
+<p class="noindent">Main matter begins with the <code>\mainmatter</code> command. It forces its page to recto, changes the page numbering to Arabic, and sets the count to 1.</p>
+<p>Main matter is <i>the story itself</i>. In some cases, this also includes a fictional setup (Introduction or Prologue) that leads to the longer story line. It also includes material in the aftermath of the story, such as Epilogue, Conclusion, and end notes.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page09 -->
-<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page10" class="page">
+<h5 id="h8.3.3.1">8.3.3.1. Half-Title in Main Matter</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.3.1">
+<p class="noindent">The <i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i> prefers that a second Half-Title page (if used) mark the beginning of main matter. Thus, it would be page 1 (number not printed). Then, the story begins on page 3.</p>
+<p>However, <i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i> also notes that this is not the regular practice, especially with fiction. In fact, among the many popular fiction books I have inspected, when a second Half-Title is used, it is <i>almost</i> always the last recto page of front matter, followed by a blank verso; then main matter begins with page 1 of the story.</p>
+<p>The choice is yours. I suggest agreeing with regular practice: If you use a second Half-Title, keep it in front matter.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.3.1 -->
+<h5 id="h8.3.3.2">8.3.3.2. Part Separator in Main Matter</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.3.2">
+<p class="noindent">If used, a Part Separator is a recto <a href=#h8.3.1.1">Display Page</a>.</p>
+<p>Some books are partitioned into distinct sub-books. A sub-book is of substantial length, not individual chapters or short stories.</p>
+<p>If your book has distinct sub-books, then each of them has its own recto cover page, known as a Part Separator. Its verso is blank or an Epigraph. Then the accompanying story begins recto.</p>
+<p>A Part Separator is <i>always</i> main matter. So, the first Part Separator is <i>always</i> page 1 (number not printed). Then its text begins on page 3. Do not re-initialize the page count when you get to the next Part Separator.</p>
+<p>Part separators could be simply <i>Part I</i>, <i>Part II</i>, and so forth. They could be <i>Book I</i>, <i>Book II</i>. Or, they could have distinctive titles, such as <i>The Northern Front</i> and <i>The Southern Front</i>. If your book is two novelettes in one, then the Part Separators would be the title (and subtitle, if any) of the individual novelettes. Sometimes a Part Separator has a brief description of its purpose, as in <i>Book I. On Earth</i> followed by <i>Book II. On Mars</i>.</p>
+<p>Unless your book has a very complex structure, do <i>not</i> use both a second Half-Title (whehter in front matter or main matter) and a Part Separator. Combine them as the recto main matter page 1: <i>The Withens Chronicles. Part I</i>, or simply <i>Part I</i>. Then the next Part Separator would be <i>Part II</i>.</p>
+<p>In one book I recently noticed, there were five parts, each of which corresponded to one calendar day. The Part Separator showed the day, as in <i>Monday, September 25</i>. Then within each part there were several chapters, each of which took us to some different event in a different setting, all on that same day.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.3.2 -->
-<h2 id="h10">10. Transition from Front Matter to Main Matter</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="d10">
-<p class="noindent">Main matter always begins with the <code>\mainmatter</code> command, immediately following <code>\clearpage</code> or \cleartorecto</code>. The <code>\mainmatter</code> command sets the page recto, numbering to Arabic 1.</p>
-<p>There is no middle-matter between front matter and main matter. So, it is necessary to decide whether a page belongs in one or the other. The final page of front matter is verso, with a lowercase roman page number that is almost never printed. The first page of main matter has Arabic page number 1, which may or may not be printed, depending on layout.</p>
-<p>In general, anything that is "about the book" is meta-information that belongs in front matter. "The story itself," and any aftermath, belongs in main matter. This section provides a guide to determining which is which.</p>
-<p>Some situations are judgement calls. Where I provide an opinion, it is based on my obervations of popular fiction books, or the <i>Chicago Manual of Style, 16th Edition (CMoS)</i>, favoring actual books when there is room for disagreement. Opinions offered by non-authoritative web sites have been disregarded. It's not that I am more authoritative; take my advice, or leave it, as you see fit.</p>
-<p>Just the other day, I was looking at a famous book by a famous author, reprinted by a famous publisher in hard cover. Its page numbers began with 1 at the Half-Title and ran continuously. No separate numbering for front matter. Why bother thinking about it, when the book will sell the same number of copies anyway?</p>
+<h5 id="h8.3.3.3">8.3.3.3. Introduction in Main Matter</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.3.3">
+<p class="noindent">An Introduction is a <a href=#h8.3.1.2">Chapter-Like Section</a>. If the book is nonfiction and the Introduction is factual, it belongs in front matter, as described above. But in fiction, where an Introduction is a fictional lead-in to the larger story, it belongs in main matter.</p>
+<p>A main matter Introduction is typically used in the "lost manuscript" genre, where some fictional adventurer or archaeologist describes how the manuscript was found and translated. Usually the narration is told in the first person. Sometimes the author pretends to be the adventurer or achaeologist. Often the narrator is someone else. Following such an Introduction, the various chapters will reveal the contents of the manuscript. If the voice of the Introduction returns at the end, it is called a Conclusion, and is in main matter.</p>
+<p>If an Introduction is in main matter, its header text (if any) is whatever is used throughout the main story. Typically that's author verso, title recto. The reason is that such an Introduction is actually part of the overall story.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.3.3 -->
-<h3 id="h10.1">10.1. Introduction in Front Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d10.1">
-<p class="noindent">An Introduction is a chapter-like section, written by the author.</p>
-<p>In nonfiction, the purpose of an Introduction is to familiarize the reader with background material, so that the main material can be properly understood in context. Such an Introduction appears after Foreword and Preface (if any), and is placed in front matter. It begins recto.</p>
-<p>In fiction, a front matter Introduction is very rare (I have never seen any), because it is supposed to be factual, not a part of the story. Perhaps a fictional front matter Introduction might be used in a novel that requires extensive world-building; but that's not my genre, so I do not know. If in doubt, look at some actual books in that genre.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h10.2">10.2. Author's Note in Front Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d10.2">
-<p class="noindent">An Author's Note is brief, preferably one page (at most two), beginning recto. If very brief, it may be styled like an Epigraph. Otherwise, it is styled like a chapter. No header, but page numbers may appear in footer.</p>
-<p>Typically, an Author's Note is used when an author has something to say, but there is no Preface (or the Note is inappropriate in a Preface). The Note directly addresses the reader, from the author, and is often signed with place and date.</p>
-<p>For example, I recall a book (crime genre) where the Author's Note mentions that a certain aspect of animal behavior, which will appear in the story, is actually based in reality. Otherwise, it sounds ridiculous, and we would assume that the author just made that up. The author is making a truthful remark about the book, rather than telling a story, so the Note properly belongs in front matter.</p>
-<p>On the other hand, in the "lost manuscript" genre, the Author's Note may tell how the information came into possession of the author. That is fiction, but since it is brief and pretends to be about the book, it is placed in front matter. However, a long tale about the discovery of the manuscript belongs in a main matter Introduction, as described below. You can also have a front matter Author's Note mentioning how the material was acquired by the author from some adventurer, followed by a main matter Introduction, with the adventurer's own tale of the manuscript's finding.</p>
-
-<h4 id="h10.2.1">10.2.1. Sample Author's Note</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d10.2.1">
-<p class="noindent">For example, in a book of historical fiction:</p>
-<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/authorsnote-frontmatter.png" width="178" height="274" alt="sample author's note in frontmatter"/>
-<code><small>
-\cleartorecto <span class="ap">% always start with this</span><br/>
-\thispagestyle{empty}<br/>
-\vspace*{6\nbs}<br/>
-{\centering\charscale[1.6]{Author's Note}\par}<br/>
-\null<br/>
-\null<br/>
-\noindent The Third-Century burial practices of the Roman Empire, for those of the lesser nobility, were generally as described in this story. The description of Alemanni tribes is based on a pastiche of opinions by contemporaneous writers, who saw them from the perspective of Graeco-Roman culture.\par<br/>
-In the chapters pertaining to transmontane trade and cultural exchange, I have taken great liberty with the likely behavior and responses of the characters as events unfold. Nevertheless, the goods and services available to them, in ordinary commerce, are as described in the story.\par<br/>
-\clearpage <span class="ap">% always end with this or \cleartorecto</span>
-</small></code></p>
-<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h10.3">10.3. Second Half-Title in Front Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d10.3">
-<p class="noindent">If a second Half-Title is used, <i>CMoS</i> acknowledges that theory and practice often differ. Here, I will go with the common practice in fiction.</p>
-<p>If front matter is short, a second Half-Title is sometimes used to prevent verso front matter from clashing with recto main matter. This is one of the possibilities discussed in the basic six-page front matter (<a href="#hB">Appendix B</a>). In this case, the second Half-Title is front matter, and so is its verso. Main matter begins at the following recto.</p>
-<p>You can also do this for more than the basic six pages of front matter, if you wish. However, there are situations where a second Half-Title should be the start of main matter. See below.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h10.4">10.4. Part Separator in Main Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d10.4">
-<p class="noindent">Some books are partitioned into distinct sub-books. A sub-book is of substantial length, not individual short stories.</p>
-<p>If your book has distinct sub-books, then each of them has its own recto cover page, known as a Part Separator. Its verso is blank or Epigraph. Then the accompanying story begins recto.</p>
-<p>A Part Separator is always main matter. So, the first Part Separator is page 1. Its text begins on page 3. Do not re-initialize the page count when you get to the next Part Separator.</p>
-<p>The simplest Part Separator is <i>Part I</i>, followed by <i>Part II</i>. You could also call them <i>Book I</i> and <i>Book II</i>, or perhaps <i>First Invasion</i> and <i>Second Invasion</i>. These are not chapters; each part occupies a substantial portion of the entire book, and contains its own chapters.</p>
-<p>Sometimes a Part Separator has a brief description of its purpose, as in <i>Book I. On Earth</i> followed by <i>Book II. On Mars</i>.</p>
-<p>Unless your book has a very complex structure, do not use both a second Half-Title and a Part Separator. Combine them as the recto main matter page 1: <i>The Withens Chronicles. Part I</i>. Then the next Part Separator might simply be <i>Part II</i>. No particular rule.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h10.5">10.5. Second Half-Title in Main Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d10.5">
-<p class="noindent">When front matter is <i>lengthy</i>, and there is no Part Separator, then a second Half-Title is used as the start of main matter. It is recto page 1. Its verso (blank, sometimes Epigraph) is page 2, and the beginning of the story is page 3.</p>
-<p>How long is <i>lengthy</i>? No specific value. If in doubt, place a second Half-Title in main matter, rather than in front matter. If the front matter contains any chapter-like sections (such as Foreword, Preface, Introduction) then consider it to be <i>lengthy</i> regardless of the number of pages.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h10.6">10.6. Introduction in Main Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d10.6">
-<p class="noindent">An Introduction is a chapter-like section. If the book is nonfiction and the Introduction is factual, it belongs in front matter, as described above. But in fiction, where an Introduction is a lead-in to the larger story, it belongs in main matter.</p>
-<p>A main matter Introduction is typically used in the "lost manuscript" genre, where some fictional adventurer or archaeologist describes how the manuscript was found and translated. Usually the narration is told in the first person. Sometimes the author pretends to be the adventurer or achaeologist. Often the narrator is someone else. Following such an Introduction, the various chapters will reveal the contents of the manuscript. If the voice of the Introduction returns at the end, it is called a Conclusion.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h10.7">10.7. Prologue in Main Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d10.7">
-<p class="noindent">A Prologue, even if one page, is styled as a chapter. It belongs in main matter.</p>
-<p>The purpose of a Prologue is to provide a quick lead-in or setting for the story, and get the reader's attention. It is fiction, confined in place and time (one scene, one perspective). The narrator may be first-person or third-person.</p>
-<p>Do not use a Prologue for the voice of the author speaking about the book, as author; that goes in an Introduction or Author's Note.</p>
+<h5 id="h8.3.3.4">8.3.3.4. Prologue in Main Matter</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.3.4">
+<p class="noindent">A Prologue, even if one page, is a <a href=#h8.3.1.2">Chapter-Like Section</a>. It belongs in main matter.</p>
+<p>The purpose of a Prologue is to provide a quick lead-in or setting for the story, and get the reader's attention. It is confined in place and time (one scene, one perspective). The narrator may be first-person or third-person.</p>
+<p>Do not use a Prologue for the voice of the author speaking about the book, as author; that goes in front matter, as an Author's Note.</p>
<p>If a book has a Prologue, then it is likely to have an Epilogue after the main story ends. An Epilogue also belongs in main matter.</p>
<p>I do not know of any fiction with both a fictional Introduction and a Prologue. If so, Introduction precedes Prologue.</p>
-<p>Note: I have seen some web pages advising that a Prologue should go in front matter, and be told by a character (who appears in the following story). Based on <i>CMoS</i> and actual books, I do not think that is correct.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p>Note: I have seen some web pages advising that a Prologue should go in front matter, and be narrated by a character who appears in the following story. Based on <i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i> and actual books, I do not think that is correct.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.3.4 -->
-<h3 id="h10.8">10.8. Chapters</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d10.8">
-<p class="noindent">Finally, you have arrived at Chapter One! It is always recto, in main matter. As described above, its page number may be 1 or 3. If your book is a collection of short stories, the same applies to the first story.</p>
-<p>Subsequent chapters may begin recto or verso, or the book may be designed so that each chapter always begins recto. In the majority of novels I have seen, recto/verso is used. The <code>\clearpage</code> command starts a new page (recto or verso), and the \cleartorecto command will (if necessary) insert a blank verso, so that the following material is always recto.</p>
+<h5 id="h8.3.3.5">8.3.3.5. Chapters</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.3.5">
+<p class="noindent">Finally, you have arrived at Chapter One! Not surprisingly, it is a <a href=#h8.3.1.2">Chapter-Like Section</a>. Chapter One is always recto, whether or not preceded by an Introduction or Prologue.</p>
+<p>Subsequent chapters may begin recto or verso. Or, the book may be designed so that each chapter always begins recto. In the majority of novels I have seen, recto/verso is used. The <code>\clearpage</code> command starts a new page (recto or verso), and the <code>\cleartorecto</code> command will (if necessary) insert a blank verso, so that the following material is always recto.</p>
<p>In the case of short stories, especially if they are by different authors, it is customary to begin each one as recto.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.3.5 -->
+<h5 id="h8.3.3.6">8.3.3.6. Epilogue, Conclusion</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.3.6">
+<p class="noindent">If your book has an Epilogue or Conclusion, it begins recto as a <a href=#h8.3.1.2">Chapter-Like Section</a> in main matter.</p>
+<p>An Epilogue is structurally like a Prologue, but tells the aftermath of the story. A Conclusion is like an Introduction, in which we step outside the main story. I am not aware of any book that has both; but if so, Epilogue precedes Conclusion.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.3.6 -->
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page10 -->
-<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page11" class="page">
+<h5 id="h8.3.3.7">8.3.3.7. End Notes, Appendix, etc.</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.3.7">
+<p class="noindent">If used, End Notes begin recto, as a <a href=#h8.3.1.2">Chapter-Like Section</a> in main matter. The same applies to an Appendix and like material.</p>
+<p>Page numbering continues Arabic. It may surprise you to learn that this is still main matter, but <i style="cursor:help" title="Chicago Manual of Style">CMoS</i> says so, and that's what was done in the few fictional books that have them, among those I have seen.</p>
+<p>The reason is that this kind of material, which is fictional, is actually the original author's writing, entwined with the main story. It was always intended to be part of the book. Never mind that it "looks like" academic material added later.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.3.7 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.3 -->
+<h4 id="h8.3.4">8.3.4. At Very End</h4>
+<div class="d4" id="d8.3.4">
+<p class="noindent">Just prior to <code>\end{document}</code>, use <code>\cleartoend</code>.</p>
+<p>The final page of your book is necessarily verso. P.O.D. printers (and many others) require that it be completely blank, because they will add some manufacturing information to that page. So, if the text of your book finishes on a recto page, <code>\cleartoend</code> adds one blank page. But if the text of your book finishes on a verso page, then <code>\cleartoend</code> adds <em>two</em> blank pages, so that the final page is blank verso.</p>
-<h2 id="h11">11. Chapter Structure</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="d11">
-<p class="noindent">This section describes how chapters, and chapter-like material such as Preface, are designed. The <i>novel</i> class has commands specifically for this purpose. Do not use the ordinary TeX <code>\chapter</code> command, or any other TeX partitioning such as <code>\section</code>.</p>
-<p>The last command of the document body must be \cleartoend. This ensures that the final page will be a blank verso, if necessary preceded by a blank recto.</p>
+<h5 id="h8.3.4.1">8.3.4.1. Backmatter? Not!</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.4.1">
+<p class="noindent">
+Once upon a time, when printing was not so electronically automated, it was difficult to add material to the end of a previously-typeset section of front matter. So, if there was a subsequent printing of the book, with new material that ought to go in front matter, the problem was solved by placing the new material in "back matter." Then, the original pagination did not have to be altered. To stress that the added material was not part of the original, it would have non-Arabic page numbering, which might be a continuation of lowercase roman numerals from where the front matter left off, or might begin with uppercase Roman numerals.</p>
+<p>A similar situation applied to critical editions of earlier works, which added material from different authors. The added material was never part of the original book.</p>
+<p>That is a situation you are never likely to address. When most authors speak about "back matter," what they mean is explanatory material that follows the end of the story. That is, anything after the final Chapter, Epilogue, or Conclusion. A good example can be found in J.R.R. Tolkien's <i>The Return of the King,</i> which has quite a bit of material following the end of the story. That material discusses the language and history of the Elves, and a variety of other things. But its page numbering continues Arabic. It looks like critical commentary, but it is part of Tolkien's original, fictional structure for the book. Thus, it is main matter.</p>
+<p>So, your book is unlikely to have true back matter. If you use the <code>\backmatter</code> command, it does nothing. If you really wish to change page numbering, then you must code it manually. This is not advised for P.O.D. books, as it many confuse someone performing quality inspection; true back matter is so rare.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.4.1 -->
-<h3 id="h11.1">11.1. ChapterStart Environment</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d11.1">
-<p class="noindent">Unless your book has numerous short, rapid-fire chapters, begin each chapter with the ChapterStart environment. Also do this for chapter-like sections such as Foreword, Preface, Introduction, Prologue, Epilogue, and other places where the design resembles a chapter:</p>
+<h5 id="h8.3.4.2">8.3.4.2. About the Author</h5>
+<div class="d5" id="d8.3.4.2">
+<p class="noindent">A hardcover book often has "About the Author" on the inside flap of its dust jacket. Softcover doesn't have a dust jacket, so one strategy is to add a leaf after the story finishes (but before <code>\cleartoend</code>) and place "About the Author" on its recto. That avoids repagination of the original. It is still treated as main matter, with continued (non-printing) Arabic page number. Thus:</p>
<p class="code"><code>
-\clearpage % or \cleartorecto<br/>
-% \thispagestyle{<em>choose</em>} % if not default<br/>
-% \SetVersoHeadText{<em>text</em>} % sometimes
-% \SetRectoHeadText{<em>text</em>} % sometimes
-\begin{ChapterStart}[<em>lines</em>]<br/>
-% contents of chapter start<br/>
-\end{ChapterStart
+.. and they rode off into the sunset. % end of story<br/>
+\cleartorecto<br/>
+\thispagestyle{empty}<br/>
+\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
+\ChapterTitle{About the Author}<br/>
+\end{ChapterStart}<br/>
+Dirk Hardcase is a former... etc.\par<br/>
+\cleartoend<br/>
+\end{document}
</code></p>
-<p>The environment reserves a block of space, default 10 lines high. You may globally change that value in the Preamble, using the <code>\SetChapterStartHeight{<em>lines</em>}</code> command.</p>
-<p>On a per-chapter basis, the height may be changed using the optional <i>lines</i> argument of the ChapterStart environment. For example, sometimes that is helpful if a chapter has only one or two lines on its final page; then, you can effectively move all lines forward, by reducing the height of its ChapterStart.</p>
-<p>In all cases, the height must be an integer, greater than or equal to 4.</p>
-<p>You can put almost anything you like within this environment. Its height does not shrink or expand with content. However, if you put too much for the reserved space, then the excess will flow out the bottom of the reserved area, and mingle with the main text below. That is usually undesirable. If you do put too much, no error or warning is generated (because it might have been by intent).</p>
-<p>Note that ChapterStart does not, by itself, begin a new page. You have to issue the <code>\clearpage</code> (or <code>\cleartorecto</code>) command before ChapterStart. This is to allow for exotic designs with small ChapterStart space, and more than one chapter per page. But if that is the nature of your book, have a look at the <code>\QuickChapter</code> command.</p>
-<p>If the header/footer style for a particular chapter is <i>not</i> the same as the ChapterStart default style, then locally over-ride the default using <code>\thispagestyle</code> <i>prior to</i> ChapterStart. See below.</p>
-<p>In some books that have headers, their content varies from chapter to chapter. Commands <code>\SetVersoHeadText</code> and <code>\SetRectoheadText</code> control that content. Once issued, they do not expire at the end of a chapter, but remain in effect until re-issued.</p>
+<p>• I suggest that if you wish to tell about yourself, you can put it on a web site instead, where you can easily edit or delete it.</p>
+</div><!-- end 8.3.4.2 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3.4 -->
+</div><!-- end 8.3 -->
-<h4 id="h11.1.1">11.1.1. Chapter Title, Subtitle, Deco</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.1,1">
-<p class="noindent">These commands are intended for use within the ChapterStart environment. In each case the optional <i>alignment</i> is <i>l</i> for left, <i>c</i> for center (default), <i>r</i> for right.</p>
-<p class="code">\ChapterTitle[<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text</em>}</p>
-<p>The chapter title will automatically use the font specifications of <i>chapterfont</i>, unless you locally over-ride them using other font commands.</p>
-<p class="code">\ChapterSubtitle[<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text</em>}</p>
-<p>The chapter subtitle will automatically use the font specifications of <i>subchfont</i>, unless you locally over-ride them using other font commands.</p>
-<p class="code">\ChapterDeco[<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text, image</em>}</p>
-<p>The chapter deco is a non-committal way to place almost anything. It uses the ordinary text font, unless you over-ride it with a font command. Perhaps you will use the <code>\decoglyph</code> command to pick an item from the deco font. You can also use an image.</p>
-<p>Each of the above commands is limited to one, non-wrapping line. However, they may be issued more than once in the same <i>ChapterStart</i>. So, if the chapter title requires two lines, use <code>\ChapterTitle</code> twice.<p>
-<p>If you don't like the vertical positioning, you can change it using <code>\vspace</code> commands. You will usually need to use <code>\vspace*</code> above the chapter title, so that it is not too high on the page.</p>
-</div>
-<h4 id="h11.1.2">11.1.2. Default Header/Footer at Chapter Start</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.1,2">
-<p>By default, <i>novel</i> automatically uses <code>\thispagestyle{footer}</code> when it sees the ChapterStart environment. Then, no header will print above the chapter start. However, if there is a footer, it will print.</p>
-<p>If you wish to use a different default behavior for ChapterStart, then write this command <i>in the Preamble</i>:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\SetChapterStart{<em>choice</em>}</code></p>
-<p>In the above, <i>choice</i> is one of the choices available for <code>\thispagestyle</code>, as listed below.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h11.1.3">11.1.3. <code>\thispagestyle</code> at Chapter Start</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.1.3">
-<p>No matter whether a book is fiction or nonfiction,the first page of a chapter almost never has a header. However, it may have a footer if the book design normally has one (typically the page number).</p>
-<p>If the setting provided by <code>\SetChapterStart</code> is inappropriate for a particular chapter (or anything using ChapterStart environment), then locally over-ride it using one of these choices:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\thispagestyle{footer}</code></p>
-<p>The above choice actually means, “footer, if normally available.” It does not create a footer that would not otherwise be present in your general book layout. This is the built-in default.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code></p>
-<p>The above choice prints neither header nor footer. Not best, since it is usually appropriate to print a footer when it exists.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\thispagestyle{dropfoliobeneath}</code></p>
-<p>The above choice is the same as \thispagestyle{footer}, if the layout has a footer. Otherwise, a fake footer is created just below the text block, in the lower margin. The page number is centered there. This choice can be used if your lower margin is much taller than the minimum required by the printer's safe clearance zone. Since TeX does not know what that requirement is, you will have to inspect the result yourself.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\thispagestyle{dropfolioinside}</code></p>
-<p>The above choice is the same as \thispagestyle{footer}, if the layout has a footer. Otherwise, it is very tricky. It reduces the height of the ChapterStart environment by one line. Then, the text on that page is moved upward by one line, leaving a vacancy where the last line would normally be. The page number is centered there. This does not intrude into the lower margin.</p>
-<p>The following image shows three pages of a Foreword, from a book that uses header but no footer. On its start page, the folio has been dropped inside. Color added for illustration.</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/dfi.png" width="534" height="267" alt="example of inside drop folio"/></p>
-<p>Note that the placement of page number does not honor \SetFootJump. The number is sized a little smaller than main text, but it is right where another line of text would be.</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\thispagestyle{forcenumber}</code></p>
-<p>The above choice is the same as \thispagestyle{footer}, if the layout has a footer. Otherwise, it assumes that the page number is located at the outside of a header, and prints only that outside header portion. This is a very rare situation that I have only seen in some nonfiction, where the page number of each new chapter (usually by different authors) must be printed somewhere on the page. Avoid it unless you are certain that you need it.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h11.1.4">11.1.4. ChapterStart With Image</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.1.4">
-<p class="noindent">You can use an image in chapter titles. If you place an image, use one of the image commands defined by <i>novel</i> elsewhere in the documentation. Any other method is likely to push the following text off-grid.</p>
-<p>Be sure that you are licensed to use the image. Many clipart catalogs "for personal use only," prohibit usage in commercial books. One possible source is <a href="http://openclipart.org" rel="external" target="new">openclipart.org</a> (note the <em>.org</em>).</p>
-
-<h5 id="h11.1.4.1">11.1.4.1 Text Over Image</h5>
-<div class="d5" id="d11.1.4.1">
-<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/ctimg35.png" width="79" height="196" alt="example of chapter title image, text over"/> You may position text over an image. Be aware that overlapping text and graphics may be interpreted as a mistake, by human reviewers. It is best to use black text, or grayscale text that is much darker than the underlying image. Results are uncertain if you try to place light text over a dark image.</p>
-<p>Example, where the command <code>\unifrac</code> calls for the font <i>UnifrakturMaguntia.ttf</i>. Note that the font command is <i>outside</i> \charscale:</p>
-<p class="code"><code><small>\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
-\BlockImage{sword.png} <span class="ap">% centered by default</span><br/>
-{\unifrak\centering\charscale[3,0pt,4\nbs]{35}\par}<br/>
-</small>\end{ChapterStart}</code></p>
-</div>
-
-<h5 id="h11.1.4.2">11.1.4.2. Text Within Image</h5>
-<div class="d5" id="d11.1.4.2">
-<p class="noindent">If the text is not ordinary black, or not much darker than the background image, then it is better to include the text as part of the raster image. The reason is that there is no "white ink." Although light text over a dark image may appear as expected in PDF, and print that way on many printers, there are many exceptions. If in doubt, ask your print service. In this example, the number is built into the image itself:</p>
-<p class="code"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/smfingerprint8.png" width="86" height="70" alt="example of chapter title image, raster text"/><code><small>\begin{ChapterStart}<br/>
-\BlockImage[l]{smfingerprint8.png}<br/>
-\end{ChapterStart}</small></code></p>
-</div></div><!-- end class="d4" -->
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h11.2">11.2. QuickChapter and Scene Breaks</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d11.2">
-<p class="noindent">These commands are used for indicating a break, without the formality of ChapterStart.</p>
-<p>You will need to inspect your layout, to ensure that the break does not occur at an inconvenient location, such as at the bottom of the page. This is not automated. If the break occurs in a bad place, you will simply have to re-write so that it occurs elsewhere.</p>
-
-<h4 id="h11.2.1">11.2.1. <code>\QuickChapter[<em>linelength</em>]{<em>chapter title</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.2.1">
-<p class="noindent">If your novel is the kind of story that consists of numerous short chapters in rapid succession, then you probably do not wish to begin each chapter on its own page, with a block of whitespace at the top. The \QuickChapter command provides an alternative to ChapterStart.</p>
-<p><code>\QuickChapter</code> inserts two blank lines. In the gap, the chapter title is left-justified using <i>subchfont</i> (not <i>chapterfont</i>). It is slightly raised from the normal baseline, because this looks better; but the following text is back on-grid. By default, the start of the following text will be un-indented.</p>
-<p>If the optional <i>linelength</i> is provided, then a dash will be written after the title, at the position and thickness typical of the em dash in <i>subchfont</i>. If <i>linelength</i> is specified in units of length, then that will be the length of the line. But if <i>linelength</i> is an asterisk, then the line will fill to the right margin.</p>
-<p>Note that this command is too obtrusive for mere scene changes within a chapter.</p>
-<p>Example:</p>
-<p class="code"><code><small>Then he looked at me with a sneer, and barked, ``You better haul your can over to Vinny's joint, before the Boss finds out.''\par<br/>
-\QuickChapter[3em]{16. At Vinny's}<br/>
-So I took his advice, and hauled my can over to Vinny's. It was everything I had expected, and worse.\par<br/>
-The bouncer wasn't the biggest one I'd ever seen, but he was the ugliest. ...</small></code></p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/quickchapter.png" width="629" height="240" alt="quick chapter"/></p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h11.2.2">11.2.2. Scene Breaks</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.2.2">
-<p class="noindent">There are several commands dedicated to the purpose of scene breaks.</p>
-<p class="code"><b><code>\scenebreak</code></b> inserts a one-line blank skip. The following line of text is not indented.</p>
-<p class="code"><b><code>\sceneline</code></b> inserts a one-line skip, containing a short centered line. The following line of text is not indented.</p>
-<p class="code"><b><code>\scenestars</code></b> inserts a one-line skip, containing three spaced, centered asterisks. The following line of text is not indented.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:20px">Examples:</p>
-<p class="code"><img style="float:right; margin-left:16px;" src="html-resources/scenebreaks.png" width="331" height="236" alt="scene breaks"/>
-<code><small>
-\noindent It was a dark and stormy night.\par<br/>
-Lord Withens, the last of his line, hurried through the gloom to Castle McWhistle, where Lady McWhistle awaited.\par<br/>
-\scenebreak<br/>
-Well, maybe it was not very dark.\par<br/>
-But to Lord Withens, it seemed dark enough. Or rather, he hoped it was dark enough. Lord McWhistle was suspicious.\par<br/>
-\sceneline<br/>
-Actually, it was not all that stormy, either. But the Withens clan never tolerated drizzle, much less a storm.\par<br/>
-Who could blame them? It's not like they lived in Italy.\par<br/>
-\scenestars<br/>
-Ah, such ill fortune haunted the Withens!\par<br/>
-Unfortunately, novelists of that era had so little to write about, or they would have chosen another family to pursue.\par
-</small></code></p>
-<p>If you are using \scenebreak and the gap occurs at the very bottom or top of a page, then manually substitute \sceneline or \scenestars there. This is a standard way to indicate that the gap is intentional. The substitution is not automatic.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h11.2.3">11.2.3. <code>\IndentAfterScenebreak</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.2.3">
-<p class="noindent">This global command may only be used in the Preamble.</p>
-<p>Normally, text begins without a paragraph indent, after each scene break. This is standard in fiction. If you prefer that each new scene begins indented, use this command. It works with <code>\scenebreak</code>, <code>\sceneline</code>, and <code>\scenestars</code>.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h11.2.4">11.2.4. <code>\linebreak</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.2.4">
-<p class="noindent">The general method for breaking a line, without creating a new paragraph, is to use the double backslash <code>\\</code>. The break will be ragged-right. This is suitable for such things as poetry, and other places where the break does not need to be justified.</p>
-<p>In some cases, you need the break to be justified. Command <code>\linebreak</code> does that. Use with caution, since lines earlier in the paragraph will not reflow! Instead, the broken line will justify by itself, possibly resulting in excessive stretch.</p>
-<p>One possible use of <code>\linebreak</code> is when layout places something very short at the calculated break. This often happens in English first-person narration, where the word "I" is common. Then, placing <code>\linebreak</code> just before the "I" is likely to result in better appearance. But you will need to inspect the result, both before and after the manually inserted break.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h11.2.5">11.2.5. Widows and Orphans (Clubs)</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d11.2.5">
-<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> class applies virtually no penalty to widows and orphans (clubs). There are good reasons for this.</p>
-<p>In many other document classes, different pages can have different numbers of lines, to avoid widows and orphans. This is accomplished by stretching inter-line or inter-paragraph spaces. That kind of strategy is unacceptable in a novel, which is expected to have an identical line grid on facing pages.</p>
-<p>Also, a novel typically has many short paragraphs, often consisting of dialog. It becomes problematic to deal with them, without causing excess hyphenation and other unpleasant results.</p>
-<p>So, <i>novel</i> lets widows and orphans happen. This is common practice for the typesetting of many actual novels by major authors, with major publishers, as seen in the library.</p>
-<p>But do inspect your own work for widows and (especially) orphans that result in poor typesetting. Usually widows are not the problem, since they fill a line at the end of a page. But an orphan may only occupy a small part of its line at the top of a page, possibly as little as one word. There are also "paragraph orphans," where the final word (maybe even just a hyphenated syllable) is on a line by itself.</p>
-<p>Since you are writing your own book, you have the liberty to edit your text, so that problematic paragraph layouts disappear. Really, that's the only way to do it. TeX cannot read your mind.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page11 -->
+</div><!-- end 8 -->
+</div><!-- end page08 -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page12" class="page">
-
-
-<h2 id="h12">12. Footnotes, Endnotes, Back Matter</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="d12">
-<p class="noindent">The <i>novel</i> class has <em>limited</em> support for footnotes, because they are rarely used in fiction. Nevertheless, I have seen them. The notes may be factual or imaginary.</p>
-<p>If there are more than a handful of notes, then use endnotes to avoid a constant disruption of the text flow. You may use both footnotes and endnotes.</p>
-<p>Footnotes and endnotes use superscripts at the appropriate point in the main text. The actual footnote or endnote begins with ordinary text, not a superscript. You can control the appearance of superscripts using <code>\SetMarkers</code> and related commands. See the section regarding fonts, earlier in this document.</p>
-
-<h3 id="h12.1">12.1 Footnotes</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d12.1">
-<p>Footnotes appear at the bottom of the page where they are placed. There is no option to accumulate them to another location. Very long footnotes might straddle pages, but that situation is uncommon in fiction (and not within your control).</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\footnote[<em>option</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code></p>
-<p>The <code>\footnote</code> command places a superscript "marker" at the place where the command is written. The included text is written at the bottom of the page, beneath a short line that separates it from the main text. The footnote text is at smaller size and line skip, and has the same marker placed before it (but not as superscript). All of this is automatic.</p>
-<p>You may, if necessary, apply some style to the footnote text. For example, if you are referring to another work, its title might be in italics.</p>
-<p>Normally, no option is used. If you use option <i>0</i> (zero) then no marker will appear in the main text, and the footnote text will also appear without a marker. The count of markers is not incremented. This applies whether the markers are numbers or symbols.</p>
-<p>• Trick: If you are using footnote numbers, but wish to place a special footnote using a symbol, you can do it manually. For example:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>He blinked.*\footnote[0]{* No, he didn't.}</code></p>
-<p>• Avoid use of underlining, as it is considered bad style, due to visual distraction. If necessary, use italics.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h12.2">12.2 Endnotes</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d12.2">
-<p class="noindent">Endnotes are sometimes used in fiction. In general, the endnotes are also fictional.</p>
-<p>You may use both footnotes and endnotes, if you wish. However, if endnotes are used, then footnotes must be marked by symbols, rather than by numbers, to avoid confusion. The counts for endnotes and footnotes are independent.</p>
-
-<h4 id="h12.2.1">12.2.1 <code>\endnote</code>, <code>\ResetEndnote</code>, <code>\memo{}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d12.2.1">
-<p class="noindent">The <code>\endnote</code> command inserts a numerical superscript in the text. A running count of the numbers is automatically updated. This command does nothing else.</p>
-<p>The endnote numbers run continuously through the text, without reset. If you wish to reset the count (perhaps at new chapters), you have to do it manually, using <code>\ResetEndnote</code>.</p>
-<p>When you use <code>\endnote</code>, there is no provision for the actual note. The <i>novel</i> class does not know, and does not care, whether or not you actually write the endnote later. If you wish to write a reminder to yourself, about why you put an endnote marker there, use <code>\memo{<i>text</i>}</code>. The argument of <code>\memo</code> will not be printed, and will not be remembered for later use. Note that <code>\memo</code> is not like the percent <code>%</code> comment, because anything following <code>\memo</code> will be honored.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="h12.2.2">12.2.2 <code>\endnotetext{<em>number</em>}{<em>text</em>}</code></h4>
-<div class="d4" id="d12.2.2">
-<p class="noindent">The <code>\endnotetext</code> command is a simple way of styling endnotes. You do not have to use it, if you have your own method. These may be placed per-chapter, or at the final end. The <i>novel</i> class does not keep track of them.</p>
-<p>The first argument is usually the endnote number. A period and following space will automatically be added, so that the text of the note is block-indented. You may use <code>\emph{<em>number</em>}</code> if you prefer the number to be in italics.</p>
-<p>The text must be one paragraph. Be sure to end with <code>\par</code> or equivalent.</p>
-<p>If the note needs more than one paragraph, then continue like this, with an empty note number:</p>
-<p class="code"><code>\endnotetext{}{\indent <em>text</em>}</code></p>
-<p>• In <i>novel</i>, you must create and style the page(s) with endnotes yourself! There is no provision for bibliography, and no provision for any other kind of automated styling. This is because the endnotes, being fictional, are more like the main text than any academic style. Think of the endnotes as just another chapter, but starting with something that identifies them as being endnotes. Pagination continues as main matter, with Arabic page numbers. This is recommended by the <i>Chicago Manual of Style</i>, for both fiction and nonfiction.</p>
-<p>Example of an endnote:</p>
-<p class="code">
-<code><small>
-\endnotetext{9}{Yang Sho-Nuff was the twelfth son of the elder god of the ancient Who-Zit Clan, with power over the forces of rust.\par}<br/>
-\endnotetext{}{\indent However, since this was not yet the Iron Age, the terrible might of Yang Sho-Nuff was largely unrecognized.\par}<br/>
-\endnotetext{10}{As Professor Withens notes in his treatise, \emph{When Sho-Nuff Was Not Enough}, the ceremony of daily human sacrifice had a devastating effect on the tribal population.\par}
-</small></code></p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/endnotetext.png" width="447" height="151" alt="using endnotetext"/></p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h12.3">12.3 Regarding Back Matter</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d12.3">
-<p class="noindent">In <i>novel</i>, <code>\backmatter</code> command is an alias for <code>\cleartorecto</code>. It does nothing else. In particular, it does not change the page number style, or reset the page number. Back matter is rare nowadays, in fiction and nonfiction alike.</p>
-<p>Anything following the end of your story is still treated as main matter. Epilogue, Conclusion, Endnotes, Appendix, whatever: all of them continue the Arabic page numbers. This is recommended by <i>CMoS</i> and is also best on a practical basis. For example, J.R.R. Tolkien's <i>The Return of the King</i> has very extensive post-story material, such as a history of the Elves, some linguistics, and notes. Nevertheless, the page numbering is Arabic, continued from the main story without reset.</p>
-<p>Of course, you may add anything you wish, after your story ends. Call it what you wish. Such material must begin recto, and may have its own cover page.</p>
-<p>If your book is available in both hardcover and softcover, then the dust jacket of the hardcover may have "About the Author" on its interior flap. This information is not present on the soft cover, which has no flap. You may, if you wish, place it as an About the Author section, recto, after your story ends. However, I sugest that such material is better on a web site, where you can change or remove it.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h12.4">12.4 <code>\cleartoend</code></h3>
-<div class="d3" id="d12.4">
-<p class="noindent">The last command of the document body must be <code>\cleartoend</code>. This ensures that the final page will be a blank verso, if necessary preceded by a blank recto.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page12 -->
-<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-<div id="page13" class="page">
-
-
-<h2 id="h13">13. Cover Artwork</h2>
-<div class="d2" id="12">
-<p class="noindent">This portion serves a limited purpose. It is for the benefit of those who need to submit color print cover artwork in the form of a PDF/X-1a:2001 file, with the artwork as CMYK and 240% ink limit. This is the format required by some American print-on-demand services. It is also generally acceptable to others, whose requirements are less restrictive.</p>
-<p>Example cover artwork can be found at the <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://github.com/RobtAll/novel/">GitHub project page</a>, in the "other" folder.</p>
-<p><b>Before you begin:</b> Do you really need to do this? Many print-on-demand services are perfectly happy to accept something such as an ordinary RGB jpeg image, as long as it has the correct size (with bleed area). They can easily process it for print production in a few moments, using professional software. If they do it, then whether or not you are surprised by the resulting colors, will depend on whether or not your original image is within the printer gamut. In other cases, the print service prefers (or insists) that you do the image print production processing yourself. Then, you get to see an emulation of the print colors <em>before</em> you submit the file, and can change your artwork if the resulting colors are disappointing.</p>
-<p>The <em>novel</em> document class does not provide any support for creating the original artwork, either image or text. In fact, TeX is not the best way to do that. Use a graphics program (such as the free GIMP) to do your artwork, including text. In the end, your text will be rasterized, just like any background image. For this reason, avoid using small text, or consider using a sans-serif typeface on the cover (even though there is no sans-serif in the book itself).</p>
-<p>DO NOT PLACE A BARCODE. If your print service requests a white rectangle where the barcode will go, then include it in your image. Almost every print service is willing to create the barcode from your ISBN, and place the barcode image into your PDF during post-processing. Most of them even demand that they do it themselves. Do-it-yourself barcodes are incompatible with the following instructions.</p>
-<p><b>DISCLAIMER:</b> This documentation, and its accompanying software, is offered AS-IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USE ONLY AT YOUR OWN RISK. The author is an amateur who does not profess expertise in these matters. The best I can say is, "It works for me."</p>
-
-<h3 id="h13.1">13.1. Begin With PNG</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="12.1">
-<p class="noindent">Create your artwork, including all text (but not barcode or barcode text) using whatever means you have. How you do it is not relevant. To follow these instructions, you must provide the artwork as a flattened (no transparency) PNG format image, at correct size (including bleed area) and resolution (dpi).</p>
-<p style="margin-top:8px"><b>Example:</b> Suppose your book is 5.5" x 8.5" softcover, a typical size for American fiction. Based on its page count and paper, you are told that the spine width must be 0.62". The required bleed width, on all four sides, must be 0.125".</p>
-<p>Then, the image is 0.125 + 5.5 + 0.62 + 5.5 + 0.125 = 11.87in wide.</p>
-<p>The image is 0.125 + 8.5 + 0.125 = 8.75in high.</p>
-<p>At 300dpi resolution (a typical value) the image must be 11.87 x 300 = 3561 pixels wide, and 8.75 x 300 = 2625 pixels high. In case of fractional pixels, round upward. The exact pixel count is important.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:8px"><img src="html-resources/example-adobergb.png" class="floatright" width="445" height="328" alt="example rgb image"/> It is best to use the AdobeRGB1998 color workspace, or equivalent. But you can also use sRGB, or equivalent, and in many cases you will not notice much difference. It is helpful to attach (embed) the workspace color profile in your PNG image, especially if it is something other than AdobeRGB1998 or sRGB. Note that the workspace is NOT the color profile of your monitor (if you have it). If you do not attach (embed) the workspace color profile, then remember whether you were using AdobeRGB1998 or sRGB. If you make a mistake here, it is not fatal. It merely means that some colors (particularly bright greens and blue-greens) will print somewhat brighter or duller than you were expecting.</p>
-<p>When done, export it as a flattened PNG.</p>
-<p>If you are provided with an image other than PNG, you have to convert it to PNG. No alternative. It is easy enough to use GIMP to convert most image formats. If you have a PDF (which is not already in the required format), GIMP can probably open it as an image. Be sure you import it with the correct resolution. Again, the pixel width and height are important.</p>
-<p><b>Cover Text:</b> These instructions assume that your cover text is rasterized, and is part of the image rather than vector text. In many cases your graphics program has enough text capability to do what you need.</p>
-<p>If you wish to use TeX to typeset the cover text, do it this way: Use TeX to create one or more PDFs of the cover text, without images. You can create several blocks of text at different pages sizes, if you wish. Open your background artwork in GIMP. Add a new transparent layer above it. Open a text PDF in GIMP. Choose resolution 300dpi, full antialiasing, grayscale or color. The opened text is now a raster image. Copy it, and paste it atop the transparent layer. Anchor it. Use Color: Color to Alpha: white to alpha filter. That removes the white area from the PDF image. Finally, move the text to where it should go. You can rotate the text 90 degrees, but do not resize it! If you would rather the text be at a different size, then either change it in TeX, or use a different resolution when you open the PDF in GIMP. Note that even when you open the PDF at a different resolution, it will still be at 300dpi when you place it over the 300dpi background image; but its size will change.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h13.2">13.2. Get Some Software</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="12.2">
-<p class="noindent">Get the 238% total ink limit color profile from <a href="http://www.newselfpublishing.com/TotalInkLimit.html" rel="external" target="new">Aaron Shepard</a>. This does the magic of ensuring that you comply with the 240% ink limit (the profile provides a little headroom, which seems useful). It can also be used for softproofing, if you know how to do that. This is not the only possible profile, but it seems to me that it is the best of several available. A good alternative s from <a class="external" rel="external" target="new" href="https://indesignsecrets.com/force-color-images-cmyk-240-ink-limit.php">David Blatner</a> (find "Here's a simple one" on that page).</p>
-<p>Included in the <i>novel</i> documentation <i>extras</i> folder is an open-source color profile for sRGB (file <i>srgb.icc</i>). There is also an open-source Equivalent to AdobeRGB (file <i>crgb.icc</i>). You will be using these when you convert your PNG image to a JPG in CMYK color space. I can think of no technical need to use the "real" profiles that may be lurking somewhere in your computer. These profiles are cross-platform.</p>
-<p>Get GraphicsMagick or ImageMagick. On Linux, you can install it via your system package manager. On Windows, get GraphicsMagick Q16 binaries for your system (32 or 64 bit) from <a href="https://sourceforge.net/projects/graphicsmagick/files/graphicsmagick-binaries/" rel="external" target="new">SourceForge</a>. I am told that versions for Mac are available via homebrew and macports, but again, I do not have a Mac, so I cannot check that. Or, get ImageMagick Q16 for various platforms from <a href="https://www.imagemagick.org/script/download.php" rel="external" target="new">here</a>.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h13.3">13.3. Convert Your Image to CMYK at 240% (or less) Ink Limit</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="12.3">
-<p class="noindent"><img src="html-resources/example-cmyk238.png" class="floatright" width="445" height="328" alt="example cmyk238 image, back to rgb"/> At right, you can see an emulation of the above image, softproofed to CMYK at 238% ink limit. It is not the CMYK file itself, but an RGB image that is supposed to help you visualize what happens during conversion. The original image contained colors that didn't fit the gamut of the printing process. Nevertheless, it is very close, because (in the original) I avoided using much color that I knew would not convert well.</p>
-<p><b>Get ready:</b> Make a copy of the above 238% (or 240%) ink limit color profile, and re-name the copy as <i>240.icc</i>. I will call your original PNG image <i>yourimage.png</i>. Put this image, the <i>240.icc</i> file, and files <i>srgb.icc</i> and <i>crgb.icc</i> in a single working folder.</p>
-<p>I will also assume that the image resolution is <i>300dpi</i>. If it is something else, then modify <i>300</i> to the other number, when you see it below.</p>
-<p><i>Note: Each of the following boxed commands is a single command line. You may need to scroll the box to the right, or the text may wrap, depending on how you view this file.</i></p>
-<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 1:</b> Open a Terminal (Command Prompt) and navigate to that folder.</p>
-<p>In the following commands, the initial "gm" calls GraphicsMagick (same code Linux and Windows). If you prefer ImageMagick, then eliminate the initial "gm" on Linux, or change the "gm" to "magick" on Windows.</p>
-<div class="codeblock">
-<p><code>gm convert yourimage.png embedded.icc</code></p>
-</div>
-<p>The above command may return the message "No color profile available" and generate a zero-byte embedded.icc file. Not a problem. Discard the zero-byte file. But if it generates a non-zero embedded.icc file, keep it.</p>
-<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 2:</b> Next (note the file extensions):</p>
-<div class="codeblock">
-<p><code>gm convert -strip yourimage.png yourimage-stripped.tif</code></p>
-</div>
-<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 3:</b> At this point, there are three possibilities:</p>
-<p><b>(a)</b> You have a non-zero embedded.icc file. In this case:</p>
-<div class="codeblock">
-<p><code>gm convert -profile embedded.icc -profile 240.icc yourimage-stripped.tif yourimage-temp.tif</code></p>
-</div>
-<p><b>(b)</b> No embedded.icc, but you know that the artwork was create using AdobeRGB1998 workspace, or equivalent. Then:</p>
-<div class="codeblock">
-<p><code>gm convert -profile crgb.icc -profile 240.icc yourimage-stripped.tif yourimage-temp.tif</code></p>
-</div>
-<p><b>(c)</b> Neither of the above. The image is probably sRGB (default). Then:</p>
-<div class="codeblock">
-<p><code>gm convert -profile srgb.icc -profile 240.icc yourimage-stripped.tif yourimage-temp.tif</code></p>
-</div>
-<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 4:</b> Now, regardless of which possibility you used above:</p>
-<div class="codeblock">
-<p><code>gm mogrify -strip yourimage-temp.tif</code></p>
-</div>
-<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 5:</b> And finally:</p>
-<div class="codeblock">
-<p><code>gm convert -units PixelsPerInch -density 300 -quality 100 yourimage-temp.tif yourimage-cmyk240.jpg</code></p>
-</div>
-<p style="margin-top:16px"><b>Step 6:</b> Now verify your work:</p>
-<div class="codeblock">
-<p><code>gm identify -verbose yourimage-cmyk240.jpg</code></p>
-</div>
-<p>The report should show that the image is CMYK, that it is at 300 pixels/inch, and that there is NO entry for "Profile-color". It will not have anything to say about ink limit, or SWOP.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h13.4">13.4. Convert your CMYK Image to PDF/X.</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="12.4">
-<p class="noindent">Up to now, you did not need TeX. Now you do. Be sure that you have a working TeX installation, with the <em>novel</em> document class package.</p>
-<p>In folder (your TeX root)/doc/lualatex/novel/extras you will find file "novel-cover-template.tex". Place a copy in the same working folder as your image, and modify it as needed.</p>
-<p><code>\SetMediaSize</code> refers to the full size of the image, with units (usually in). This includes the bleed box. For example, <code>\SetMediaSize{11.87in}{8.75in}</code>.</p>
-<p><code>\SetTrimSize</code> refers to the trimmed image, without bleed. For example, <code>\SetTrimSize{11.62in}{8.5in}</code>.</p>
-<p><code>\SetPDFX[CGATSTR001]{X-1a:2001}</code> will get you "US Web Coated SWOP v2" output intent (most common the USA), and PDF/X-1a:2001 compliance. The Output Intent *.icc color profile will NOT be embedded, because this is almost always the way that print services want it. The PDF contains a code identifying the intent, so there is no need to embed the color profile (and disadvantages to embedding it). In the unlikely event that they demand the Output Intent color profile embedded, put an asterisk on the command.</p>
-<p>For compliance you need to use <code>\SetTitle</code>. The title for this file might not be the title of your book, because this file isn't your book. Ask you print service what they want. Same with <code>\SetAuthor</code>.</p>
-<p>You can use <code>\SetApplication</code> and <code>\SetProducer</code> to change internal identifiers. Don't use these unless you have a reason.</p>
-<p><code>\SetCoverImage</code> is self-explanatory. Must have file extension jpg, jpeg, JPG, or JPEG. Must be CMYK. Note that TeX cannot verify whether the image is in correct color space. It will compile, even if the image is wrong. Beware!</p>
-<p>Do not attempt to write anything between <code>\begin{document}</code> and <code>\end{document}</code>. If you erroneously put some text there, the document will probably compile, and it may even be a valid PDF/X file. However, the resulting text color will almost surely be wrong. If so, the problem will be detected when you submit your file (wrong ink limit or color space).</p>
-<p>Compiling may take a little longer than expected. If your TeX system opens a PDF viewer automatically, the image might be missing (or partial) until a few seconds after the viewer opens. Be patient. The file size is large.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="h13.5">13.5. Final Check</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="12.5">
-<p class="noindent">Open the PDF in Adobe Reader, which does a trick that no other free software will do, to my knowledge. If your platform does not have Adobe Reader, then find a friend who has it. May be a different platform.</p>
-<p>In Adobe Reader, go to Edit, Preferences, Documents. Check "Save As optimizes for fast web view." Then go to Edit, Preferences, Page Display. Check "Show art, trim, and bleed boxes." Then OK.</p>
-<p>Open your PDF. You should see a light green box, just inside the image boundary. This shows the Trim Area. This box does not print; it is only for visualization. Go to File, Properties, Fonts. There should be no fonts listed.</p>
-<p>Then, "Save As" the same file name (or another one, if you prefer). This will optimize the file. You probably do not need to do that, but it does not hurt, and a few services expect it.</p>
-<p>There will always be some difference between color as viewed on your monitor, and color as printed. This is due to the difference between emitted light (your monitor) and reflected light (print). In professional use, the monitor will be calibrated, and operated at a specific screen brightness. The print will be viewed under lighting with a specific color temperature and illumination. Your own colors are not that critical, are they? If you have a calibrated monitor, and view the PDF and images in color-managed software, then what you see on your computer will be reasonably close to what prints. If your monitor is not calibrated, or you are not using color-managed software, then the printed cover may have its greens a bit more colorful than you were expecting. That doesn't mean there will be a greenish cast. It merely means that things such as spring leaves and shamrocks will be a bit greener (in print) than you expected.</p>
-<p><b>Remember the Disclaimer!</b> Your PDF file should now be ready for submission. Only "should," not "is," because this documentation and its accompanying software comes without warranty. Submit at your own risk!</p>
-<p>All I can say is that it "works for me." Screenshot from Adobe Acrobat Pro:</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/verified238.png" width="700" height="446" alt="works for me"/></p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
-</div><!-- end page13 -->
-<!-- ************************************************************ -->
-
-<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<div id="pageA" class="page">
-<h2 id="hA">Appendix A. Book Terminology and Manufacturing</h2>
+<h2 id="hA">Appendix A. <img src="html-resources/amb.png" width="30" height="22" alt="emergency icon"/> Emergency Clinic: Rework Layout</h2>
<div class="d2" id="dA">
-<p class="noindent">Most authors in P.O.D. use an ordinary word processor, particularly MS Word. For that reason, many print services, and most online user forums, refer to the terminology and settings of MS Word, rather than to the meanings in traditional book publishing. In the case of images, Photoshop settings are often described.</p>
-<p>Since you are neither using MS Word nor Photoshop, you must understand the terminology of printed book design. Then, you can apply that knowledge to the physical layout and internal design of your book, using <i>novel</i> document class.</p>
+<div style="padding: 6px 0px 6px 0px; margin:0px 32px 6px 16px; background:#ffe7e7 none">
+<p class="noindent">Situation: Your book is designed for Trim Size 5.25x8, one of several widely-used American sizes. You have put many hours of work into getting just the right line breaks within paragraphs, and just the right pagination. It looks beautiful. But then you get an e-mail from a British distributor. Could you change to British size B novel format, essentially 5.06x7.81 Trim Size?</p>
+<p>Sure, you say. Just needs a little math. Knock 0.095" off each margin. What could be easier? So you try that, but the printer rejects your file. It seems that your original margins were as narrow as they could be, per the printer's specifications. You cannot make them any narrower.</p>
+<p>But if you re-size the book and don't knock the margins down, then the text width and height won't be the same. Your text doesn't fit the way it used to. All your lines re-flow, the page breaks are different, and all that work you put into getting just the right appearance must be re-done.</p>
+<p><em>Oh, nooooo ...</em></p>
+</div>
+<p>Relax. Here is all you need to do: add <code>\ReworkTrimSize{5.06in}{7.81in}</code>. That's it. Your existing margins will be preserved. The font size, and line skip, will be cleverly re-scaled to fit the new dimensions. Paragraphs and pagination are the same as before.</p>
+<p>There are two Rework commands available. One changes the Trim Size without changing the margins. The other changes the margins without changing the Trim Size. If you wish to change both Trim Size and margins, you may use both commands.</p>
-<h3 id="hA.1">A.1 Sheet, Page, Leaf</h3>
+<h3 id="hA.1">A.1. <code>\ReworkTrimSize{<em>width</em>}{<em>height</em>}</code></h3>
<div class="d3" id="dA.1">
-<p class="noindent">A <b>sheet</b> of paper is a single, physical piece of paper, regardless of whether anything is printed on it, or where. Often, paper starts out as a large sheet that will subsequently be cut into smaller sheets. The size doesn't matter. A sheet of paper is, in ordinary understanding, a piece of paper.</p>
-<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/page-leaf.png" width="490" height="155" alt="page, leaf"/> In a finished book, a <b>page</b> is one side of a <b>leaf</b>. Thus, there are always exactly twice as many pages are there are leaves. From the manufacturer's point of view, a 240-page (double-sided printing) book has 120 leaves, regardless of whether or not anything is printed on the pages, or how they are numbered.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p>This command changes the <em>existing</em> Trim Size. If you do not use the <code>\SetTrimSize</code> command, then the existing Trim Size is the default. But if you do use <code>\SetTrimSize</code>, then you must leave that command as-is, and place <code>\ReworkTrimSize</code> later in the Preamble.</p>
+<p>If you used <code>\SetMediaSize</code>, you may leave that command as-is, or change it if you wish; the Trim Size does not care.</p>
+</div><!-- A.1 -->
-<h3 id="hA.2">A.2 Folio, Spine</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="dA.2">
-<p class="noindent">Imagine a single sheet of 8.5"Wx11"H paper. It has two pages, since you can print on both sides (even if one is empty).</p>
-<p>If you fold that sheet in half across its width, it is still one sheet. But now you have a <b>folio</b>, consisting of two leaves of size 5.5"Wx8.5"H. Each leaf has two pages, so you now have four pages. The fold is at the <b>spine</b>.</p>
-<p>Caution: The term "folio" has several different meanings, even in the narrow field of book publishing. It may refer to folded paper, as mentioned above. Or it may refer to a particular sheet size of paper ("foolscap"). Or, it may simply refer to the number printed on a page. This last use of "folio" is discussed in the context of headers and footers.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<h3 id="hA.2">A.2. <code>\ReworkMargins{<em>top</em>}{<em>outside</em>}{<em>bottom</em>}{<em>inside</em>}</code></h3>
+<div class="d3" id="AF.2">
+<p>This command changes the <em>existing</em> margins. If you do not use the <code>\SetMargins</code> command, then the existing margins are the defaults. But if you do use <code>\SetMargins</code>, then you must leave that command as-is, and place <code>\ReworkMargins</code> later in the Preamble.</p>
+</div><!-- end A.2 -->
-<h3 id="hA.3">A.3 Signature, Imposition</h3>
+<h3 id="hA.3">A.3. Example of Rework</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dA.3">
-<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/signature.png" width="133" height="102" alt="signature"/> When a book is commercially manufactured, folios are nested to form <b>signatures</b>. The number of folios in a signature is typically 6 to 16 (that would be 24 to 64 pages). If you were hand-making a single book at home, you might use only one folio per signature.</p>
-<p>Now, think about how those pages must be ordered. Suppose a book contains a single signature of 4 folios. The outermost folio is printed with pages 1 and 16 on one side (before folding), and pages 2 and 15 on its other side. The next nested folio has pages 3/14 and 4/13. Nested inside is 5/12 and 6/11. Innermost is 7/10 and 8/9.</p>
-<p>Re-arranging the page order is part of the <b>imposition</b> process. The process may involve tweaking the position of each page slightly, to account for offset due to paper thickness when the folios are grouped into signatures. If numerous folios are printed on a larger sheet of paper before cutting, the process may involve rotating folios so that they waste less paper.</p>
-<p>Your home printer software can probably do imposition for a single-folio design (four pages). Anything beyond that is left to professional software. You don't need to do it. The print service does it for you, automatically.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p>Here is an example of the Rework commands in use. When the layout is reworked, the font size and (if necessary) baseline skip is scaled to fit the new dimensions, in a way that preserves the original paragraphs and pagination. This is done in a single pass: The method simultaneously works and re-works the layout.</p>
+<p>In the following example, the original font size is 11pt, and the baselineskip (calculated based on other factors) is 14.377pt. After rework, the font size is automatically re-calculated to 10.468pt, with lineskip 13.883pt.</p>
+<p class="code">
+<code>\documentclass{novel}<br/>
+\SetTrimSize{5.25in}{8in} % Original. American.<br/>
+\SetMargins{0.36in}{0.4in}{0.38in}{0.65in} % Original. American<br/>
+\ReworkTrimSize{5.06in}{7.81in} % New. Equivalent to British 129mmW x 198mmH.<br/>
+\ReworkMargins{12mm}{12mm}{12mm}{15mm} % New. British.
+</code></p>
+<p>Result with original layout (above Rework commands commented out):</p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/originalspread.png" width="726" height="544" alt="original spread, before rework"/></p>
+<p>Result after Rework:</p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/reworkedspread.png" width="700" height="531" alt="spread after rework"/></p>
+</div><!-- end A.3 -->
-<h3 id="hA.4">A.4 Perfect Binding</h3>
+<h3 id="hA.4">A.4. Limitations of Rework</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dA.4">
-<p class="noindent"><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/perfectbinding.png" width="160" height="290" alt="perfect binding"/> Most modern softcover books (and some inexpensive hardcovers) are manufactured using a process named <b>Perfect Binding</b>.
-<p>In Perfect Binding, the signatures are clamped together, and the folded area is removed by a cutting machine. Then there are no longer any folios, just individual leaves.</p>
-<p>The leaves are glued together at the spine, possibly with reinforcement. Note that the glue is not merely at the edge of the leaves; it penetrates the paper slightly, for better strength. Finally, the cover is attached.</p>
-<p>The Perfect Binding method is inexpensive, and is more than adequate for a book that will not receive rough handling. Whether using P.O.D. or a major mass-quantity publisher, most softcover books have been made this way for a long time. Unless you know that your book will be acquired by libraries for addition to their long-term literary collection, there is little reason to have your book manufactured by any other process. The possible exception would be books for small children, which receive rough handling under all circumstances.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p>• The technique has been tested, but it might not always work. Be sure to inspect the result carefully.</p>
+<p>• If you use Rework to make a radical size change, then the resulting font size or line skip might be unattractive.</p>
+<p>• If the reworked pages have one less line than expected (or one more), this is due to roundoff in the calculations. It can usually be fixed by adding or substracting as little as <code>0.001\nbs</code> from the top or bottom rework margin.</p>
+<p>• The biggest obstacle occurs when you specify some internal length in terms of absolute units (such as pt). It is always best to use relative units (such as <i>em</i>, or sometimes <code>\nbs</code>), so that they can be scaled along with the text:</p>
+<p class="code">
+Bad: <code>\hspace{6pt}</code> Good: <code>\hspace{0.5em}</code><br/>
+Bad: <code>\kern1pt</code> Good: <code>\kern.08em</code><br/>
+Bad: <code>\vspace{0.5in}</code> Good: <code>\vspace{2.4\nbs}</code>
+</p>
+<p>• When you use Rework, images are <em>not</em> scaled. Thus, they will have a different relationship to the surrounding text than they did before. In many cases, this is not a problem. However, an un-scaled image may disrupt the flow of text, or the number of lines in a page, or overlap text that was previously cleared. Look in the log file for an Alert message, which suggests an appropriate image scale, depending on how an image was placed. Problem areas can often be fixed be scaling the related image(s) in an external graphics program (see <a href="noveldocs-08-images.html#a8.3.3">Page 8</a>) then re-compiling with the scaled image(s).</p>
+<p>• Note that you may see the Alert whether or not there are problem images, so scaling images will not make the Alert go away. It is a friendly message.</p>
+<div style="clear:both"></div>
+</div><!-- end A.4 -->
-<h3 id="hA.5">A.5 Library Binding</h3>
+<h3 id="hA.5">A.5. Scaling Images after <code>\Rework</code>.</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dA.5">
-<p class="noindent">Libraries rarely purchase Perfect Binding books (regardless of soft or hard cover) due to lack of durability in a library environment. The exceptions are popular books of no lasting literary value, and how-to books for evolving technologies. These may be obtained by libraries in the cheapest softcover version, because such books will be discarded long before they wear out.</p>
-<p>Unless you are sure that your book will be acquired by numerous libraries for long-term addition to their collections, there is little reason to produce a quality hardcover version. Not all P.O.D. services offer hardcover. If you do need a hardcover version, then be sure to carefully inquire regarding its manufacture, and preferably obtain a copy of someone else's book manufactured that way.</p>
-<p><img class="floatright" src="html-resources/smythsewn.png" width="177" height="141" alt="perfect binding"/> The best hardcovers, suitable for library use, are made using the <b>Smyth Sewing</b> process. A Smyth Sewn book has signatures of (typically) 12 or 16 folios. But instead of removing the creases after folding, each signature is sewn through its crease using strong thread, onto a durable spine material. The pages will remain attached, even with hard usage. If the spine material is sufficiently flexible, then the book will lie flat when opened.</p>
-<p>Be sure to ask about spine flexibility. The most flexible methods have a soft, curved spine, and are best suited to thick novels. There is also a variety that has a square (flat) spine, which will not quite lie flat when opened. Square-spine Smyth Sewn books seem to be the fashion for documenting intellectual property.</p>
-<p>If a major publisher is producing a book that is sure to be ordered by many libraries, due to its author's popularity or maybe a movie tie-in, then it is likely to be released as a Smyth Sewn hardcover. That's because the production method is affordable in quantity. But on a P.O.D. basis, it is a significant expense.</p>
-<p>Note that it is possible to retroactively add a hard cover to what was originally a Perfect Binding softcover book. Depending on the technology, the result may be more durable, or not. But it will still be nothing like a Smyth Sewn library binding, because that has to be done at original manufacture. If you want a couple of Smyth Sewn copies for private use (your good children inherit the ranch, the bad ones inherit your books) then there are businesses that can build them, at fabulous cost, from your original PDF (minus its ISBN). If you need to change the Trim Size or margins to accomodate the different technology, then <i>novel</i> can help you. See the <code>\ReworkTrimSize</code> and <code>\ReworkMargins</code> commands.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p>When you use one or both of the Rework commands, the font size and/or the baselineskip will change. However, it does not scale images. In many cases, there is no problem. But in some cases, an un-scaled image will disrupt the previous flow of text or pagination. If you look in the log file, you will see an Alert message, which suggests (only suggests) appropriate values for scaling problem images, depending on whether they are placed inline or block. Then, you should re-work the image in an external image editor. When you scale the image, be sure that the revised version is at the correct resolution of 300dpi or 600dpi, or whatever is necessary.</p>
+<p>It is best to go back to your copy of the original artwork, before you exported it to <i>png</i> or <i>jpg</i>. But what if you do not have anything but the 1-bit or grayscale images that you created earlier? Then do this (in GIMP):</p>
+<p>(1) If the image is 1-bit, change to Color>Mode grayscale.</p>
+<p>(2) Use Image>Scale Image to get new dimensions, at 600 or 300 pixels per inch. Careful: Sometimes when you change size, it auto-changes resolution, or vice-versa. Click back and forth in the dialog box, to ensure that both the dimensions and resolution are correct. Use Cubic interpolation or better.</p>
+<p>(3) Change View to something that puts the image at its approximate print size.</p>
+<p>(4) If desired, play with Filters>Enhance>Sharpen.</p>
+<p>(5) Image>Flatten.</p>
+<p>(6) If the image is to be 1-bit line art, then use GaphicsMagick or ImageMagick as described in section 8.3.1.</p>
+<p>(7) Export as png, then use GraphicsMagick or Image Magick as described in section 8.3.2.</p>
+<p>The above does not take too much time, and will provide superior results. Note that when an image is placed within text, the calculation for text positioning is different than the calculation for image positioning. It is possible (although unlikely) that a <code>\Rework</code> situation will cause an unexpected page break, due to roundoff error in the placement of the final line on a page. This can be fixed by subtracting (or, in some cases, adding) as little as <code>\vspace{-0.001\nbs}</code> before or after the re-scaled image.</p>
+</div><!-- end A.5 -->
-<h3 id="hA.6">A.6 Paper and Cover Materials</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="dA.6">
-<p class="noindent">The interior paper may be white or "creme" (off-white). White paper is generally used for nonfiction, and must be used if there are interior color images. Creme paper is generally used for fiction. The idea is that white paper creates an air of authority, whereas creme paper is more comfortable for lengthy reading. I agree. I recently read a novel that was (mis-) printed on white paper, and it was hard to read in a bright area. So, for your novel, choose creme paper.</p>
-<p>The cover of a Perfect-Binding softcover book may be produced with a glossy or a matte finish. The fashion is to use glossy for nonfiction, matte for fiction. Again, the idea is authority versus comfort. But you may choose what you wish. "Instant Best-Seller" mass-market paperbacks often have an embossed texture, and maybe even metal foil. In the print-on-demand market, forget it. Don't even think about it.</p>
-<p>If you do request a hardcover edition, then it may or may not have a dust jacket (costs extra). The general rule is that books for libraries have a dust jacket, which will be encased in plastic by the library. Books for documentation generally have no dust jacket, with the title and other info embossed in the cover material, for permanance.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end A -->
</div><!-- end Appendix A -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<div id="pageB" class="page">
@@ -2850,7 +2699,7 @@
<p class="overhang"><b>Page ii. Blank.</b> Alternatively, if you wrote numerous books, you can provide a list of them. However, many print/distribution services will not allow such a list, unless they carry everyhing on the list.</p>
<p class="overhang"><b>Page iii. Title Page.</b></p>
<p class="overhang"><b>Page iv. Copyright Page.</b></p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end B.1 -->
<h3 id="hB.2">B.2 Post-Copyright</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dB.2">
@@ -2887,10 +2736,10 @@
\mainmatter % Sets page number to 1 for following material.
</code></p>
</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end B.2 -->
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end B -->
</div><!-- end Appendix B -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<div id="pageC" class="page">
@@ -2912,7 +2761,7 @@
<p>Although it does not pertain to TeX, another issue can arise if you later publish an ebook version. Fonts licensed for printing are often not licensed for an ebook. Indeed, the ebook distributor may ban them.</p>
<p>Always look for a Copyright notice, which can be identified with a particular person or organization. Copyright is good! It means that someone is claiming authorship of the font software. Only the Copyright owner has the right to give the font away for free, or license it to you after payment (often through an intermediary).</p>
<p>If you prefer free fonts, the most widely accepted license is the <em>SIL Open Font License</em>. This allows you to use the font for commercial purposes, embed it in PDF, modify it to suit your needs (if you change the font name), and even re-distribute the modifications. The recommended default <i>Libertinus Serif</i> bears this font license.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end C.1 -->
<h3 id="hC.2">C.2 Technical Issues</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dC.2">
@@ -2919,7 +2768,7 @@
<p class="noindent1">Many fonts have technical errors, even among professional fonts. Some of the errors are so minor that they are not worth fixing.</p>
<p>However, beware of fonts based on traced artwork. The late 1990s had an explosion of amateur dingbat and decorative fonts produced this way, by scanning images from old books and digitizing the scan. The resulting vector glyphs rarely meet standards, and often are quite awful. The problem is that when a commercial printer renders your PDF to print, the printer's software is very different from what you have on your home computer. A technically erroneous glyph might look OK at home, but be rejected commercially.</p>
<p>If you have the knowledge, you can open a font in font editor software (such as <i>FontForge</i>) and ask it for validation. Missing extrema are rarely a problem, even if a lot of them are missing. Self-intersecting glyphs are not a problem if the the glyph is composed of two elements stuck together, such as Ç composed of C with separate cedilla. However, a self-intersecting glyph may be a problem if its lines criss-cross each other. Open paths, and outer paths drawn the wrong way, are often a problem. If the errors are confined to glyphs that you will not be using, then it can pass.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="c3" -->
+</div><!-- end C.2 -->
<h3 id="hC.3">C.3 Appearance Issues</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dC.3">
@@ -2927,10 +2776,10 @@
<p>The best way to assess a font is to print it to paper. Computer screens rarely show details, except at large magnification. Depending on whom you ask for an opinion, fiction is most easily read when there are about 60 to 66 characters (including spaces) per line. To evaluate a font for the main text, print out some paragraphs about 4" to 4.25" wide, and scale the font's point size so that you get an average number of characters per line in that range. Be sure to do that: Adobe Garamond Pro at 12pt, Libertinus Serif at 11.4pt, and Libre Caslon Text at 9.6pt (!) provide about the same number of characters per line of text. At the proper point size, some fonts will look too dark, and others will look too light.</p>
<p>Things to look for: (1) Are the lowercase letters too tall? If they are, then it is hard for readers in many Western languages to find where sentences start, by looking for capital letters. Also, there is less white space between lines, which makes the text appear dense and harder to read. (2) Is the shape of the characters so natural that you don't notice them? That's good! It is your writing, not the font, that is to be noticed. (3) Remember that some fonts are designed for use at large size, in posters; such fonts tend to look mechanical in fiction. Other fonts are designed for computer screens; the letters will be too widely-spaced in fiction. Nearly all modern fonts have decent kerning and important ligatures, so that's not usually a decisive factor.</p>
<p>The prevailing rule: If you notice the font, it's wrong.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end C.3 -->
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end C -->
</div><!--end Appendix C -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<div id="pageD" class="page">
@@ -2942,19 +2791,19 @@
<p>However, the full CMYK gamut is only realized when each ink channel can act independently. That is, each spot on the paper must be able to retain as much as a full dose of each ink. At 0%-100% ink per channel, a spot of paper would have to hold up to 400% ink. For a variety of reasons, most printing technologies cannot apply that much ink. Or rather, if they did try to apply that much, the resulting print might smear, fail to dry, lift off, or soak through to the opposite side of the paper. Subsequent lamination might fail to adhere.</p>
<p>Quality books and magazines, using coated paper, can typically hold 300%-360% ink (the technical name is TAC, Total Area Coverage). However, the color cover of a print-on-demand book might be produced by a method that holds less ink. The operative word is "might." Common P.O.D. printers are industrial-strength inkjet machines, capable of very high quality when used with suitable paper. However, the print job will be sent out to any number of different print shops, who may use other technology. Therefore, P.O.D. services may require that the color gamut be limited to those printable by a "lowest common denominator" process. One widely-used "lowest common denominator" is 240% ink limit.</p>
<p>At 240% ink limit, brightly colored areas are generally unaffected. Deep, rich colors cannot be produced, since they would require too much ink. You will be required to provide an image with colors that fit within the ink limit, or the P.O.D. service may quietly alter your image for you.</p>
-<p>Print simulation, or <i>softproofing</i>, is a method of viewing an image on your computer, "as if it were printed" to some standard. GIMP can do this, as long as you provide the necessary *.icc color profile for the printer. Then you can decide whether or not the result is acceptable. The actual CMYK image is produced by the methods described in <a href="#h13">Chapter 13</a>, above.</p>
+<p>Print simulation, or <i>softproofing</i>, is a method of viewing an image on your computer, "as if it were printed" to some standard. GIMP can do this, as long as you provide the necessary *.icc color profile for the printer. Then you can decide whether or not the result is acceptable. The actual CMYK image is produced by the methods described in <a href="#h7.4">section 7.4</a>.</p>
<h3 id="hD.1">D.1. Example: Bright Colors Preserved</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dD.1">
<p>Below is a painting from the Middle Ages (photo by me) on display at the San Francisco Legion of Honor museum. The photo, at left, is as originally seen on a computer monitor. At right, the image is softproofed using the SWOP 238% ink limit color profile mentioned in Chapter 13. You can see that the brightest blue is about the same, The brightest reds and greens are almost the same. But the images differ in the dark areas. Especially look at the lion's leg (lower left corner) and the writer's hair and beard (right foreground).</p>
<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/medieval-painting.jpg" width="707" height="321" title="Medieval Painting, monitor and softproof" alt="Medieval Painting, monitor and softproof"/></p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end D.1 -->
<h3 id="hD.2">D.2. Example: Natural Light Preserved</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dD.2">
<p>Below is a photograph taken on a dull day along the California coast, near Bixby Creek. Whether in monitor color or softproofed, the results are almost exactly the same. With the exception of some tiny shadowed areas in the foreground (hard to notice), just about everything in the picture can print with not more than 238% ink.</p>
<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/bixby-compare.jpg" width="738" height="340" title="Medieval Painting, monitor and softproof" alt="Bixby Creek, monitor and softproof"/></p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end D.2" -->
<h3 id="hD.3">D.3. Example: Dark, Rich Colors Lost</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dD.3">
@@ -2961,297 +2810,258 @@
<p>The biggest problem occurs when the artwork is naturally dark. That might occur in night scenes, or with dark-skinned humans. For copyright reasons I cannot show you the original image by Hyacinthe Rigaud, on display in a European museum. But if it is reduced to a map of 256 colors (as with GIF images), you can see the effect. The original, at left, has many rich browns and reddish-browns. When softproofed, those become nearly gray. The original image still is attractive when softproofed, but its muted dark colors might be surprising if you were unaware of the ink limit effect.</p>
<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/colormap-brown.jpg" width="674" height="305" title="Medieval Painting, monitor and softproof" alt="Dark color map, monitor and softproof"/></p>
<p>You might wonder why the ink limit caused rich browns to appear <i>darker</i>. That's because a blend of yellow, magenta, and black (with too much ink) was changed to one with much less yellow and magenta, but more black (and not too much ink).</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+</div><!-- end D.3 -->
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end D -->
</div><!-- end Appendix D -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<div id="pageE" class="page">
-<h2 id="hE">Appendix E. Command Summary by Topic</h2>
+<h2 id="hE">Appendix E. Overview of <i>fontspec</i> Syntax</h2>
<div class="d2" id="dE">
-<p class="noindent">Here is a list of commands created by <i>novel</i> class, plus a few of the many LaTeX commands that are likely to be most useful in fiction. Commands are sorted according to where they would be used.</p>
-<p>Do not let the many Preamble settings intimidate you. All of them are pre-configured with default values that were carefully chosen for use in fiction. You may not need to write many settings.</p>
-<p>Since <i>novel</i> is specifically intended for fiction, such as novels and collections of short stories, it does not implement many of the commands familiar to academic writers. In some cases, where such commands would interfere with <i>novel</i> commands, the academic commands have been entirely disabled.</p>
-<p>LaTeX has many other commands. Only the most popular ones are mentioned here. If you know something that is not on the list, you can try it.</p>
+<p class="noindent">Much of what follows is a digested portion of the full <i>fontspec</i> package documentation. There are many more features, and ways to use them, than will be described below.</p>
-<h3 id="hE.1">E.1 Command Summary: Preamble</h3>
+<h3 id="hE.1">E.1. Font (Family) Name vs. Font File Name</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dE.1">
+<p class="noindent">A <em>font file</em> is an individual file, with its own <em>file name</em>, including file extension. For example, libertinusserif-regular.otf and libertinusserif-italic.otf are two different font files. This much is obvious.</p>
+<p>A <em>font family name</em>, often merely called <em>font name</em>, refers to one or more font files that are variations of the same basic font. Some fonts are so unique that the family consists of just one file. For example, the <i>NovelDeco</i> font family consists of the one file <i>NovelDeco.otf</i>. Typically, a font family has four files, consisting of Regular, Italic, Bold, and BoldItalic variants. Even though there are four font files, there is a single font family name.</p>
+<p>Many font families have more than four files, including Semibold and Light weights, and Condensed tracking. It is up to the font designer to decide whether a Condensed variation of the "Bubble Turble" font should be treated as a member of the "Burble Turble" family, or as a separate "Burble Turble Condensed" family.</p>
+<p>The font (family) name can be learned by opening font files in your system font viewer. Currently, the Windows 10 font viewer uses "Font name" and the Ubuntu font viewer puts the font name in more prominent type. A font (family) name may contain more than one word, with or without spaces, and may contain a general classification such as <em>serif</em>, <em>sans</em>, or <em>mono</em>, because those are actually different families. But it will not contain words such as <em>regular</em>, <em>medium</em>, <em>semibold</em>, <em>bold</em>, or <em>italic</em>; those are for individual members of the same family. Within TeX, some of the older PostScript fonts have been re-worked as newer TrueType and Open Type fonts. The family names are slightly different, so pay attention.</p>
+<p class="centerimg">
+<img src="html-resources/win10libser.png" width="268" height="184" alt="Windows 10 font viewer"/>
+<img src="html-resources/ublibser.png" width="431" height="176" alt="Ubuntu font viewer"/>
+</p>
-<h4 id="hE.1.1">E.1.1 Class Options</h4>
+<h4 id="hE.1.1">E.1.1. Set/New by Font Name vs. File Name</h4>
<div class="d4" id="dE.1.1">
-<p class="noindent2">Unlike other document classes, <i>novel</i> does not use class options to set layout dimensions or font point size.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>draft</code> Marks horizontal overflow. Enables some other options.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>graytext</code> Allows text in gray, not just pure K black.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>shademargins</code> Only in draft. Gray background in page margins.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>cropmarks</code> Adds basic cropmarks. Do not use unless required!</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>cropview</code> Only in draft. Removes excess area surrounding TrimBox.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>closecrop</code> Only in draft. Crops to just clear the live text area.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>xml</code> Exports XMP Metadata as an xml file.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>coverart</code> For use with cover artwork only.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>unblock</code> Allows some normally-banned packages to load.</p>
-</div>
+<p class="noindent">When you set an existing font, or create a new font command, you can use either the font (family) name, or the specific font file name. However, there may be a big difference in results!</p>
+<p style="margin-top:10px"><b>By family name:</b></p>
+<p><img class="floatright" style="padding-top:12px" src="html-resources/fontbyfamily.png" width="338" height="42" alt="font family defined"/> When you use the <em>font family name</em>, you configure all of the Regular, Italic, Bold, and BoldItalic variants. The usual TeX commands will be applied:</p>
+<p>Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code" style="clear:both"><code>\NewFontFamily\rway{Raleway}</code></p>
+<p>Document Body:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>{\rway I came, \textbf{I saw}, \emph{I conquered}, \textsc{I left}.}</code></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10px"><b>By file name:</b></p>
+<p><img class="floatright" style="padding-top:12px" src="html-resources/fontbyfilenamei.png" width="335" height="44" alt="font file defined"/> However, if you specify a single <em>font file name</em>, then <em>only</em> that font file will be used, regardless of requests for bold or italic. Small caps will be honored, if the specific file has them:</p>
+<p>Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code" style="clear:both"><code>\NewFontFamily\rwayi{Raleway-Regular-Italic.otf}</code></p>
+<p>Document Body:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>{\rwayi I came, \textbf{I saw}, \emph{I conquered}, \textsc{I left}.}</code></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10px"><b>File Name Combinations:</b></p>
+<p><img class="floatright" style="padding-top:12px" src="html-resources/frankenfont.png" width="312" height="41" alt="frankenfont"/> What you write is what you get. You can customize a font family by individually selecting its members. Here is the syntax.</p>
+<p>Preamble:</p>
+<p class="code" style="clear:both"><code>\NewFontFamily\frankenfont[% note the % at linebreaks<br/>
+ ItalicFont=BaskervilleF-Italic.otf,%<br/>
+ BoldFont=libertinusserif-semibold.otf,%<br/>
+ BoldItalicFont=texgyrepagella-bolditalic.otf,%<br/>
+]{Raleway-Medium.otf}</code></p>
+<p>Document Body:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>{\frankenfont I came, \textbf{I saw}, \emph{I conquered}, \textsc{I left}.}</code></p>
+<p style="margin-top:10px"><b>Semibold, Light, etc.:</b> The above syntax is especially useful when you wish to specify semibold (if available), rather than bold. It is also a way to select something such as light versions:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\NewFontFamily\rwlight[% note the % at linebreaks<br/>
+ ItalicFont=Raleway-Light-Italic.otf,%<br/>
+ BoldFont=Raleway-Medium.otf,%<br/>
+ BoldItalicFont=Raleway-Medium-Italic.otf,%<br/>
+]{Raleway-Light.otf}</code></p>
+<p>Note that the font file in braces is the one used as the "regular" font, in this definition.</p>
+</div><!-- end E.1.1 -->
+</div><!-- end E.1 -->
-<h4 id="hE.1.2">E.1.2 Metadata (File Data)</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="dE.1.2">
-<p class="noindent2">Metadata can be seen by PDF viewers. Some of it can only be seen by professional software. The data identifies your file and describes some of its properties. In the case of PDF/X, choosing a compliance standard will also affect how LaTeX compiles your document. You may <em>not</em> apply styling to metadata!</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetTitle{<em>title of your book</em>}</code> Default: empty. The value of this setting is available as \thetitle everywhere.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetSubtitle{<em>subtitle of your book, if any</em>}</code> Default: empty. The value of this setting is available as \thesubtitle everywhere.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetAuthor{<em>author of your book</em>}</code> Default: empty. The value of this setting is available as \theauthor everywhere.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetPDFX[<em>embed-icc or no-embed</em>]{<em>compliance standard</em>}{<em>output intent</em>}</code> Default: off.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetApplication{<em>software that created the source document</em>}</code> Advanced. Default: an identifying string, automatically inserted by TeX.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetProducer{<em>software that compiled the PDF</em>}</code> Avanced. Default: an identifying string, automatically inserted by TeX.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\straightquote</code> and <code>\straightdblquote</code> Inserts the character in text string.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="hE.1.3">E.1.3 Layout</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="dE.1.3">
-<p class="noindent2">The <i>novel</i> class provides improved alternatives to papersize, offset, and other layout commands used by other document classes. These commands have been carefully chosen to do what you need to do.<p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetTrimSize{width}{height}</code> Default: {5.5in}{8.5in}. The finished size of your book.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetMargins{top}{outside}{bottom}{inside}</code> Default: {0.5in}{0.5in}{0.5in}{0.75in}</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetHeadFootStyle{number}</code> Default: 1 (header, but no footer)</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetHeadJump{number}</code> Default: 1.5. Gap between header and main text.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetFootJump{number}</code> Default: 1.5. Gap between main text and footer.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetFontSize{<em>size</em>}</code> Default: Varies. Usually 11.4pt</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetLinesPerPage{<em>integer</em>}</code> Default: Calculated automatically from other layout settings.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetMediaSize[alignment]{width}{height}</code> Advanced. Default: Identical to Trim Size.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetCropmarkGap{<em>size of gap</em>}</code> Advanced. Default: 0.125in if cropmarks option.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\ReworkTrimSize{width}{height}</code> Advanced. For emergency re-layout.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\ReworkMargins{top}{outside}{bottom}{inside}</code> Advanced. For emergency re-layout.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="hE.1.4">E.1.4 Specifying Fonts</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="dE.1.4">
-<p class="noindent2">In <i>novel</i>, you do not load a font using \usepackage{<em>fontname</em>}.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetParentFont[features]{font family}</code> Default: Libertinus Serif. Alternate: Linux Libertine O. Last Choice: Latin Modern Roman.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetHeadFont[features]{font family}</code> Default: [Numbers=Lining,Scale=0.92]{<em>based on parent font</em>}.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetChapterFont[features]{font family}</code> Default: [Numbers=Lining,Scale=1.6]{<em>based on parent font</em>}</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetSubchFont[features]{font family}</code> Default: [Numbers=Lining,Scale=1.2]{<em>based on parent font</em>}</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetDecoFont[features]{font}</code> Advanced. Default: NovelDeco.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetSansFont[features]{font family}</code> Advanced. Default: Libertinus Sans. Alternate: Linux Biolinum O. Last Choice: Latin Modern Sans.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetMonoFont[features]{font family}</code> Advanced. Default: Libertinus Mono. Alternate: Linux Libertine Mono O. Last Choice: Latin Modern Mono.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\NewFontFamily\<i>yourfontcommand</i>[features]{font family}</code>. Advanced. Uses <i>fontspec</i> notation.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\NewFontFace\<i>yourfontcommand</i>[features]{font}</code>. Advanced. Uses <i>fontspec</i> notation.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="hE.1.5">E.1.5 Other Preamble Configuration</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="dE.1.5">
-<p class="noindent2">These commands perform miscellaneous setup.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetEmblems{<em>verso</em>}{<em>recto</em>}</code> Advanced. Default: empty. Applies decoration near page number, only for selected header/footer styles.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetPageNumberStyle{<em>code using \thepage</em>}</code> Advanced. Default: <code>\thepage</code>.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetLooseHead{number}</code> Advanced. Default: 50. Adjusts header tracking.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetChapterStart{<em>choice</em>}</code> Advanced. Default: footer (if present).</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetIndentAfterScenebreak</code> Advanced. Default: no indent after scenebreak.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetMarkerStyle[real/fake]{asterisk/dagger/number}</code> Advanced. Default: [real][asterisk].</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\microtypesetup{<em>see microtype package docs</em>}</code> Advanced.<br/>Default: config=novel-microtype,stretch=20,shrink=20,final,tracking.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\setmainlanguage{<em>language</em>}</code> Advanced. Default: english.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="hE.2">E.2 Command Summary: Document Body</h3>
+<h3 id="hE.2">E.2 Open Type Features</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dE.2">
-<p class="noindent">Note that standard font size commands, such as <code>\small</code> and <code>\Large</code>, are disabled.</p>
+<p class="noindent">Features are variations, contained within a single font file. In the bad old days, when you wanted true small caps, you had to load a separate font file that had them (and did not have ordinary lowercase letters). Now, if an Open Type font file has the <i>smcp</i> feature (most do), you obtain the small caps from within the same file, by asking for them. Requests for the feature may be made on-the-fly, or pre-loaded for global use.</p>
+<p>Here are several of the most frequently-used features, relevant to fiction writing. There are many more, and most fonts have only a few of them. Even when a font has a feature, it may be limited to some portion of the characters. For example, it is common for small caps to be available only for Latin-1 letters, even though the font also contains Greek and Cyrillic. To put this another way: The availability of a feature does not tell you its breadth of coverage. Unless the font has documentation showing coverage of its features, the only way to find out is to create and print a test page.</p>
+<table class="preconf">
+<caption>
+Some Frequently-Used Open Type Features
+</caption>
+<thead>
+<tr>
+<th>Description</th>
+<th>Open Type code </th>
+<th>fontspec code</th>
+</tr>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td><p>kerning</p></td>
+<td><p>kern</p></td>
+<td><p>Kerning=On<br/><em>enabled by default</em></p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td><p>common ligatures</p></td>
+<td><p>liga</p></td>
+<td><p>Ligatures=Common<br/><em>enabled: textfont, sansfont</em></p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td><p>Tex ligatures</p></td>
+<td><p>tlig</p></td>
+<td><p>Ligatures=TeX<br/><em>enabled by default</em></p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td><p>lowercase letters to small caps</p></td>
+<td><p>smcp</p></td>
+<td><p>Letters=SmallCaps</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td><p>uppercase letters to small caps</p></td>
+<td><p>c2sc</p></td>
+<td><p>Letters=UppercaseSmallCaps</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td><p>lining numerals</p></td>
+<td><p>lnum</p></td>
+<td><p>Numbers=Lining</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td><p>oldstyle numerals</p></td>
+<td><p>onum</p></td>
+<td><p>Numbers=OldStyle<br/><em>enabled: textfont, sansfont</em></p></td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+<p>• Kerning is the automatic adjustment of spacing between letters, so that they fit together nicely. The values are read from tables within the font.</p>
+<p>• Common ligatures are substitutions, such as a combined <i>ff</i> character for two consecutive <i>f</i> characters. It is up to the font designer to determine which ligatures, if any, are common.</p>
+<p>• TeX ligatures (such as replacing `` with “ and --- with —) are not actually an Open Type feature, but they are treated that way by the software. All of these are enabled by default. The <i>fontspec</i> manual explains how to disable them, if necessary.</p>
+<p>• The SmallCaps feature applies only to lowercase letters; ordinary capitals remain ordinary capitals. UppercaseSmallCaps deals only with converting ordinary capitals to small caps. If you want both, use both. In most fonts that have them, small caps are slightly taller than lowercase, and slightly more widely spaced. What distinguishes real small caps from fake ones (obtained by scaling ordinary capitals) is that the weight and spacing are more compatible with surrounding text.</p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/smallcapsrealfake.png" width="478" height="43" alt="real vs fake small caps"/></p>
+<p>• Lining numerals are the ones most familiar to you, from math or accounting. They sit on the baseline and have the height of capital letters. That's just right for doing calculations, and is acceptable for things such as page numbers and chapter numbers.</p>
+<p>• When lining numerals are mingled with flowing text, they may stand out too much. OldStyle numerals are more like flowing text: Most of the numerals are at lowercase height, with ascenders and descenders. Compare the first number as OldStyle, the second as Lining:</p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/jollybeers.png" width="499" height="52" alt="oldstyle vs lining numerals"/></p>
+<p>Most fonts use Lining numerals as their default. A few default to OldStyle numerals. Thus, you should explicitly call for the kind of numerals you wish to use.</p>
+<p>• True OldStyle numerals have a flat top on <em>one</em>, and a very round <em>zero</em>: <img src="html-resources/10trueold.png" width="37" height="13" alt="true oldstyle 10"/> This may be a bit distracting. Some fonts use a transitional form, where the one has a tilted top (like big 1) and the zero is not so round: <img src="html-resources/10transold.png" width="37" height="13" alt="transitional oldstyle 10"/> Others offer you a choice, via an Open Type "style set." See the <i>fontspec</i> manual for how to code style sets.</p>
+<p>• There are many more Open Type features, most of which are not useful in ordinary fiction writing. Fonts rarely have more than a few features. Some features (such as the ones shown above) have a specific meaning. Other features, such as "style sets", have whatever meaning the font designer assigns them; Thus the <i>ss03</i> feature of one font may do something very different from <i>ss03</i> in a different font.</p>
-<h4 id="hE.2.1">E.2.1 Book Divisions</h4>
+<h4 id="hE.2.1">E.2.1. Scale as Pseudo-Feature</h4>
<div class="d4" id="dE.2.1">
-<p class="overhang"><code>\frontmatter</code> Page numbering (if shown) is lowercase roman.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\mainmatter</code> Forces recto, if necessary inserting blank verso. Page numbering re-starts at 1, and is Arabic.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\backmatter</code> Forces recto, if necessary inserting blank verso. Page numbering continues Arabic, without reset. If you need something else, you must code it yourself.</p>
-</div>
+<p class="noindent">Although it is not an Open Type feature, <i>Scale=number</i> may be written like a feature. <i>Scale</i> globally adjusts the size of the font, relative to what it would otherwise be. If a local font size command is also applied, then the result is the compounded value.</p>
+<p>If the font will be mingled with other fonts in the same place, Scale can tweak a font so that it does not stand out. If Scale does not exceed 1, then the baselineskip will not be affected. Over 1 risks spreading lines to accomodate the extra size; this should not be done for fonts that will appear in the flowing main text. But over 1 is acceptable for display fonts that do not wrap lines and do not mingle with main text.</p>
+<p>Example: <em>Orbitron</em> is a special-purpose font with a mechanical or futuristic look. Its characters are much larger and heavier than would be found in book fonts. If I wish to mingle Orbitron with ordinary text, I might load the font like this:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\NewFontFace\orbitron[Scale=0.6]{Orbitron} % Preamble</code></p>
+<p>Then in the document body, I could use it like this:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>The message was brief: {\orbitron DIE, EARTHLING.} Captain Withens smiled as he oiled his ray-gun. But ray-guns don't use oil.\par</code></p>
+<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/charscaletext.png" width="522" height="63" alt="charscale text"/>
+<p>Scale is more often used for fonts that are pre-defined to have a special meaning and location, such as chapter titles or page headers. There, the font is not mingled with ordinary text, and it is OK to use a larger Scale. Then, it is not necessary to use local font scaling commands each time the font is used.</p>
+</div><!-- end E.2.1 -->
-<h4 id="hE.2.2">E.2.2 Page Management</h4>
+<h4 id="hE.2.2">E.2.2 Color and Opacity</h4>
<div class="d4" id="dE.2.2">
-<p class="overhang"><code>\thispagestyle{<em>choose</em>}</code> Whether header/footer appears, for current page.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetRectoHeadText{<em>text</em>}</code> Content of recto heading (if present).</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\SetVersoHeadText{<em>text</em>}</code> Content of verso heading (if present).</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\enlargethispage{<em>usually -\nbs</em>}</code> Changes textblock height. Use with caution.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\clearpage</code> Page break.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\cleartorecto</code> Page break, if necessary inserts blank, continues recto.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\clearpage\thispagestyle{empty}\null\clearpage</code> Blank page.
-<p class="overhang"><code>\cleartoend</code> Use only at end. Inserts 1 or 2 blank pages, so final page is blank verso.</p>
-</div>
+<p class="noindent">Even though the <i>fontspec</i> syntax allows you to set <i>Color</i> and <i>Opacity</i> as pseudo-features when you define a font, <em>the novel class blocks these features.</em> If you attempt to set them as features in a font definition, an error will result. The same applies if you attempt to add them, using <code>\addfontfeature</code>. However, you can still make use of grayscale using ordinary, local color commands.</p>
+<p>When you use the <i>graytext</i> class option, you may write text in grayscale, using commands from the included <i>xcolor</i> package. You should only do this for text that is in special locations. For example, if you begin each chapter with a number that is very large, you might wish to make that number gray, so that it does not overpower the main text.</p>
+<p>To avoid possible conflicts, the color specification should be chosen from a limited list of names. In order from dark to light: black, blue, violet, darkgray, purple, red, teal, olive, magenta, gray, brown, green, orange, cyan, lightgray, lime, pink, yellow, white. They will all be rendered in <em>shades of gray</em> (of course, black and white will be themselves). You may also choose from this more convenient list: black, gray1, gray2, gray3, gray4, gray5, gray6, gray7, gray8, gray9, white.</p>
+<p>If <i>graytext</i> is not chosen as class option, then any color (even white) will be rendered as black.</p>
+<p>• Placing light text over a dark background may produce unexpected results in print, even if it looks good in PDF. If you need this effect, it is better to build the text into the background, as a single image.</p>
+</div><!-- end E.2.2 -->
-<h4 id="hE.2.3">E.2.3 Environments and Related Commands</h4>
+<h4 id="hE.2.3">E.2.3. <code>\CreateFontFeature{<em>code</em>}{<em>substitutions</em>}</code></h4>
<div class="d4" id="dE.2.3">
-<p class="overhang"><code>legalese</code> (env.) Text alignment left (ragged right), hyphenation disabled.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>toc</code> (env.) Table of Contents.</p>
-<div style="margin-left:16px">
-<p class="overhang"><code>\tocitem[<em>number</em>]{<em>title</em>}{<em>page</em>}</code> Item in the toc environment.</p>
-</div>
-<p class="overhang"><code>ChapterStart</code> (env.) Creates an area of fixed height.</p>
-<div style="margin-left:16px">
-<p class="overhang"><code>\ChapterTitle{<em>text</em>}</code> Single line. May be used more than once.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\ChapterSubtitle{<em>text</em>}</code> Single line. May be used more than once.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\ChapterDeco[<em>scale</em>]{<em>deco code</em>}</code> Single line. May be used more than once.</p>
-</div>
-<p class="overhang"><code>parascale</code> (env.) Entire paragraph scaled, off-grid. Also see \charscale.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>adjustwidth</code> (env.) Block indenting, left and/or right.</p>
-</div>
+<p class="noindent">Once in a while, a font has a glyph that you would like to use, but it is not included in any of the font's Open Type feature sets. So, how to you grab that particular glyph? For example: One well-known font has a glyph named <em>emdash.alt</em>, which is not as long as the font's ordinary <em>emdash</em> glyph, and looks better in text. Unfortunately, <em>emdash.alt</em> is not in any of the font's style sets. Without some trickery, only a program such as InDesign can grab that glyph.</p>
+<p>Thanks to <i>fontspec</i>, <i>novel</i> has the necessary trickery. Command <code>\CreateFontFeature</code> creates a fake Open Type feature code, and assigns your list of substitutions to that code. Use comma-separated entries if there are multiple substitutions. For the case in question:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\CreateFontFeature{myem}{emdash=emdash.alt}</code></p>
+<p>The code <i>myem</i> was randomly chosen as something that is not already defined among Open Type feature codes. Once specified, the fake feature may be used in any font definition, such as this:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>\SetParentFont[RawFeature=+myem]{Adobe Garamond Pro}</code></p>
+<p>Of course, the fake feature has no effect if the font does not have the substitution character.</p>
+<p>This technique may be used for more complicated features, but that is beyond the scope of this documentation. See the <i>fontspec</i> manual if you need to do more.</p>
+</div><!-- end E.2.3 -->
+</div><!-- end E.2 -->
-<h4 id="hE.2.4">E.2.4 Scene Breaks and First Lines</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="dE.2.4">
-<p class="noindent2">Also see Preamble command <code>\SetIndentAfterScenebreak</code>.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\QuickChapter[<em>dash size</em>]{<em>chapter title</em>}</code> Chapters without page breaks.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\scenebreak</code> Skips a line, gap is blank.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\sceneline</code> Skips a line, gap has centered long dash.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\scenestars</code> Skips a line, gap has asterisks.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\FirstLine{<em>text</em>}</code> First line of paragraph in small caps.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="hE.2.5">E.2.5 Inline Text Effects</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="dE.2.5">
-<p class="noindent2">Note that standard LaTeX font size commands, such as <code>\small</code> and <code>\Large</code>, have no effect.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\charscale[<em>scale,x,y</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code> Scales and moves text. Single line. See also <i>parascale</i> environment.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>{\somefontcommand <em>text</em>}</code> Applies font defined by \somefontcommand to the included text.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\forceindent</code> When <code>\indent</code> fails. May be used multiple times.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\backindent</code> When <code>\noindent</code> fails. May be used multiple times.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\hangindent{<em>text</em>}</code> Place text to the left of the command insertion point.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\acronym{<em>text</em>}</code> Requires NovelDeco font. Caps become "medium" caps.<p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\decoglyph{<em>code</em>}</code> Places decoration from the decofont, by code.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\squeeze{<em>text</em>}</code> Horizontally shrinks text 1%.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\crush{<em>text</em>}</code> Horizontally shrinks text 2%.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\begingroup\color[<em>gray</em>]{<em>name or code</em>}\endgroup</code> Only when graytext option.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\textcolor[<em>gray</em>]{<em>name or code</em>}{<em>text</em>}</code> Only when graytext option.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\memo{<em>text</em>}</code> Ignores its argument. Does not ignore following.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\nfs</code> (Length) Normal font size.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\nbs</code> (Length) Normal baseline skip.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\textit{<em>text</em>}, \emph{<em>text</em>}, \itshape{<em>text</em>}</code> Italics.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\textsc{<em>text</em>}, \smcp{<em>text</em>}</code> Lowercase to small caps. Not faked.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\allsmcp{<em>text</em>}</code> Uppercase and lowercase to small caps. Not faked.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\realmarker, \fakemarker</code> Changes superscripts/subscripts real or fake.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\sups{<em>text</em>}</code> Superscripts.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\subs{<em>text</em>}</code> Subscripts (scientific inferiors).</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\null</code> Inserts a blank line between paragraphs.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\mbox{<em>text</em>}</code> Puts contents in a box. Useful for preventing hyphenation.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\makebox[<em>width</em>][<em>alignment</em>]{<em>text</em>}</code> Box with adjustments.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\hspace{<em>length</em>}</code> Creates a horizontal space.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\vspace{<em>length</em>}</code> Creates a vertical space. Caution: May disturb baseline grid.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\kern<em>length</em></code> Tweaks kerning between characters.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\strut</code> Ensures that a line of text maintains its proper height.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>{\centering <em>text</em>\par}</code> Limited to single paragraph.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\hfill</code> Precedes right-aligned text.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\vfill</code> Forces text downward on page.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\\</code> Ordinary line break, not justified.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\linebreak</code> Justified line break. Use with caution.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\bigemdash[<em>voffset,thickness</em>]</code> Simulated emdash of variable width.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="hE.2.6">E.2.6 Footnotes and Endnotes</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="dE.2.6">
-<p class="noindent2">See also <code>\realmarker</code> and <code>\fakemarker</code>.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\footnote[<em>option</em>]{<em>note text</em>}</code> Marker, with footnote at page bottom.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\endnote</code> Places marker for subsequent endnote.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\endnotetext{<em>number</em>}{<em>note text</em>}</code> Text of an endnote.</p>
-</div>
-
-<h4 id="hE.2.7">E.2.7 Images</h4>
-<div class="d4" id="dE.2.7">
-<p class="overhang"><code>\InlineImage[<em>hoffset</em>][<em>voffset</em>]{<em>filename.ext</em>}</code> Inline image.
-<p class="overhang"><code>\InlineImage*[<em>hoffset</em>][<em>voffset</em>]{<em>filename.ext</em>}</code> Inline image, no cursor width.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\BlockImage[<em>alignment,hoffset,voffset</em>]{<em>filename.ext</em>}[<em>accompanying text</em>]</code> Image block element.</p>
-</div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="hE.3">E.3 Disabled LaTeX Commands</h3>
+<h3 id="hE.3">E.3. Local Modifications to Open Type Features</h3>
<div class="d3" id="dE.3">
-<p class="noindent2">These commands are disabled or ineffective. Depending on the command, it may silently do nothing, or simply echo its argument, or generate a Warning or Error. Some of these commands are part of standard LaTeX document classes, but others are part of widely-used packages.</p>
-<p>There are other commands that <em>should</em> be disabled, but it is difficult to keep track of all of them. This list only includes some popular commands.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\small, \LARGE, etc.</code> Use \characale or parascale environment.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\textls</code> Use {\addfontfeature{LetterSpace=<em>number</em>}text} instead.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\includegraphics</code> Use \InsertImage or \BlockImage instead.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\maketitle</code> Do it yourself.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>bibliography, index, part, chapter, section, floats, captions, tables, etc.</code> This ain't no stinking thesis. LaTeX "academic layout" commands don't work.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
+<p class="noindent">If you specify a particular Open Type feature, it will be generally used for that font command. So if you define a new font command with <i>Letters=SmallCaps</i> as a feature (and if the font actually has them), then small caps will be used for that font, whether or not you locally request them with a command such as <code>\textsc</code>.</p>
+<p>Often, you can add (or sometimes remove) features on a local basis. For example, suppose that you defined the font without using its <i>ss03</i> style set. You can locally add that feature to some text, using a command that looks like this:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>{\addfontfeature{<em>which feature</em>} <em>applied to this text</em>}</code></p>
+<p>The above code assumes that you are already using the font in that location. You cannot apply <i>ss03</i> from one font to an entirely different font!</p>
+<p>See the <i>fontspec</i> documentation for details of <code>\addfontfeature</code>.</p>
+<p>As an alternative to changing features locally, you can define different font commands to call the same underlying font, but with different features.</p>
+<p>Two ways to accomplish the same thing:</p>
+<p class="code"><code>
+\NewFontFamily\baskf{BaskervilleF}<br/>
+\NewFontFamily\baskftab[Numbers=Monospaced]{BaskervilleF} % tnum feature<br/>
+\begin{document}<br/>
+Some text {\baskftab hello 123} is here.<br/>
+Some text {\baskf\addfontfeature{Numbers=Monospaced} hello 123} is here.
+</code></p>
+</div><!-- end E.3 -->
-<h3 id="hE.4">E.4 Discouraged LaTeX Commands</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="dE.4">
-<p class="noindent2">These commands may be used, but are likely to interfere with other commands defined by <i>novel</i>, or are likely to disturb the constant baseline grid. Only use them when you are willing to carefully inspect the output at magnification. These are less likely to be problematic when used on a display-only page, such as the book's title page.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\parbox, \minipage</code> Perhaps use adjustwidth environment.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>center</code> (env.) If used, pay careful attention to line space above/below.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\raisebox</code> Use <code>\charscale</code> instead.</p>
-<p class="overhang"><code>\backmatter</code> Avoid in fictional works.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end E -->
</div><!-- end Appendix E -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<div id="pageF" class="page">
-<h2 id="hF">Appendix F. <img src="html-resources/amb.png" width="30" height="22" alt="emergency icon"/> Emergency Clinic: Rework Layout</h2>
+<h2 id="hF">Appendix F. Sample Document</h2>
<div class="d2" id="dF">
-<div style="padding: 6px 0px 6px 0px; margin:0px 32px 6px 16px; background:#ffe7e7 none">
-<p class="noindent">Situation: Your book is designed for Trim Size 5.25x8, one of several widely-used American sizes. You have put many hours of work into getting just the right line breaks within paragraphs, and just the right pagination. It looks beautiful. But then you get an e-mail from a British distributor. Could you change to British size B novel format, essentially 5.06x7.81 Trim Size?</p>
-<p>Sure, you say. Just needs a little math. Knock 0.095" off each margin. What could be easier? So you try that, but the printer rejects your file. It seems that your original margins were as narrow as they could be, per the printer's specifications. You cannot make them any narrower.</p>
-<p>But if you re-size the book and don't knock the margins down, then the text width and height won't be the same. Your text doesn't fit the way it used to. All your lines re-flow, the page breaks are different, and all that work you put into getting just the right appearance must be re-done.</p>
-<p><em>Oh, nooooo ...</em></p>
+<p class="noindent">If you click on a command, you will be taken to its documentation.
+Default values are shown in braces and brackets, where applicable.
+There are many other commands available, but they are not specific to novel class.</p>
+<div class="sampledoc" style="margin:1em">
+<p style="text-indent:0">
+<a href="#h1.2.3">% !TeX program = LuaLaTeX</a><br/>
+<a href="#h1.2.1">% !TeX encoding = UTF-8</a><br/>
+<a href="#h2">\documentclass{novel}</a><br/>
+%%% METADATA (FILE DATA):<br/>
+<a href="#h3.3.1">\SetTitle{}</a> % Default: empty.<br/>
+<a href="#h3.3.3">\SetSubtitle{}</a> % Default: empty.<br/>
+<a href="#h3.3.2">\SetAuthor{}</a> % Default: empty.<br/>
+<a href="#h3.3.4">\SetApplication{LuaLaTeX with novel and microtype}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h3.3.4">\SetProducer{LuaLaTeX with novel-pdfx and hyperref}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h3.4">\SetPDFX{off}</a><br/>
+%%% DIMENSIONS:<br/>
+<a href="#h4.1.1">\SetTrimTize{5.5in}{8.5in}</a> % Sets width, height.<br/>
+% <a href="#h4.1.2">\SetMediaSize[]{}{}</a> % Normally unused. Default Media Size same as Trim Size.<br/>
+<a href="#h4.1.3">\SetCropmarkGap{0.125in}</a> % Cropmarks rarely used.<br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.1">\SetMargins{0.5in}{0.5in}{0.5in}{0.75in}</a> % Default varies with Trim Size.<br/>
+%%% GENERAL FONTS:<br/>
+<a href="#h4.2.1.1">\SetParentFont[SmallCapsFeatures={Renderer=Basic},Kerning=On,Ligatures=TeX]{Libertinus Serif}</a><br/>
+% Then, the main text font automatically adds Numbers=OldStyle,Ligatures=Common.<br/>
+<a href="#h4.2.1.2">\SetFontSize{11.4pt}</a> % Default varies with Trim Size, Margins.<br/>
+% <a href="#h4.3.2">\SetLinesPerPage{}</a> % Default: command not used. Calculated from other settings.<br/>
+<a href="#h4.2.3">\SetDecoFont{NovelDeco.otf}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.2.4">\setsansfont{Libertinus Sans}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.2.4">\setmonofont{Libertinus Mono}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.2.4">\setmathfont{Libertinus Math}</a> % unicode-math package.<br/>
+%%% HEADERS/FOOTERS:<br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.3">\SetHeadFootStyle{1}</a> % This style has headers only.<br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.4.1">\SetHeadJump{1.5}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.4.1">\SetFootJump{1.5}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.4.3">\SetLooseHead{50}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.4.5">\SetEmblems{}{}</a> % Default blanks.<br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.4.2">\SetHeadFont[Letters=SmallCaps,Scale=0.92]{\parentfont}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.4.4">\SetPageNumberStyle{\thepage}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.4.6">\SetVersoHeadText{\theAuthor}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h4.3.4.6">\SetRectoHeadText{\theTitle}</a><br/>
+%%% CHAPTERS:<br/>
+<a href="#h5.1.2.1">\SetChapterStartStyle{footer}</a> % Equivalent to empty, when style has no footer.<br/>
+<a href="#h5.1.2.2">\SetChapterStartHeight{10}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h5.1.3.1">\SetChapterFont[Numbers=Lining,Scale=1.6]{\parentfont}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h5.1.3.1">\SetSubchFont[Numbers=Lining,Scale=1.2]{\parentfont}</a><br/>
+<a href="#h5.3.1">\SetScenebreakIndent{false}</a><br/>
+%%% CUSTOM FONTS:<br/>
+% <a href="#h4.2.5">\NewFontFamily[]{}</a> % Optional.<br/>
+% <a href="#h4.2.5">\NewFontFace[]{}</a> % Optional.<br/>
+% <a href="#">\CreateFontFeature{}</a> % Optional.<br/>
+%%% OTHER:<br/>
+<a href="#h1.2.1.1">\setdefaultlanguage[variant=american]{english}</a> % polyglossia package.<br/>
+<a href="#">\microtypesetup{config=novel-microtype,stretch=20,shrink=20,final}</a> % microtype package.<br/>
+%%% EMERGENCY USE:<br/>
+% <a href="#hA.1">\ReworkTrimSize{}{}</a> % Optional.<br/>
+% <a href="#hA.2">\ReworkMargins{}{}{}{}</a> % Optional.<br/>
+%%% BEGIN DOCUMENT:<br/>
+\begin{document}<br/>
+<a href="#h8.2.1">\frontmatter</a> % Required.<br/>
+% Typically <a href="#hB">six pages</a> of front matter. <a href="#h8.2.1">Could be more</a>.<br/>
+<a href="#h8.2.2">\mainmatter</a> % Required<br/>
+% <a href="#h5">Chapters</a> go here.<br/>
+<a href="#h5.5">\cleartoend</a><br/>
+\end{document}
+</p>
</div>
-<p>Relax. Here is all you need to do: add <code>\ReworkTrimSize{5.06in}{7.81in}</code>. That's it. Your existing margins will be preserved. The font size, and line skip, will be cleverly re-scaled to fit the new dimensions. Paragraphs and pagination are the same as before.</p>
-<p>There are two Rework commands available. One changes the Trim Size without changing the margins. The other changes the margins without changing the Trim Size. If you wish to change both Trim Size and margins, you may use both commands.</p>
-<h3 id="hF.1">F.1. <code>\ReworkTrimSize{<em>width</em>}{<em>height</em>}</code></h3>
-<div class="d3" id="dF.1">
-<p>This command changes the <em>existing</em> Trim Size. If you do not use the <code>\SetTrimSize</code> command, then the existing Trim Size is the default. But if you do use <code>\SetTrimSize</code>, then you must leave that command as-is, and place <code>\ReworkTrimSize</code> later in the Preamble.</p>
-<p>If you used <code>\SetMediaSize</code>, you may leave that command as-is, or change it if you wish; the Trim Size does not care.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-<h3 id="hF.2">F.2. <code>\ReworkMargins{<em>top</em>}{<em>outside</em>}{<em>bottom</em>}{<em>inside</em>}</code></h3>
-<div class="d3" id="dF.2">
-<p>This command changes the <em>existing</em> margins. If you do not use the <code>\SetMargins</code> command, then the existing margins are the defaults. But if you do use <code>\SetMargins</code>, then you must leave that command as-is, and place <code>\ReworkMargins</code> later in the Preamble.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="hF.3">F.3. Example of Rework</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="dF.3">
-<p>Here is an example of the Rework commands in use. When the layout is reworked, the font size and (if necessary) baseline skip is scaled to fit the new dimensions, in a way that preserves the original paragraphs and pagination. This is done in a single pass: The method simultaneously works and re-works the layout.</p>
-<p>In the following example, the original font size is 11pt, and the baselineskip (calculated based on other factors) is 14.377pt. After rework, the font size is automatically re-calculated to 10.468pt, with lineskip 13.883pt.</p>
-<p class="code">
-<code>\documentclass{novel}<br/>
-\SetTrimSize{5.25in}{8in} % Original. American.<br/>
-\SetMargins{0.36in}{0.4in}{0.38in}{0.65in} % Original. American<br/>
-\ReworkTrimSize{5.06in}{7.81in} % New. Equivalent to British 129mmW x 198mmH.<br/>
-\ReworkMargins{12mm}{12mm}{12mm}{15mm} % New. British.
-</code></p>
-<p>Result with original layout (above Rework commands commented out):</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/originalspread.png" width="726" height="544" alt="original spread, before rework"/></p>
-<p>Result after Rework:</p>
-<p class="centerimg"><img src="html-resources/reworkedspread.png" width="700" height="531" alt="spread after rework"/></p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="hF.4">F.4. Limitations of Rework</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="dF.4">
-<p>• The technique has been tested, but it might not always work. Be sure to inspect the result carefully.</p>
-<p>• If you use Rework to make a radical size change, then the resulting font size or line skip might be unattractive.</p>
-<p>• If the reworked pages have one less line than expected (or one more), this is due to roundoff in the calculations. It can usually be fixed by adding or substracting as little as <code>0.001\nbs</code> from the top or bottom rework margin.</p>
-<p>• The biggest obstacle occurs when you specify some internal length in terms of absolute units (such as pt). It is always best to use relative units (such as <i>em</i>, or sometimes <code>\nbs</code>), so that they can be scaled along with the text:</p>
-<p class="code">
-Bad: <code>\hspace{6pt}</code> Good: <code>\hspace{0.5em}</code><br/>
-Bad: <code>\kern1pt</code> Good: <code>\kern.08em</code><br/>
-Bad: <code>\vspace{0.5in}</code> Good: <code>\vspace{2.4\nbs}</code>
-</p>
-<p>• When you use Rework, images are <em>not</em> scaled. Thus, they will have a different relationship to the surrounding text than they did before. In many cases, this is not a problem. However, an un-scaled image may disrupt the flow of text, or the number of lines in a page, or overlap text that was previously cleared. Look in the log file for an Alert message, which suggests an appropriate image scale, depending on how an image was placed. Problem areas can often be fixed be scaling the related image(s) in an external graphics program (see <a href="noveldocs-08-images.html#a8.3.3">Page 8</a>) then re-compiling with the scaled image(s).</p>
-<p>• Note that you may see the Alert whether or not there are problem images, so scaling images will not make the Alert go away. It is a friendly message.</p>
-<div style="clear:both"></div>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-<h3 id="hF.5">F.5. Scaling Images after <code>\Rework</code>.</h3>
-<div class="d3" id="dF.5">
-<p>When you use one or both of the Rework commands, the font size and/or the baselineskip will change. However, it does not scale images. In many cases, there is no problem. But in some cases, an un-scaled image will disrupt the previous flow of text or pagination. If you look in the log file, you will see an Alert message, which suggests (only suggests) appropriate values for scaling problem images, depending on whether they are placed inline or block. Then, you should re-work the image in an external image editor. When you scale the image, be sure that the revised version is at the correct resolution of 300dpi or 600dpi, or whatever is necessary.</p>
-<p>It is best to go back to your copy of the original artwork, before you exported it to <i>png</i> or <i>jpg</i>. But what if you do not have anything but the 1-bit or grayscale images that you created earlier? Then do this (in GIMP):</p>
-<p>(1) If the image is 1-bit, change to Color>Mode grayscale.</p>
-<p>(2) Use Image>Scale Image to get new dimensions, at 600 or 300 pixels per inch. Careful: Sometimes when you change size, it auto-changes resolution, or vice-versa. Click back and forth in the dialog box, to ensure that both the dimensions and resolution are correct. Use Cubic interpolation or better.</p>
-<p>(3) Change View to something that puts the image at its approximate print size.</p>
-<p>(4) If desired, play with Filters>Enhance>Sharpen.</p>
-<p>(5) Image>Flatten.</p>
-<p>(6) If the image is to be 1-bit line art, then use GaphicsMagick or ImageMagick as described in section 8.3.1.</p>
-<p>(7) Export as png, then use GraphicsMagick or Image Magick as described in section 8.3.2.</p>
-<p>The above does not take too much time, and will provide superior results. Note that when an image is placed within text, the calculation for text positioning is different than the calculation for image positioning. It is possible (although unlikely) that a <code>\Rework</code> situation will cause an unexpected page break, due to roundoff error in the placement of the final line on a page. This can be fixed by subtracting (or, in some cases, adding) as little as <code>\vspace{-0.001\nbs}</code> before or after the re-scaled image.</p>
-</div><!-- end class="d3" -->
-
-
-</div><!-- end class="d2" -->
+</div><!-- end F -->
</div><!-- end Appendix F -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel.tex 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/lualatex/novel/novel.tex 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -1,9 +1,11 @@
-% !TeX program = LuaLaTeX
+% !TeX TS-program = LuaLaTeX
% !TeX encoding = UTF-8
%
-% SOURCE CODE FOR FILE novel.pdf, the cover info
-% for novel document class.
-\documentclass{novel} % v. 1.40.2 or later
+% SOURCE CODE FOR FILE novel.pdf, the cover info for novel document class.
+% IF YOU COMPILE THIS DOCUMENT: Be sure that both this file and
+% novel.pdf (if present) have read/write permissions for any user.
+% Otherwise, compile may fail at the point where files are written.
+\documentclass{novel} % v. 1.41 or later
% Almost all settings are defaults.
\SetHeadFootStyle{3}
\SetTitle{Novel Document Class} % only footer, with page number
@@ -11,19 +13,21 @@
% However, not every P.O.D. service needs PDF/X these days.
\SetPDFX[CGATSTR001]{X-1a:2001}
\begin{document}
-\begin{ChapterStart}[14]
-\vspace{2\nbs} % \nbs is normal baselineskip
+\begin{ChapterStart}[8]
+\vspace{\nbs} % \nbs is normal baselineskip
\ChapterTitle{NOVEL}
-\null
+\vspace{\nbs}
\ChapterSubtitle{A Document Class for the Rest of Us}
-\vspace{2.5\nbs}
-\ChapterDeco[4]{\decoglyph{r9554}}
-\null
-{\centering\textit{It was a dark and stormy night.}\par}
+\vspace{\nbs}
+\ChapterDeco[4]{\decoglyph{n9548}}
\end{ChapterStart}
-The \emph{novel} document class is for writers of original fiction, to be printed to paper, with particular attention to the requirements of the print-on-demand market. Non-color interiors and color covers are supported. Images are supported, but only as they might be used in fiction, not picture books.
+\textbf{Where is the documentation??} It is in HTML format, and cannot be retreived via \textit{texdoc}. If you have this package installed, look for (texroot)/doc/lualatex/novel/novel-documentation.html. If you are online, got to the CTAN page at https://ctan.org/pkg/novel and click ``Package Documentation (HTML).''
+\scenebreak
+
+\textbf{Description:} The \emph{novel} document class is for writers of original fiction, to be printed to paper, with attention to the requirements of the print-on-demand market. Non-color interiors and color covers are supported. Images are supported, but only as they might be used in fiction, not picture books.
+
If your work is an E-book, or uses interior color other than gray, or is academic, then this document class is not for you.
But if you are writing a detective novel, or science fiction, or a collection of short stories, then read on!
@@ -54,16 +58,12 @@
\QuickChapter{4. Version}
-\noindent 1.40, 2017-08-14: removed debug feature, major docs rewrite.
+\noindent 1.41, 2017-10-02: even better docs, minor internal changes.
-\noindent 1.38, 2017-08-15: corrected offset in cover artwork.
+\noindent 1.40, 2017-09-14: removed debug feature, major docs rewrite.
-\noindent 1.36, 2017-08-10: minor documentation correction.
+\noindent 1-32--1.38, various fixes.
-\noindent 1.34, 2017-07-31: added debug feature for maintainers.
-
-\noindent 1.32, 2017-07-26: bug fixes.
-
\noindent 1.2, 2017-06-06: added code for color image artwork.
\noindent 1.1, 2017-03-01: initial public release.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-CGATSTR001.clo
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-CGATSTR001.clo 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-CGATSTR001.clo 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% Typically used in the USA. Novel file version 1.40.2
+% Typically used in the USA. Novel file version 1.41
% The values of the arguments are public industry standards.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-CalculateLayout.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-CalculateLayout.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-CalculateLayout.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-CalculateLayout.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (layout calculations)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (layout calculations)]
%%
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-ChapterScene.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-ChapterScene.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-ChapterScene.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-ChapterScene.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (chapter and scene macros)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (chapter and scene macros)]
%%
@@ -36,27 +36,8 @@
% \sceneline centers a line, about 1/3 textwidth.
% \scenestars centers three widely-spaced asterisks.
% Default behavior is \noindent for following paragraph.
-% Use \AfterScenebreak{indent or noindent} in preamble to change this globally.
+% Use \SetScenebreakIndent{true or false} in Preamble to change this globally.
% Either way, the local behavior can be changed using \indent or \noindent.
-\newif\if at indentAfterScenebreak \@indentAfterScenebreakfalse
-\newcommand\IndentAfterScenebreak{\@indentAfterScenebreaktrue} % deprected from v. 1.40.2
-\newcommand\AfterScenebreak[1]{% indent or noindent. From v. 1.40.2
- \def\ngoodarg{false}
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{indent}}{%
- \def\ngoodarg{true}
- \@indentAfterScenebreaktrue
- }{}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{noindent}}{%
- \def\ngoodarg{true}
- \@indentAfterScenebreakfalse
- }{}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\ngoodarg}{false}}{%
- \ClassError{novel}{Bad argument for \string\AfterScenebreak\space}%
- {\string\AfterScenebreak\space argument must be indent or noindent.}%
- }{}%
-}
-\AfterScenebreak{noindent} % default
-%
\newcommand\scenebreak{\null}
%
\newcommand\sceneline{%
@@ -98,16 +79,60 @@
\newlength\@oldparindent
%
% The argument is the number of normal baselineskips high (integer GTE 4).
-\newenvironment{ChapterStart}[1][\@setchapterstartheight] % default 10
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+\DeclareDocumentEnvironment {ChapterStart} { O{\@setchapterstartheight} O{\@setchapterstart} }
{%
- \FPifint{#1}\else%
- \ClassError{novel}{\string\SetChapterStartHeight\space must be integer GTE 4}%
- {Height of ChapterStart must be integer, greater than or equal to 4}%
- \fi%
- \FPiflt{#1}{4}%
- \ClassError{novel}{\string\SetChapterStartHeight\space must be integer GTE 4}%
- {Height of ChapterStart must be integer, greater than or equal to 4}%
+ \gdef\@thiscsstyle{#2}%
+ \thispagestyle{\@thiscsstyle}%
+ \setlength\@oldparindent{\parindent}%
+ \global\@oldparindent=\@oldparindent%
+ \setlength\parindent{0pt}%
+ \global\parindent=\parindent%
+ \ResetFootnoteSymbol% resets symbolic markers, but not numerical markers
+ \IfStrEq{#1}{*}{\gdef\@thiscsheight{\@setchapterstartheight}}{\gdef\@thiscsheight{#1}}%
+ \FPsub{\@fixlines}{\@thiscsheight}{2}%
+ \FPsub{\@fixlines}{\@fixlines}{0.001}% fudge to avoid rounding problems
+ \FPround{\@thiscsheight}{\@thiscsheight}{0}%
+ \FPiflt{\@thiscsheight}{4}%
+ \IfStrEq{\@thiscsstyle}{dropfolioinside}{%
+ \ClassError{novel}{ChapterStart~ height~ insufficient~ for~ dropfolioinside}%
+ {With~ dropfolioinside,~ the~ ChapterStart~ height~ must~ be~ at~ least~ 4.}%
+ }{}%
\else\fi%
+ \FPiflt{\@thiscsheight}{3}%
+ \ClassError{novel}{ChapterStart~ height~ must~ be~ at~ least~ 3}%
+ {If~ you~ need~ height~ less~ than~ 3,~ consider~ \string\QuickChapter\space~ instead.}%
+ \else\fi%
+ \null% always a line above the first thing to appear within the environment
+ \setcounter{@linequarter}{0}%
+ \begin{textblock*}{\textwidth}[0,0](0pt,0pt)%
+}{% close the environment:
+ \ifthenelse{%
+ \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{1} \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{5}%
+ \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{9} \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{13}%
+ }{\vspace{0.75\nbs}}{}%
+ \ifthenelse{%
+ \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{2} \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{6}%
+ \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{10} \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{14}%
+ }{\vspace{0.5\nbs}}{}%
+ \ifthenelse{%
+ \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{3} \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{7}%
+ \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{11} \OR \equal{\value{@linequarter}}{15}%
+ }{\vspace{0.25\nbs}}{}%
+ \end{textblock*}%
+ \vspace{\@fixlines\nbs}%
+ \if at addCTline\null\fi%
+ \setlength\parindent{\@oldparindent}%
+ \global\parindent=\parindent%
+ \nov at AfterGroup\NoIndentAfterThis% etextools and noindentafter
+}
+\ExplSyntaxOff % end ChapterStart environment
+
+
+
+%%%%%
+\newenvironment{OldChapterStart}[1][\@setchapterstartheight] % default 10
+{%
\setlength\@oldparindent{\parindent}%
\global\@oldparindent=\@oldparindent%
\setlength\parindent{0pt}%
@@ -139,6 +164,13 @@
\global\parindent=\parindent%
\nov at AfterGroup\NoIndentAfterThis% etextools and noindentafter
}
+%%%%%
+
+
+
+
+
+
%%
\LetLtxMacro\ChapterDisplay\ChapterStart\relax % deprecated
\LetLtxMacro\endChapterDisplay\endChapterStart\relax % deprecated
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FOGRA39.clo
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FOGRA39.clo 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FOGRA39.clo 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% Typically used in Europe. Novel file version 1.40.2
+% Typically used in Europe. Novel file version 1.41
% The values of the arguments are public industry standards.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FileData.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FileData.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FileData.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-FileData.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (File Data settings)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (File Data settings)]
%%
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@
% Changing this does not change the software, it just changes the name.
% Normally leave as default, but can change if urgent.
\gdef\SetApplication#1{\gdef\@novelApplication{#1}}
-\SetApplication{LaTeX with novel and microtype} % default
+\SetApplication{LuaLaTeX with novel and microtype} % default
%
% \SetProducer{} (rarely used)
% Name of the software that compiles to source to make PDF.
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
% Changing this does not change the software, it just changes the name.
% Normally leave as default, but can change if urgent.
\gdef\SetProducer#1{\gdef\@novelProducer{#1}}
-\SetProducer{LuaTeX with novel-pdfx and hyperref} % default
+\SetProducer{LuaLaTeX with novel-pdfx and hyperref} % default
%
% Although some other data fields could have been added,
% they do not pertain to fiction, especially if your book is print-on-demand.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FontDefaults.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FontDefaults.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-FontDefaults.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-FontDefaults.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (default fonts)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (default fonts)]
%%
@@ -22,7 +22,6 @@
%%
-
%% Most TeX installations will use Latin Modern or Computer Modern
%% as default fonts. These are unsuitable for commercial fiction.
%% But `novel' class uses Libertinus as defaults.
@@ -135,7 +134,7 @@
%%
\newif \if at headfontdefault
\if at headfontset\else
- \SetHeadFont[\@parentfontfeatures,Scale=0.92]{\@parentfontname}
+ \SetHeadFont[Letters=SmallCaps,\@parentfontfeatures,Scale=0.92]{\@parentfontname}
\global\@headfontdefaulttrue
\fi
\newfontfamily\headfont[\@headfontfeatures]{\@headfontname}
@@ -211,42 +210,7 @@
%%
-% Get rid of previously-defined fake polyglossia commands,
-% but you can still use \setkeys from that package:
-\let\SetMainLanguage\relax
-\let\SetDefaultLanguage\relax
-\let\SetOtherLanguage\relax
-\let\SetOtherLanguages\relax
-\let\setmainlanguage\relax
-\let\setdefaultlanguage\relax
-\let\setotherlanguage\relax
-\let\setotherlanguages\relax
-% Now that the basic fonts are defined, we can load these packages:
-\RequirePackage{polyglossia} % Instead of babel.
%
-\ifthenelse{\equal{\@setmainlang}{}}{
- \setmainlanguage{english}
-}{
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\@setmainlangopt}{}}{
- \setmainlanguage{\@setmainlang}
- }{
- \setmainlanguage[\@setmainlangopt]{\@setmainlang}
- }
-}
-\ifthenelse{\equal{\@setotherlang}{}}{}{
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\@setotherlangopt}{}}{
- \setotherlanguage{\@setotherlang}
- }{
- \setotherlanguage[\@setotherlangopt]{\@setotherlang}
- }
-}
-\ifthenelse{\equal{\@setotherlangs}{}}{}{
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\@setotherlangsopt}{}}{
- \setotherlanguages{\@setotherlangs}
- }{
- \setotherlanguages[\@setotherlangsopt]{\@setotherlangs}
- }
-}
%% This provides default microtype settings, allows the user to over-ride,
% and hopefully prevents the user from choosing inappropriate settings:
\let\microtypesetup\relax % fake command no longer needed
@@ -259,7 +223,7 @@
}
\else % user did not write \microtypesetup{} in Preamble
\gdef\@mymicrotypeset{%
- config=novel-microtype,stretch=20,shrink=20}
+ config=novel-microtype,stretch=20,shrink=20,final}
\fi
\RequirePackage[\@mymicrotypeset,final,tracking]{microtype}
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-Footnotes.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-Footnotes.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-Footnotes.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-Footnotes.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (commands for footnotes and endnotes)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (commands for footnotes and endnotes)]
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-HeadFootStyles.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-HeadFootStyles.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-HeadFootStyles.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-HeadFootStyles.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (header and footer styles)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (header and footer layouts and styles)]
%%
@@ -20,11 +20,13 @@
%% File `novel-LayoutSettings.sty' reserved space for header/footer,
%% but did not place anything there. In this file, `fancyhdr' syntax
-%% defines the standard styles. These styles are not activated until
-%% \AtEndPreamble, and only if the user did not already define the styles
+%% defines the layout. The layout are not activated until
+%% \AtEndPreamble, and only if the user did not already define the layout
%% in the Preamble.
+%% Note that `style' sometimes means `layout`.
+
% @isVerso true = even page, false = odd page. Only accurate during shipout.
% Not to be used in commands that are inserted in main text!
\newif \if at isVerso \@isVersofalse
@@ -56,10 +58,12 @@
\gdef\@@loosehead{#1}
\FPdiv{\@loosehead}{\@@loosehead}{10} % change in method of using fontspec with microtype
\FPmin{\@looseheadnum}{\@loosehead}{50} % Don't want numbers too loose.
+ \FPdiv{\@looseheadword}{\@loosehead}{30} % new in v. 1.40.3.
+ \FPadd{\@looseheadword}{\@looseheadword}{1}
}
\SetLooseHead{50}
% Create flags to know if \fancyhead and \fancyfoot have been defined by user,
-% somewhere in the Preamble. If not, then pre-defined styles based on trimsize
+% somewhere in the Preamble. If not, then pre-defined layout based on trimsize
% will be applied \AtEndPreamble.
\LetLtxMacro{\@tempFancyhead}{\fancyhead} % from package `letltxmacro'
\renewcommand\fancyhead[2][]{%
@@ -79,7 +83,7 @@
}
%
\LetLtxMacro{\@myTempTPS}{\thispagestyle}
-% Re-define \thispagestyle based on layout. When style requests only the page
+% Re-define \thispagestyle based on layout. When it requests only the page
% number, decide what to do based on this command and whether footer is used:
\newif \if at thispagestyleset \@thispagestylesetfalse
%
@@ -153,15 +157,15 @@
% \versoheadtext is initialized to \theauthor
% \rectoheadtext is initialized to \thetitle
\@ifundefined{versoheadtext}{
- \NewVersoHeadText{\smcp{\StrSubstitute{\theauthor}{\space}{ \,}}}
+ \NewVersoHeadText{\theauthor} % revised in v. 1.40.3
}{}
\@ifundefined{rectoheadtext}{
- \NewRectoHeadText{\smcp{\StrSubstitute{\thetitle}{\space}{ \,}}}
+ \NewRectoHeadText{\thetitle} % revised in v. 1.40.3
}{}
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- % IF YOU ARE WRITING YOUR OWN HEADER/FOOTER STYLE:
- % Look here for the pre-defined styles, for use as models.
+ % IF YOU ARE WRITING YOUR OWN HEADER/FOOTER LAYOUT:
+ % Look here for the pre-defined layouts, for use as models.
% Note that if you write \fancyhead or \fancyfoot in the Preamble,
% that sets the \@styledHeader flag, so these codes do not over-ride yours.
\ifthenelse{\equal{\my at HeadFootStyle}{1}}{ % default
@@ -236,7 +240,7 @@
}{}
%
%
- % END PRE-DEFINED STYLES.
+ % END PRE-DEFINED LAYOUTS AND STYLES.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
%
% Substitute for \thispagestyle{plain}
@@ -281,10 +285,12 @@
\widthof{{\headfont{\addfontfeature{LetterSpace=\@looseheadnum}\pagenumberstyle}}}}%
\if at offcenterTrim%
\setlength\temp at pgnumraise{%
- \New at BottomMargin+\New at MediaHeight-\New at TrimHeight}%
+ \dimexpr\New at BottomMargin+\New at MediaHeight-\New at TrimHeight}%
+ \global\temp at pgnumraise=\temp at pgnumraise%
\else%
\setlength\temp at pgnumraise{%
- \New at BottomMargin+0.5\New at MediaHeight-0.5\New at TrimHeight}%
+ \dimexpr\New at BottomMargin+0.5\New at MediaHeight-0.5\New at TrimHeight}%
+ \global\temp at pgnumraise=\temp at pgnumraise%
\fi%
\check at IsVerso%
\if at isVerso%
@@ -342,7 +348,7 @@
\gdef\NewVersoHeadText#1{
\FPdiv{\@myk}{\@loosehead}{500}
\setlength\@mykem{\@myk em}
- \gdef\versoheadtext{\gdef~{\kern\@mykem\space}#1\gdef~{\nobreakspace {}}}
+ \gdef\versoheadtext{#1}
}
\let\SetVersoHeadText\NewVersoHeadText\relax % for convenience
\let\RenewVersoHeadText\NewVersoHeadText\relax % for convenience
@@ -350,7 +356,7 @@
\gdef\NewRectoHeadText#1{
\FPdiv{\@myk}{\@loosehead}{500}
\setlength\@mykem{\@myk em}
- \gdef\rectoheadtext{\gdef~{\kern\@mykem\space}#1\gdef~{\nobreakspace {}}}
+ \gdef\rectoheadtext{#1}
}
\let\SetRectoHeadText\NewRectoHeadText\relax % for convenience
\let\RenewRectoHeadText\NewRectoHeadText\relax % for convenience
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-Images.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-Images.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-Images.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-Images.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (image placement)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (image placement)]
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-JC200103.clo
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-JC200103.clo 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-JC200103.clo 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% Typically used in Japan. Novel file version 1.40.2
+% Typically used in Japan. Novel file version 1.41
% The values of the arguments are public industry standards.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-LayoutSettings.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-LayoutSettings.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-LayoutSettings.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-LayoutSettings.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (layout settings)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (layout settings)]
%%
@@ -234,11 +234,11 @@
\gdef\SetHeadStyle#1{\gdef\my at HeadFootStyle{0}} % deprecated
\SetHeadFootStyle{0}
\else
- % See docs part 7 for available style choices:
+ % See docs for available layout choices:
\gdef\SetHeadFootStyle#1{\gdef\my at HeadFootStyle{#1}}
\gdef\SetHeadStyle#1{\gdef\my at HeadFootStyle{#1}} % deprecated
\fi
-% See docs part 7 for what these emblems do, if used:
+% See docs for what these emblems do, if used:
\newcommand\SetEmblems[2]{ % verso, recto
\gdef\my at VersoEmblem{{\headfont #1}}
\gdef\my at RectoEmblem{{\headfont #2}}
@@ -287,9 +287,10 @@
} % end \@reserveHFspace
% Each new chapter generally has its own header/footer style. This allows a
% default setting when chapters begin with ChapterStart environment:
-\gdef\SetChapterStart#1{\gdef\@setchapterstart{#1}}
-\SetChapterStart{footer} % default
-% New in version 1.40.1:
+\gdef\SetChapterStartStyle#1{\gdef\@setchapterstart{#1}} % from v1.40.3.
+\let\SetChapterStart\SetChapterStartStyle\relax % deprecated from v1.40.3.
+\SetChapterStartStyle{footer} % default
+% New in version 1.40.2:
\gdef\SetChapterStartHeight#1{%
\FPifint{#1}\else%
\ClassError{novel}{\string\SetChapterStartHeight\space must be integer GTE 4}%
@@ -302,9 +303,28 @@
\gdef\@setchapterstartheight{#1}%
}
\SetChapterStartHeight{10} % default
-
-
% See novel.cls for the accompanying AtBeginDocument routine.
+% Scene breaks:
+\newif\if at indentAfterScenebreak \@indentAfterScenebreakfalse
+\newcommand\IndentAfterScenebreak{\@indentAfterScenebreaktrue} % deprected from v. 1.40.3
+% \SetScenebreakIndent controls whether line after \scenebreak, \sceneline, or \scenestars
+% will be indented. Set true or false, default false.
+\newcommand\SetScenebreakIndent[1]{% true or false, default false. From v. 1.40.3
+ \def\ngoodarg{no}
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{true}}{%
+ \def\ngoodarg{yes}
+ \@indentAfterScenebreaktrue
+ }{}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{false}}{%
+ \def\ngoodarg{yes}
+ \@indentAfterScenebreakfalse
+ }{}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\ngoodarg}{no}}{%
+ \ClassError{novel}{Bad argument for \string\SetScenebreakIndent\space}%
+ {\string\SetScenebreakIndent\space argument must be true or false.}%
+ }{}%
+}
+\SetScenebreakIndent{false} % default
%
%% End reserve space for header/footer and set default ChapterStart
@@ -326,11 +346,11 @@
%%
-%%
+%% Markers (superscript, subscripts):
\newtoggle{@usesymbolmark} % true when footnote markers are symbolic
\newtoggle{@realmarker} % true when OT features sups, sinf, subs requested
%
-% \SetMarkers does two things.
+% \SetMarkerStyle does two things.
% Option real: OT features sups, sinf, subs requested. Fake if not available.
% Option fake: Always fake OT features sups, sinf, subs.
% Mandatory: asterisk, dagger, number. Pertains to footnote markers only.
@@ -357,6 +377,7 @@
{Optional: real, fake. Required: asterisk, dagger, number.}%
}{}
}
+\LetLtxMacro{\SetMarkers}{\SetMarkerStyle} % backwards compatibilty pre-v1.40.3.
%
\SetMarkerStyle[real]{asterisk} % default
%%
@@ -475,20 +496,29 @@
%% Prior to v. 1.1, parentfont was known as masterfont. Backwards compatible.
%
\providecommand\rmdefault{lmr} % should be lmr anyway, at this point.
-\let\@noveloldrmdefault\rmdefault % stored for later comparison.
+\LetLtxMacro\@noveloldrmdefault\rmdefault\relax % stored for later comparison.
% The `no-math' option prevents fontspec from tracking certain font changes.
% This is probably necessary, since novel does some of its own font tracking:
\RequirePackage[no-math]{fontspec} % For LuaLaTeX. NOT package `fontenc'.
-\defaultfontfeatures{} % reset
-% User-created fonts (not standard, not novel-specific defaults:
-\defaultfontfeatures{%
- SmallCapsFeatures={Renderer=Basic},Kerning=On,%
- Ligatures=TeX,%
-}%
% You shouldn't be doing math! You can use \setmathfont, if you wish.
% If you must load a math font package, it should be done using
% \RequirePackage before (yes, before) calling the document class.
\RequirePackage{unicode-math}
+%
+% Math font no kern:
+\defaultfontfeatures{SmallCapsFeatures={Renderer=Basic},Ligatures=TeX,}
+%
+\IfFontExistsTF{Libertinus Math}
+{\setmathfont{Libertinus Math}}
+{\IfFontExistsTF{Asana Math}
+ {\setmathfont{Asana Math}}
+ {\IfFontExistsTF{STIX Math}
+ {\setmathfont{STIX Math}}
+ {\setmathfont{Latin Modern Math}} % last choice
+ }
+}% end \IfFontExistsTF nest.
+% For user-created font commands:
+\defaultfontfeatures{SmallCapsFeatures={Renderer=Basic},Kerning=On,Ligatures=TeX,}%
%%
%% This could have been easier, but fontspec allows mandatory and optional
% arguments to appear in either order. We wish to store the fontnames
@@ -541,7 +571,7 @@
\gdef\@headfontname{}
\DeclareDocumentCommand \SetHeadFont { O{} m O{} } {%
\novel at checkfeatures{#1,#3}
- \gdef\@headfontfeatures{#1,#3}
+ \gdef\@headfontfeatures{WordSpace=\@looseheadword,LetterSpace=\@loosehead,#1,#3} % revised in v. 1.40.3.
\gdef\@headfontname{#2}
\global\@headfontsettrue
}%
@@ -603,7 +633,7 @@
% In the document body: {\addfontfeature{myfs} text}
\DeclareDocumentCommand \CreateFontFeature { m m } {%
\IfEndWith{#1}{,}{\StrGobbleRight{#1}{1}[\@fakezero]}{\def\@fakezero{#1}}
- \def\@fakeone{"\@fakezero"} %%%%%
+ \def\@fakeone{"\@fakezero"}
\StrSubstitute{\@fakeone}{=}{"]="}[\@fakeone]
\StrSubstitute{\@fakeone}{,}{",\space["}[\@fakeone]
\directlua{
@@ -620,41 +650,6 @@
%% end definition of parent and other fonts.
-%% FAKE POLYGLOSSIA COMMANDS
-%% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-% The polyglossia package is not loaded until \AtEndPreamble.
-% So, its commands are not directly available in the Preamble.
-% These fake commands store the data. Later, the commands will be relaxed,
-% then the real polyglossia commands can work, and the data will be passed
-% to the real commands at that time.
-% Default main language will be set to english by novel-FontDefaults.sty.
-\newcommand\SetMainLanguage[2][]{
- \gdef\@setmainlangopt{#1}
- \gdef\@setmainlang{#2}
-}
-\let\setmainlanguage\SetMainLanguage\relax
-\newcommand\SetDefaultLanguage[2][]{
- \gdef\@setmainlangopt{#1}
- \gdef\@setmainlang{#2}
-}
-\let\setdefaultlanguage\SetDefaultLanguage\relax
-\SetMainLanguage[]{} % if not user-specified, defaults to english
-\newcommand\SetOtherLanguage[2][]{
- \gdef\@setotherlangopt{#1}
- \gdef\@setotherlang{#2}
-}
-\let\setotherlanguage\SetOtherLanguage\relax
-\SetOtherLanguage[]{} % default empty
-\newcommand\SetOtherLanguages[2][]{
- \gdef\@setotherlangsopt{#1}
- \gdef\@setotherlangs{#2}
-}
-\let\setotherlanguages\SetOtherLanguages\relax
-\SetOtherLanguages[]{} % default empty
-%
-%% end fake polyglossia commands.
-
-
%% FRONTMATTER, MAINMATTER. BUT NO BACKMATTER!
%% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
%
@@ -695,7 +690,7 @@
\setcounter{page}{1}
}
%
-\def\backmatter{\@ifstar\@backmatterst\@backmatterns} % obsolete from v. 1.40.
+\def\backmatter{\@ifstar\@backmatterst\@backmatterns} % asterisk obsolete from v. 1.40.
\def\@backmatterst{%
\ClassWarning{novel}{Command \string\backmatter*\ ignored. Do not use.^^J}%
}
@@ -702,7 +697,7 @@
%
\def\@backmatterns{%
\cleartorecto% v. 1.40.2
- \ClassWarning{novel}{Command \string\backmatter\ merely clears to recto.^^J}% v. 1.40.2
+ \typeout{Class `novel' Alert: \string\backmatter\space merely clears to recto. See docs.^^J}% v. 1.42
%
}
%
@@ -764,6 +759,12 @@
%% end disable or neutralize.
+%% polyglossia
+% Language-specific settings:
+\RequirePackage{polyglossia} % loading order changed in v. 1.40.3.
+%% end polyglossia
+
+
%%
%% End of file `novel-LayoutSettings.sty'.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-TextMacros.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-TextMacros.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-TextMacros.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-TextMacros.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (text macros usable within document body)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (text macros usable within document body)]
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-glyphtounicode.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-glyphtounicode.tex 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-glyphtounicode.tex 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-gyphtounicode.tex}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (additional glyph to unicode)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (additional glyph to unicode)]
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-microtype.cfg
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-microtype.cfg 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-microtype.cfg 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
%%
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesFile{novel-microtype.cfg}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (microtype configuration file for novel class)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (microtype configuration file for novel class)]
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% FONT SETS
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-pdfx.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-pdfx.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-pdfx.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
%%
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesFile{novel-pdfx.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (PDF/X support for novel class)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (PDF/X support for novel class)]
% This package supports, and is part of, class `novel'.
% No support for anything but LuaLaTeX.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-xmppacket.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-xmppacket.sty 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel-xmppacket.sty 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
%%
%%
\ProvidesFile{novel-xmppacket.sty}%
-[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX file (novel XMP packet template)]
+[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX file (novel XMP packet template)]
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel.cls
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel.cls 2017-10-02 11:31:07 UTC (rev 45449)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/lualatex/novel/novel.cls 2017-10-02 21:57:58 UTC (rev 45450)
@@ -17,10 +17,11 @@
%%
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
% Actually needs LuaLaTeX, at least version 0.95 from TeXLive 2016.
-\ProvidesClass{novel}[2017/09/21 v1.40.2 LaTeX document class]
+\ProvidesClass{novel}[2017/10/02 v1.41 LaTeX document class]
%%
%% Version 1.40: removed `debug' option (was not useful). Major docs rewrite.
+%% Versions 1.40.x: Incremental changes, leading to 1.42.
%% Version 1.38: corrected offset in cover artwork; some docs modified.
@@ -109,7 +110,7 @@
% fontspec -- in novel-LayoutSettings.sty
% unicode-math -- in novel-LayoutSettings.sty
% eso-pic -- in novel-CalculateLayout.sty
-% polyglossia -- in novel-FontDefaults.sty
+% polyglossia -- in novel-LayoutSettings.sty
% microtype -- in novel-FontDefaults.sty
% hyperref -- in novel-pdfx.sty
% fancyhdr -- in novel.HeadFootStyles.sty
@@ -337,6 +338,9 @@
%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
%
\AtEndPreamble{
+ % If user did not choose language, default is here. Sorry, Brits:
+ % Macro \xpg at main@language is gdef'd by \setdefaultlanguage in polyglossia.
+ \@ifundefined{xpg at main@language}{\setdefaultlanguage[variant=american]{english}}{}
\RequirePackage{novel-CalculateLayout}
\RequirePackage{novel-FontDefaults}
\renewcommand\textls[2][]{#2%
@@ -447,18 +451,15 @@
\ifthenelse{\equal{\@setchapterstart}{forcenumber}}{%
\def\@setchapterstartOK{true}%
}{}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\@setchapterstart}{dropfolio}}{% no footnote there
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\@setchapterstart}{dropfolioinside}}{%
\def\@setchapterstartOK{true}%
}{}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\@setchapterstart}{dropfoliolater}}{% footnote(s) there
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\@setchapterstart}{dropfoliobeneath}}{%
\def\@setchapterstartOK{true}%
}{}%
- \ifthenelse{\equal{\@setchapterstart}{foliobeneath}}{%
- \def\@setchapterstartOK{true}%
- }{}%
\ifthenelse{\equal{\@setchapterstartOK}{true}}{}{%
- \ClassError{novel}{\string\SetChapterStart\space bad argument}%
- {\string\SetChapterStart\space only allows certain choices.^^J}%
+ \ClassError{novel}{\string\SetChapterStartStyle\space bad argument}%
+ {\string\SetChapterStartStyle\space only allows certain choices.^^J}%
}%
%%
%% Pertains to novel-TextMacros.sty:
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list